Tag Archives: Obama

STREET GANGS ARE BEING ARMED BY THE SHADOW GOVERNMENT

OBAMA-HOLDER-TRAITORS

By Howard Nema

In the video below, an ex-Chicago gang member describes how crates of fully automatic firearms would regularly be found in the streets and alleys of the hood creating the war zone now nicknamed Chiraq.  

The ex-gang member mentions what he believes is “a diabolical plot” affecting only low-income areas, emphasizing that many of the firearms found were class-3 automatic weapons, the most difficult to obtain legally.

He’s right.

In his 1991 book, BEHOLD A PALE HORSE, former Navy Intelligence officer WILLIAM COOPER wrote the following:

For many years the Secret Government has been importing drugs and selling them to the people, mainly the poor and minorities. Social welfare programs were put into place to create a dependent, nonworking element in our society. The government then began to remove these programs to 
force people into a criminal class that did not exist in the '50s and '60s. 

The government encouraged the manufacture and importation of military firearms for the criminals to use. This is intended to foster a 
feeling of insecurity, which would lead the American people to voluntarily disarm themselves by passing laws against firearms. 

Sound familiar?  Gang violence.  Like Planned Parenthood and other depopulation schemes, increasing gang violence is another method being employed to demonize firearms and supplement the elite’s ongoing eugenics program to incrementally depopulate  minorities and the poor, complete with built in plausible deniability.

If criminals  aren’t allowed to buy firearms, yet these hard to get guns are found everywhere, where are they coming from?    The black market?    Or could it be a Black Operation? 

Thanks to unsecure borders, Fast And Furious and other subversive operations, there has been  a dramatic rise in crime and gun violence at the southern border and a huge spike in shootings in heavily gun controlled cities like Detroit and Chicago.

Detroit took action.  Anti gun freaks were flabbergasted when the City’s Chief of Police told citizens that crime and violence was out of control and that citizens should arm themselves because the Police could not properly protect them.

Instead of praising the Chief for being honest and caring for the welfare of the community, the Chief was lambasted by the anti-gun lobby and the controlled mainstream media.

Despite their liberal cries, gun ownership in Detroit quickly increased and crime and gun violence dramatically decreased.

In sharp contrast, there were more than 4000 shootings in Chicago in 2016.

Here are the stats:


Chicago shooting victims

Jan. 1, 2017 – Jan. 15, 2017  104 Shooting Victims

Jan. 1, 2016 – Dec. 31, 2016 4,368 Shooting victims

Chicago has the strictest gun control laws in the country, why does it have the highest rates of gun violence?

For 8 years, the Obama Regime ignored the plight of his hometown of Chicago and other impoverished areas in the black community, preferring to golf with white special interest crony capitalist billionaires in Hawaii in the winter and Martha’s Vineyard in the summer. 

Image result for Obama golfing with white billionaires

Could this be because the gun violence statistics prove gun control is an ineffective tool against crime, or could this all be part of greater, more nefarious plan? 

holder-sharpton

Consider Obama’s political henchmen like street agitator Al Sharpton and other race baiters are not interested at all in finding and implementing real solutions to the many problems in the black community, but rather stir up hatred and dissent by playing the divisive race card.   The  race industry is their bread and butter.

BALTIMORE RIOT ALL

Booker T. Washington describes these type of charlatans:

Image result for booker t washington

Sharpton and other Saul Alinsky inspired Cultural Marxist agitators stick with the program,  intentionally refusing to address the core problems and issues in the black community just as they intentionally refuse to address the issue of Radical Islamic Terrorism.

I often wonder what Martin Luther King would say about the race industry, black on black crime,  the decimation of the black family and other issues like abortion that specifically targets and plagues the black community  since his murder?

What would Dr. King think of his old Civil Rights buddy Jessie Jackson, who “took the reigns” after King’s assassination and MSNBC community agitator Al Sharpton?

What would he have thought about the all the riots, racial division, festering hatred and violence against police officers and the war on Christians and conservatives under the Obama Regime?   Dr. King was not a radical.

Had he lived,  I believe none of these things would have been allowed to occur.  Education, dignity, morality and upward mobility in the black community would have soared under King’s leadership. 

Had he lived, Dr. King would be a voice of reason and sanity in the rising sea of designed dependence, chaos and mayhem we have seen for the last 8 years.

Had he lived, today would have been Dr. Martin Luther King’s 88th birthday.

I firmly believe if King had lived the black community would not have taken such a downward spiral as we have seen.   In fact, I believe the opposite would have occurred.

The fact is, King believed in equality in opportunity, not dependence on a government slave plantation. 

King was not a socialist, nor was he a communist, as many wrongly believe.  He believed those in need deserved a hand up, not a hand out.  In my view, this was the main reason King was assassinated.

After all, the Shadow Government is creating a God-less violent, overdosing, drug addicted, homocidal, suicidal, criminal class.  Dr. King was a threat to that agenda.  He was a conservative, a Christian and a Constitutionalist, making him a triple threat to the establishment and a dangerous combination to those seeking to “transform” America into a socialist state, a plot that even at the time of King’s assassination was long planned decades earlier.

Congressional Record of 1940, Published on Monday, August 19th..

“Foreign Affairs”, Richard N. Gardner wrote a section called, “The Hard Road To World Order” (pg. 556-576)

Council on Foreign Relations in 1922.

Club Of Rome members include David Rockefeller, Al Gore, Bill Gates, Ted Turner, Henry Kissinger,  George Soros, and many, many other uber elitists.

They all believe the world is far too populated and that measures must be taken to reduce population or we will run out of resources.   These tenants are the basis for United Nations Agenda 21 to be implemented “voluntarily” by every nation on earth. 

These elitists truly believe that they have the right to rule over us all and that we are like dumb animals who do not use our intelligence making us no better than animals who have no intelligence are therefore “beasts of burden and steaks on the table by choice and consent.”

In 1992, the Club of Rome published THE FIRST GLOBAL REVOLUTION  Global warming, or climate change was determined to be one crisis that could unite humanity under a one world system.  It has nothing to do with saving the planet and everything to do with enslaving it.

The Council On Foreign Relations & Agenda 1970:

Senate Investigating Committee On Education…

The Schlesinger Manifesto..

 

The previous documents have shaped America and continue to shape America and the world.  Part of the true occulted history of the United States since World War II  omitted from the history books taught in Our schools. 

Dr. King’s true legacy has also been edited.  Children are taught a subjective cut and paste version that suits the socialist agenda while downplaying his Christian beliefs, his conservatism and his support and faith in the US Constitution.

If Martin Luther King were alive, he would be fighting against all the hatred and division instigated and fostered by the radical left. 

He would be asking, why isn’t the government focused on stopping all these illegal guns rather than infringing on the rights of law abiding citizens?

If gang bangers are not buying the guns used in these shootings legally,  where is this seemingly endless supply of guns are coming from?

Answer:  The CIA.

Pulitzer Prize winning investigative journalist Gary Webb exposed the fact that the CIA started the crack cocaine epidemic in the 1980’s to fund covert wars in Central America in his 1997 book, DARK ALLIANCE.

Webb was writing a new book exposing more Shadow Government activities in the CIA when he “committed suicide” by shooting himself twice in the head in 2007.   You can’t make this stuff up.

Gary Webb’s investigation exposed the fact during the Iran Contra scandal the CIA used the proceeds from cocaine sales to gangs to fund the arming of rebels in Central America to destabilize and topple governments for IMF and World Bank nation killers behind the Shadow Government.

In the 1980’s and 90’s, the CIA trafficked cocaine through Mena, AK for with the help of then Governor Bill and Hillary Clinton that left a trail of dead bodies in their wake. 

On November 15, 1996, at a Los Angeles town meeting  former Los Angeles Police Narcotics Detective Mike Ruppert confronted then CIA Director John Deutch about CIA drug dealing:

 

 Sadly, Mike Ruppert, who was a vigilant Patriot and tireless advocate for truth, lost hope in this world and committed suicide in 2014.

The Shadow Government and their collectivist endeavors for global control continue and will continue until they obtain total control.  They are relentless. 

They want open borders, eco-fascism, crony capitalism disguised as “FREE TRADE” and a one world totalitarian socialist state ruled by their ilk and governed by unelected elitist bureaucrats.

Yes.   Thanks to the Wikileaks and Project Veritas revelations the New World Order has been exposed as never before. 

There is indeed light at the end of the tunnel and reason to be positive, but the journey through the darkness and the war to restore Our republic has only just begun.           

HN

 

Do the research.

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

SUBSCRIBE TO THE NEW TRUTH TALK NEWS CHANNEL 2

TRUTH TALK NEWS

“Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

 

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced and verifiable.

ACCESS THE SEARCH ENGINE AT THE TOP RIGHT TO PERUSE TOPICS, BOOKS, DOCUMENTARIES, BROADCASTS, ARTICLES, VIDEOS, CONGRESSIONAL RECORDS AND RELATED INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THE SITE.

ADDITIONAL TRUTH TALK NEWS SITES:

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://truthtalknewschannel2.blogspot.com

Feel free to share and download this FAIR USE content.

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic as intended please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE. All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes.

HAPPY 2017!

HAPPY NEW YEAR ! ! !

MAY 2017 BRING HEALTH AND PROSPERITY TO YOU ALL!

Thank you for your continuing and growing support of TRUTH TALK NEWS

As we move into 2017 there is much to be thankful for.  

The sleeping giant has finally been stirred awake.

Thanks to the Wikileaks and Project Veritas revelations, the Shadow Government and their unspeakable evils have been exposed for the world to see.   So has their arrogant, blatantly biased and discredited controlled mainstream media.


As a result, the DNC and their neo-con New World Order Republican partners were unable to shift blame, or the public’s opinion of their treachery.  

The DNC stole their party’s nomination from Bernie Sanders and then with the help of their mainstream media partners in crime, consistently boasted about Hillary’s dominion in fake polls and news stories and about how Trump was a mean, terrible, xenophobic, misogynist racist who could never win.   

In their view, many of Hillary’s delusional crybaby supporters saw her loss as an unjust act of chauvenism and racism, ignoring the fact America elected a black president TWICE and that Trump’s campaign manager Kelly Ann Conway is a woman. 

These delusional souls are incapable of seeing their party’s own role in Hillary’s loss.  The People elected Trump not because America is racist, but rather because they want to restore America, not transform America.

America had enough with Obama’s lies and failures and expected much the same from Hillary Clinton, who was an extremely flawed candidate from the get go, but a goddess to her supporters, who believe she deserved to be president… and she is a women.

There is no logic or objectivity involved.  Only ideology.  Ideology trumps honesty and integrity.   The DNC are not unlike a cult, like Scientology.

As we have seen, the democrats and the media have a win at all costs mentality and a thirst for authoritarian rule under their subjective guidelines, with a penchant for cover ups.

They are totalitarians.  They do not believe in individual rights, they believe in majority rule.  America is a Republic, not a democracy as most are fooled to believe.

The democrats refuse to recognize these truths; and that their own lies, deceptions and corruption led to their demise, not racism or misogyny.  We the People simply saw through their charade, including many democrats.  

In fact, the delusional DNC were so arrogant and condescending in their certainty that due to media bias favorable to Clinton, fake polls and fake news reports, Hillary had the 2016 election in the bag.  

Trump’s victory  has left the DNC and many of Hillary’s supporters godsmacked.  

The truth is, even with dead voters and electronic voting machine tampering in five key battleground states as exposed by  Project Veritas and  BlackBoxVoting.org Trump won a handsome victory.

Trump’s victory has literally traumatized Hillary supporters, sending them running off crying to safe spaces and weeping parties across the nation.  These childish sore losers even want the electoral college abolished because they claim Hillary won the popular vote.  

If Trump had lost but won the popular vote, the democrats mantra would be, “get over it, we won!”

The electoral college was created so larger populated states like California and New York could not dominate Presidential elections, which is exactly what the democrats want.   Domination.  

The DNC/globalists want an open borders policy for three reasons:

  • To reduce wages limiting upward mobility and incrementally bringing the middle class into government dependent poverty.
  •  To utilize the Cloward-Piven Strategy, not out of the kindness and compassion for those oppressed by socialist despots, but because they and organizations like La Raza (The Race) want to increase the illegal alien population across the southern border states to gain dominance, since the electoral college is based upon population not citizenship.                                                                                                                             
  • To weigh down and eventually bankrupt the public welfare system to exact social change through poverty.  (You can’t make this stuff up.) This is also why all democrats do is tax and spend on wasteful and corrupt programs that benefit crony corporations.

The National Council of La Raza, whose former senior official helped draft the bi-partisan Gang of Eight Senate Bill, collected hundreds of millions of taxpayer dollars under obscure provisions in S. 744.  

Obama allocated $4 billion dollars to the southern border, providing a slush fund for extreme left wing groups in the immigrant serving, advocacy and lobbying groups, like La Raza.

La Raza asserts that the states of California, Arizona, New Mexico, Texas and even Colorado as well as parts of Nevada should be separated from the United States. This is an outgrowth of the radical and treasonous views of Reconquista de Atzlan.    This is yet another act of treason committed under the Obama Regime.  The authors of these provisions should be tried for treason.

If you subtract the dead and illegal immigrant voters and other acts of election fraud committed by the DNC, and remove the liberal meccas of New York and California from the equation, Trump won the 2016 election by more than 3 million votes.  In any case, Trump won 30 out of 50 states and crushed Hillary in the electoral college.

Despite the mainstream media spin doctor’s best efforts to deflect and deceive the public, they were unable to  bamboozle the American People into buying their unsubstantiated bullshit, nor were they in their ridiculous delusions, able to nullify Trump’s election as Our next President. 

Ah, If only feelings could be regulated like the EPA regulates raw milk farms–but I digress. . . 

 

Wikileaks exposure of the above journalists and news reporters as DNC hacks who portrayed Hillary Clinton and the DNC in a favorable light led to the mainstream media “fake news” psyop, which brought the hidden authoritarian streak clearly into view with calls to “censor fake news sites” that actually told the truth and were damaging the establishment.

Trump’s tweets bypassing the mainstream media are as irritating to the elite establishment as they are pleasing to the public.  

It appears Trump’s ingenuity will bring serious and positive change to Washington, D.C.

 The blatantly biased mainstream media have sowed the seeds of their own destruction. 

 

Thanks to DrudgeReport.com and accurate alternative news sources deemed “fake news,” the dinosaur media continues to lose market share and influence by relentlessly focusing their myopic attention on propping up the establishment while ignoring the many evil criminal acts exposed by Wikileaks, like the existence of an elite international pedophile ring and other crimes revealed in the Clinton and Podesta emails.

Instead, the true fake news purveyors in the mainstream media spin bogus yarns and fables like Russia influencing the 2016 elections.

Democrats never take blame for their failures, or misdeeds.    The DNC are either delusional, or willfully doing their best to deceive the American People and conceal their criminal activities.

Could it actually be that designed to fail, unpopular democrat policies combined with DNC voter fraud exposed by Project Veritas and Wikileaks, or the DNC stealing the election from Bernie to anoint a lying, anti-American establishment globalist cost the democrats the election , not racism, Islamophobia, xenophobia, misogyny or Whitelash?   

While many on the left wrongly label Trump and most conservatives as racist/xenophobic/homophobic/misogynist/Islamophobes, or fear Trump will be the next Hitler,  they dismiss the many lies and un-Constitutional authoritarian measures implemented by Obama.

Also, having compassion for illegals doesn’t negate the fact that they are ALL criminals, who have broken the law.   They are not citizens and have no rights.   Face facts.    It is not racist to state and face facts.   It is delusional and purely subversive to think otherwise.

Obama and Hillary Clintons’s many crimes and acts of treason have no affect on their  morally bankrupt supporters because they are hailed by all good liberals like gods. Gods that deserve their positions of power and deserve to be worshiped.  

Many liberals truly feel Hillary deserved to be president because she has so much political experience.  Others simply worship Hillary because she has a vagina.

What Hillary Clinton really has done, and has done successfully for decades, is her penchant for selling America down the river for personal gain while maintaining loving PR and praise by the controlled mainstream media, who continue to ignore her many crimes and acts of treason. 

HILLARY CLINTON SUPPORTERS ARE DEVASTATED

Some Hillary supporters are still so upset by this horrible unfairness, many are conducting crying group therapy sessions and fleeing to safe spaces and at liberal campuses nationwide.

They should all take Obama’s advice after he won the 2012 election.  “Deal with it”.

The problem is, Obama will be a visible and vocal presence in Washington for the next 4 or 8 years.  Hopefully, Obama will be viewed in the proper light by the public as a divisive agitator and establishment enforcer of social control, not social justice.

We can only hope that the Trump Administration allows the Department of Justice its do diligence to prosecute those who have violated not only the law, but have committed acts of treason and unspeakable evil. Perps like Hillary Clinton, John Podesta, Loretta Lynch, Eric Holder, Lois Lerner, Valerie Jarrett and Susan Rice, to name just a few.

We in the truth community and ALL AMERICANS must hold the Trump Administration’s feet to the fire.  Promises must be kept .  Constitutional government must be restored.

Although the New World Order is now out in the open, our work has only just begun. 
We must continue efforts to expose the United Nations Agenda 2030 protocols designed to de-industrialize the West into neo-fuedal serfdom and GET THE US OUT OF THE UN!

The United Nations speaks peace and makes war. 

The UN is a globalist controlled anti-American, authoritarian organization bent on the destruction of national sovereignty and the creation of a one world government modeled on the European Union and controlled by un-elected elitist bureaucrats.

We must continue to fight this and all collectivism from the internationalist traitors of the Shadow Government and defend Our individual God given rights. 

We must warn against the dangers of all forms of socialism and preserve, protect and defend the Constitution of the United States from all enemies both foreign and domestic. 

We must continue to expose the globalists operations.  Like the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan and the Arab Spring in Egypt, the diposing of Gaddaffi in Libya and what we are seeing now in Syria, are all part of the greater plan to control the middle east and plunder its resources.

Then there is the UN/Club of Rome’s silent weapons for quiet wars eugenics program using famine, poverty, geo-engineering, race specific bio-weapons, DNA alterations, GMO’s and water poisoned with fluoride and radiologicals, deadly disease causing pharmaceutical drugs, vaccines and many other deadly toxins, all aimed at reducing world population.

These are but a few of the many obstacles we will face in 2017.   There is too much hate, hypocrisy and division.  These are the tactics of oppressors and tyrants.    Be not of them.   In Our Unity is Our Strength.  

In 2008 Obama talked about bringing America together.  But for 8 years, “the fundamental transformation of America” has intentionally driving a wedge between us in purely Saul Alinksy Marxist inspired textbook style, setting back race relations 50 years and implementing deceitful job killing policies while allowing chaos and mayhem to fester in the streets, both home and abroad.     This, and only this is Obama’s true legacy.

Those who wish to divide, wish to conquer, control and dominate. 

Those who wish to unite, wish to spread freedom, prosperity and serve.   

Happy New Year!  God bless you all.      HN    

BEST WISHES TO ALL FOR A HAPPY, HEALTHY AND PROSPEROUS 2017!

TRUTH TALK NEWS
“Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

SUBSCRIBE TO THE NEW TRUTH TALK NEWS CHANNEL 2

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced and verifiable.

ACCESS THE SEARCH ENGINE AT THE TOP RIGHT TO PERUSE TOPICS, BOOKS, DOCUMENTARIES, BROADCASTS, ARTICLES, VIDEOS, CONGRESSIONAL RECORDS AND RELATED INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THIS SITE.

ADDITIONAL TRUTH TALK NEWS SITES:

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://truthtalknewschannel2.blogspot.com

Feel free to share and download this FAIR USE content.

Do the research.

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE. All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

A WARNING TO AMERICA FROM THE ALLEGORY OF THE CAVE

Published on Sep 29, 2016

 

A TRUTH TALK NEWS look at Plato’s Republic reveals some disturbing facts and dangers currently facing America today.

CBS censored the popular radio host Dr. Michael Savage, who has been demonized by the controlled mainstream media for years, cutting off his broadcast on more than 400 radio stations nationwide.

This is the danger America faces, when popular voices are silenced for political purposes.  Like the slaves imprisoned in the cave, America must be awakened to the light of truth and not fall prey to the deceptive shadows of darkness.

Censorship is TYRANNY!

SUBSCRIBE TO THE NEW TRUTH TALK NEWS CHANNEL 2:
https://www.youtube.com/c/TruthTalkNe…

TRUTH TALK NEWS
“Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced and verifiable.

Visit http://www.HowardNema.com AND ACCESS THE SEARCH ENGINE AT THE TOP RIGHT TO PERUSE TOPICS, BOOKS, DOCUMENTARIES, BROADCASTS, ARTICLES, VIDEOS, CONGRESSIONAL RECORDS AND RELATED INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THE SITE.

ADDITIONAL TRUTH TALK NEWS SITES:

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://truthtalknewschannel2.blogspot…

Feel free to share and download this FAIR USE content.

Do the research.

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic as intended please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE. All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes

OBAMA’S LEGACY AND THE SUMMER OF CHAOS

TRUTH TALK NEWS rant on Obama’s Legacy,  the Fundamental Subversion of America into the benevolent despotism of authoritarian socialism and the summer of chaos leading up to the November elections.

letters-to-alinsky-published1

1saulhillary2

Former Secretary of State Hillary Rodham Clinton listens during a panel discussion at the Clinton Global Initiative, Monday, Sept. 22, 2014 in New York. (AP Photo/Mark Lennihan)

whither_black_lives_matter

tumblr_oa5nei9C291u3nkrio1_500 abortion-stats- EUA_STPPgraphic BLACK COMMUNITY DEATH CAUSES Fatherless Children Molyneux 6_30_14 PP-facts

In the end all we have is our memories.

What will our memories of today be tomorrow?

Some things to think on until next time.

 

SUBSCRIBE TO THE NEW TRUTH TALK NEWS CHANNEL 2

ADDITIONAL TRUTH TALK NEWS SITES: http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com http://truthtalknewschannel2.blogspot.com http://www.HowardNema.com

TRUTH TALK NEWS “Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced and verifiable.

USE THE GREEN SEARCH ENGINE AT THE TOP RIGHT TO PERUSE TOPICS FROM THE ABUNDANCE OF LINKS, BOOKS, VIDEOS, ARTICLES, CONGRESSIONAL RECORDS AND OTHER RELATED INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THIS SITE.

Feel free to share and download this FAIR USE content.

Do the research.

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

 

‘One basic truth can be used as a foundation for a mountain of lies, and if we dig down deep enough in the mountain of lies, and bring out that truth, to set it on top of the mountain of lies; the entire mountain of lies will crumble under the weight of that one truth, and there is nothing more devastating to a structure of lies than the revelation of the truth upon which the structure of lies was built, because the shock waves of the revelation of the truth reverberate, and continue to reverberate throughout the Earth for generations to follow, awakening even those people who had no desire to be awakened to the truth.’

Delamer Duverus

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic as intended please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE. All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes

THE ROAD TO WORLD GOVERNMENT IS PAVED WITH TYRANNY

By Howard Nema

Aside from the Federal Reserve Crime Syndicate, the United Nations is perhaps the greatest fraud ever perpetrated on humanity in world history.

How the public could be so easily led to economic ruin and genocide by these two nefarious organizations amplifies exactly how well the global elite social controllers know about human nature and how to manipulate public opinion.

The world has indeed been mesmerized, conditioned and propagandized by these two sinister institutions of poverty, famine and mass genocide. The globalists disguise their lies by defying their own stated intentions. Intentions that continually fail, often resulting in the exact opposite of what was claimed to be intended.

The deception is so effective that most continue to believe the fables of working for peace and economic prosperity when the opposite most often occurs. Still, the people, or should I say, the sheople continue to buy these on going lies and deceptions hook, line and sinker.

For instance, the Federal Reserve is a private banking cartel created in 1910 by the Rothschilds, the Bank of England, and the London banking houses which control the Federal Reserve Banks through stockholdings of bank stock and their subsidiary firms in New York.

The two principal Rothschild representatives in New York, J. P. Morgan Co., and Kuhn, Loeb & Co. were the firms which set up the Jekyll Island Conference at which the Federal Reserve Act was drafted.  They directed the subsequent successful campaign to have the plan enacted into law by Congress, and purchased the controlling amounts of stock in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York in 1914.

These firms appointed their principal officers to the Federal Reserve Board of Governors and the Federal Advisory Council in 1914.

In 1914 a small group of families and close business related associates owned the controlling stock in existing banks purchased controlling shares in the Federal Reserve regional banks.

The stockholders list of the original 12 regional Federal Reserve Banks show the same family lineage of control  to this day.

FEDERAL RESERVE OWNERS CHART

The Federal Reserve swindle is a continuing fraud. Sold to the American Public in 1913 as a way to supposedly prevent another run on the banks like the Panic of 1907 and to stabilize the markets. Of course, history has proven the exact opposite has occurred.

This is of course, by design.

In the 102 years since the privately owned and un-constitutional Federal Reserve was illegally ratified (by only 3 states) and snuck through Congress in the dark of night during the Christmas Holiday, the Fed has successfully funded two world wars, created the Great Depression, bankrupted the United States Government and devalued the US more than 95%, among a long list many other crimes.

To quell recent outcries from those in this country who understand exactly what is going on, the Federal Reserve now releases “minutes” and has allowed some access to its internal operation, but not a full audit which would no doubt reveal many, many skeletons in the closet.

The sooner the Fed’s treachery is exposed, the sooner the American people will begin to reap the benefits of a truly free market system. We must abolish the Federal Reserve and the personal income tax. They are the barriers to every American’s freedom and prosperity.

All we need to do to succeed in this endeavor is to have the will to act. To educate and to motivate. . . before it is too late.

Too many mind controlled sheople continue to support the Federal Reserve, especially since Janet Yellen was tasked to head the Fed. Chosen no doubt because Yellen resembles a Jewish grandmother, perceived as someone who would not be cooking the books, but rather cooking up some chicken soup to cure America’s financial ills.

As the gap between rich and poor widens more than during the gilded age of the robber barons, who today garner even more power and control over American Foreign policy on continue on their relentless path to neo-feudal world government.

The same immense deception was first conceived and attempted by Nathan Rothschild at the Congress of Vienna in 1814 and further sought by President Woodrow Wilson’s ill fated League of Nations in 1919, the same year the Council on Foreign Relations and the Royal Institute of International Affairs were both established.

The United Nations, established soon after WW2 schemed to implement an all powerful world government and has been working for that goal ever since.

While claiming to be a force for peace, for 70 years and counting, the UN has failed, creating more conflict, war and genocide and misery in their goal of “Nation building”, while destroying national sovereignty with international treaties.

Despite the UN’s words of peace and security, their actions for the last 70 years illustrates much the opposite.

When will Americans realize that we must end the Federal Reserve and get out of the United   Nations?   How much more must we lose?

Sources, links, articles  and additional information:

http://www.globalresearch.ca/who-owns-the-federal-reserve/10489

http://theconversation.com/when-un-peacekeepers-commit-atrocities-someone-has-to-act-34317

http://www.thenewamerican.com/tech/environment/item/22267-un-agenda-2030-a-recipe-for-global-socialism

https://sustainabledevelopment.un.org/post2015/transformingourworld

https://www.whitehouse.gov/the-press-office/2015/09/27/fact-sheet-us-global-development-policy-and-agenda-2030

http://www.wnd.com/2016/01/oregon-standoff-elevates-debate-on-federal-land-ownership/

 

The United Nations: On the Brink of Becoming a World Government

Written by        

On October 14, 2009, Lord Christopher Monckton, former science advisor to British Prime Minister Margaret Thatcher, delivered a scathing refutation of the concept of human-caused global warming at Bethel University in St. Paul, Minnesota.

During his presentation, Lord Monckton focused on the UN climate treaty that was being proposed for the United Nations Climate Change Conference in Copenhagen that December.

He warned:

“I read that treaty. And what it says is this: that a world government is going to be created. The word “government” actually appears as the first of three purposes of the new entity.

The second purpose is the transfer of wealth from the countries of the West to third world countries…. And the third purpose of this new entity, this government, is enforcement.

Not just any government, mind you. They are about to impose a communist world government on the world.”

At the UN’s Rio+20 Earth Summit on Sustainable Development in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, in June 2012, the world government advocates were pushing even grander schemes.

Lord Monckton, who heads the policy unit of the U.K. Independence Party and is chief policy advisor to the Washington, D.C.-based Science and Public Policy Institute, told The New American’s Alex Newman, “They were still effectively talking about a mechanization for setting up a global government so that they could shut down the West, shut down democracy, and bring freedom to an end worldwide.”

Is that merely the ranting of a madman? That’s what the usual suspects at the Huffington Post, MSNBC, and other organs of the liberal-left corporate media would have us believe. He is a “climate-change denier,” a “moonbat,” a “conspiracy wacko.”

That is the same response that has greeted anyone and everyone who has dared not merely to criticize the United Nations’ faults and abuses, but to point out the danger of a UN that is evolving into an actual world government — with real teeth and enforcement powers.

However, very influential Americans, as well as foreign leaders, in politics, media, and academe, have been advocating — blatantly and openly, as well as indirectly — for transforming the United Nations system into a full-blown world government. What’s more, they have begun actual implementation.

It is no longer hypothetical that the UN and its affiliated institutions will usurp legislative, executive, and judicial powers, including taxing, policing, and military powers. It has already begun; it is already happening. And it is happening with the acquiescence, approval, encouragement, and funding of globalists in our own government, both Republicans and Democrats.

Walter Cronkite, the late CBS anchorman and broadcast icon often referred to as “the most trusted man in America,” stated in 1999:

“It seems to many of us that if we are to avoid the eventual catastrophic world conflict we must strengthen the United Nations as a first step toward a world government with a legislature, executive and judiciary, and police to enforce its international laws and keep the peace.

To do that, of course, we Americans will have to yield up some of our sovereignty. It would take a lot of courage, a lot of faith in the new order…. We cannot defer this responsibility to posterity. Democracy, civilization itself, is at stake. Within the next few years we must change the basic structure of our global community from the present anarchic system of war … to a new system governed by a democratic U.N. federation.”

Cronkite made that statement in a 1999 speech to the World Federalist Association, one of the oldest and foremost organ­izations promoting world government.

Strobe Talbott may not be as well known as “Uncle Walter” Cronkite, but he wields considerable influence among political elites. A former “Soviet expert” and correspondent for Time magazine (Soviet KGB defector Sergei Tretyakov claimed Talbott was actually “an extremely valuable intelligence source” for Russian intelligence) and deputy secretary of state for President Clinton, Talbott now serves as president of the very influential think tank, the Brookings Institution, in Washington, D.C.

In a highly acclaimed essay he penned for Time in 1992, entitled “The Birth of the Global Nation,” Talbott declared:

In 1795 [philosopher Immanuel] Kant advocated a “peaceful league of democracies.” But it has taken the events in our own wondrous and terrible century to clinch the case for world government.

Federalism has already proved the most successful of all political experiments, and organizations like the World Federalist Association have for decades advocated it as the basis for global government.

Gideon Rachman, an enthusiastic one-worlder and a leading economic opinionator for the very influential Financial Times, authored a Times op-ed on December 8, 2008 entitled, “And Now for a World Government,” in which he approvingly observed:

So, it seems, everything is in place. For the first time since homo sapiens began to doodle on cave walls, there is an argument, an opportunity and a means to make serious steps towards a world government.

Rachman was excited that the global financial crisis was presenting a rich opportunity so that “for the first time in my life, I think the formation of some sort of world government is plausible.”

Rachman described the desideratum that he and fellow internationalists are working so hard to bring about:

A “world government” would involve much more than co-operation between nations.   It would be an entity with state-like characteristics, backed by a body of laws. The European Union has already set up a continental government for 27 countries, which could be a model. The EU has a supreme court, a currency, thousands of pages of law, a large civil service and the ability to deploy military force.

Similarly blatant calls for empowering the United Nations could be cited ad infinitum. But the fact is that the empowerment is already well under way.

Hiding in Plain Sight

Much of the superstructure and infrastructure for the physical edifice of a world government already have been built. The United Nations’ official organizational chart and the world map (below) give an ominous inkling of the global leviathan that is already in place.

(Note: Click on world map to enlarge it.)

But only an inkling; it actually vastly understates the magnitude of the organizational sprawl of the UN worldwide, since it merely shows the locations of the headquarters offices of the main UN agencies and only a few of the many regional offices or field operations of these agencies.

Take, for instance, the UN’s World Health Organization (WHO). In addition to its mammoth Geneva headquarters, it also has six huge regional offices: Africa HQ (Brazzaville, Congo); the Americas HQ (Washington, D.C.); Europe HQ (Copenhagen, Denmark); Eastern Mediterranean HQ (Cairo, Egypt); Southeast Asia HQ (Delhi, India); Western Pacific HQ (Manila, Philippines).

Likewise, the UN’s Food and Agriculture Organization is located in a huge gleaming palace of glass and marble a short walk from the Colosseum in Rome. But it also has regional offices in Ghana, Chile, Thailand, Egypt, and Hungary, as well as subregional offices in Samoa, Barbados, Tunisia, Turkey, Ethiopia, Gabon, and Panama; and liaison offices in Geneva; Washington, D.C.; New York; Brussels; and Yokohama.

The story is similar at UNESCO, which, besides boasting a palatial edifice in Paris, called the World Heritage Center, has field offices, cluster offices, national offices, regional bureaus, and liaison offices in more than 50 countries throughout the world. This same pattern is repeated for many other UN agencies.

Besides putting in place a vast civil service of administrators and bureaucrats to run the planned world government, the ever-expanding UN system has created a huge global constituency of local and national politicians, corporations, and NGOs that benefits from the UN’s presence and can be counted on to lobby for its continued expansion.

Gideon Rachman’s statement above referring approvingly to the European Union (EU) as a model for the UN is particularly apropos. For decades, critics of the Common Market (as the EU was called before 1993) warned that the organization was being built piece by piece, agency by agency, into a supranational government, only to be derided as paranoid wackos by EU proponents. Now, of course, all pretenses are being dropped because the EU is de facto a supranational government that completely overrides the national and local governments of its member states.

The UN’s rapidly growing organizational footprint is most jarringly visible throughout the Third World, where offices of UN agencies, the IMF, and World Bank dominate the political and economic landscape, and UN trucks, UN tent cities, blue-helmeted UN peacekeepers, and UN civilian staff are ubiquitous.

The gradual development of the UN from an international organization into a world government was planned from the world body’s beginning in 1945. One of the UN architects at the UN founding conference in San Francisco was John Foster Dulles, who served as U.S. secretary of state from 1953 to 1959. In his 1950 book, War or Peace, Dulles, a committed one-worlder and a founder of the one-world Council on Foreign Relations, wrote of the then-five-year-old UN: “The United Nations represents not a final stage in the development of world order, but only a primitive stage. Therefore its primary task is to create the conditions which will make possible a more highly developed organization.”

Later in the same book, Dulles stated: “I have never seen any proposal made for collective security with ‘teeth’ in it, or for ‘world government’ or for ‘world federation,’ which could not be carried out either by the United Nations or under the United Nations Charter.”

The UN’s New World Order

The push to empower the UN with global legislative, executive, and judicial powers has already yielded huge dividends, and UN bodies are now exercising those powers to various degrees — and constantly pushing to usurp more control. Here is a brief survey.

The Global Army: On its Web page entitled “Honoring 60 Years of United Nations Peacekeeping (1948-2008)” the UN makes this ominous boast:

A massive enterprise — The UN is the largest multilateral contributor to post-conflict stabilization worldwide. Only the United States deploys more military personnel to the field than the United Nations. [Emphasis added.]

There are almost 110,000 serving on 20 peace operations led by the UN Departments of Peacekeeping Operations (DPKO) and Field Support (DFS) on four continents directly impacting the lives of hundreds of millions of people. This represents a seven-fold increase in UN peacekeepers since 1999. [Emphasis added.]

The United States picks up 27 percent of the direct tab for UN peacekeeping operations, but that is only a fraction of the American contribution. Through the Global Peace Operations Initiative (GPOI) and the African Contingency Operations Training and Assistance (ACOTA) program, both operated jointly by the U.S. Departments of State and Defense, the U.S. military has trained (and continues to train) tens of thousands of UN “peacekeepers,” many of whom have been charged with carrying out genocide and atrocities, including widespread rape and sodomizing of women and children, as well as sexploitation of impoverished children in Haiti, Ivory Coast, Liberia, Congo, Somalia, and Kosovo. An even larger chunk of UN war-making disguised as “peacekeeping” is carried out under the auspices of NATO — again, courtesy of the U.S. taxpayers and U.S. armed forces.

The Global Prosecutor, Judge, and Jury: The UN’s International Criminal Court (ICC) officially opened its doors at The Hague 10 years ago, in July 2002. The UN boasts that “the ICC has become a fully functional institution, with 16 cases having been brought before the Court, 6 of which are at the trial stage. ICC judges have issued 22 arrest warrants and 6 arrests have been made.” Although most of those targeted thus far are generally recognized as bad men, the ICC’s prosecutions are establishing dangerous precedents that could be used against innocent political targets, including American citizens. The ICC’s governing Rome Statute violates the most basic principles of due process, separation of powers, and national sovereignty. It incorporates within the ICC itself the roles of prosecutor, judge, and jury.

Notre Dame University Law Professor Charles Rice called the ICC “a monstrosity.” Ambassador David Scheffer, the pro-ICC negotiator for President Bill Clinton, admitted, “it is not credible to argue … that no American will ever come before it. We are not saying Americans are off bounds.”

The danger is not that Americans (U.S. military personnel, law-enforcement officers, elected officials, or private citizens) will be taken before the ICC against the wishes of the U.S. government, but that our own government officials will acquiesce in the process, arguing that we must uphold “the rule of law” and the will of the “international community.”

The Global Taxman: World government advocates have long lamented that the UN must depend on dues and contributions from its member states. Their dream of a UN that will have an independent revenue stream from global taxes is dangerously close at hand. The controversy and opposition caused by the European Union’s imposition of a “carbon tax” on all air travel has given the UN leverage to propose its own global carbon tax on all air passengers, through the UN’s International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO). However, many other global tax proposals are in the works, with a global financial transaction tax (FTT) being, perhaps, the one closest to realization and receiving major backing from many leaders of the G-20 nations and the NGO lobby. Various FTT proposals, such as the Tobin Tax, could net the UN hundreds of billions of dollars annually. The usual rationale given for an FTT is that the proceeds would be used to end global poverty, but the UN’s record indicates the massive sums taken would end up in the bank accounts of the UN’s corrupt officials.

The Global Fed: The International Monetary Fund (IMF) and World Bank (WB) have wrought economic havoc worldwide for decades, burdening nations (especially the less-developed countries) with impossible debt and onerous economic policies. Over the last several years, a growing chorus of globalists has called for transforming and “supersizing” the IMF into the equivalent of a global Federal Reserve, with a global currency — SDRs, Special Drawing Rights — to displace the dollar. In 2010, the UN issued its World Economic and Social Survey, which said: “A new global reserve system could be created, one that no longer relies on the United States dollar as the single major reserve currency.” According to the UN report, a new reserve system “should permit the emission of international liquidity — such as SDRs — to create a more stable global financial system.”

A global currency would allow whoever controls the currency (in this case the IMF) to control the world economy and to enjoy unlimited financial power. And it could “bail out” or subsidize any company it wishes, to the detriment of other companies. Like a global Federal Reserve, it could confiscate wealth by simply inflating the currency.

The Global Trade Cop: The World Trade Organization (WTO), which entered into force in 1995, has joined NAFTA (the North American Free Trade Agreement) in judging and overturning U.S. laws and court decisions. The WTO has already proven the charges by its critics and opponents, that it is an enormous threat to America’s national sovereignty, as well as an engine of global central economic planning.

>“Make no mistake about it,” warned Rep. Ron Paul (R-Texas) in 2005, “WTO ministers tell Congress to change American laws, and Congress complies.  In fact, congressional leaders obediently scrambled to make sure the corporate tax bill passed before a WTO deadline. Thousands and thousands of bills languish in committees, yet a bill ordered by the WTO was pushed to the front of the line.”

The Global Enviro-Cop: Through a multitude of environmental agreements, programs, and agencies — Agenda 21, the Biodiversity Treaty, UN Convention on Climate Change, the United Nations Environment Program, the Global Environment Facility, etc. — the UN and its one-world advocates are spinning a web of control over all human activity. As in the case of other global taxes and regulations, the UN depends on national governments to be complicit in adopting “international norms and commitments” that will lock individual nations into the UN’s regulatory grip.

The Global Gun Grabber: Through its Arms Trade Treaty (ATT) and its Program of Action (PoA) on Small Arms, the United Nations has been pushing feverishly for over a decade and a half to undermine the right of individuals to possess firearms, as guaranteed in the U.S. Constitution’s Second Amendment. The UN attack is aimed not only at infringing the right of private gun ownership, but also increasing restrictions on ammunition, gunpowder, and other essential components. In August 2012, the UN began its latest round of efforts to attack this fundamental right, asserting the claimed right of the state to have an unchallengeable monopoly of force. It is not surprising that the United States is virtually the sole holdout, as most UN member states are either dictatorships that do not allow individuals to possess firearms, or socialist countries traveling the same direction on the road to tyranny.

The Global Internet Controller: Since at least 2003, when the United Nations hosted its first World Summit on the Information Society, the UN has been leading an effort to take over the Internet. The countries in the forefront of this effort are Russia, China, Iran, North Korea, Cuba, Sudan, Tajikistan, and Uzbekistan — dictatorships where Internet censorship and cyber spying on citizens are standard operating procedures.

Insatiable Globocrats

The UN grabs for power cited above are far from a complete list. The UN’s Law of the Sea Treaty (LOST) aims to give the UN authority over the planet’s oceans, coastal waters, fisheries, seabed oil and mineral wealth, and maritime traffic. The UN’s World Health Organization and Food & Agriculture Organization are in charge of the Codex Alimentarius, the UN effort to regulate and take control over raw food, processed food, and semi-processed food, including vitamin and mineral supplements, herbs, and other nutritional products. UNESCO has insinuated itself into American schools and families through “partnerships” with our federal and state Education Departments that include curriculum design and invasive, psychologically manipulative “emotional wellness” evaluations. The UN Population Fund (UNFPA) not only supports forced abortion in China, but works assiduously with Planned Parenthood to overturn national abortion laws and make abortion legal and commonplace worldwide.

The list goes on and on — and on. If any human condition or domain of human activity, any potential “crisis,” or any particle or parcel of the Earth, sea, or sky has been overlooked by the UN, one can be sure the omission will soon be corrected, and that a new UN commission, agency, and/or treaty will soon be initiated to claim responsibility and jurisdiction over it.  Original Source

Subscribe to TRUTH TALK NEWS and Howard Nema on YouTube.

“Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced and verifiable.

It is critical that you take the initiative to confirm the information contained in this presentation.

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

http://www.HowardNema.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNewsLIVE

‘One basic truth can be used as a foundation for a mountain of lies, and if we dig down deep enough in the mountain of lies, and bring out that truth, to set it on top of the mountain of lies; the entire mountain of lies will crumble under the weight of that one truth, and there is nothing more devastating to a structure of lies than the revelation of the truth upon which the structure of lies was built, because the shock waves of the revelation of the truth reverberate, and continue to reverberate throughout the Earth for generations to follow, awakening even those people who had no desire to be awakened to the truth.’

Delamer Duverus

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE.

All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are free and independent of any network, group or association.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior inte

 

THE BLACK NETWORK

NWO SHADOW GOVTBy Howard Nema

At  a Council on Foreign Relations meeting in Montreal in 2011, Zbigniew Brzezinski warned of a “global political awakening,” that threatened to topple the existing international order, complaining that the Internet has made it almost impossible for the global elite to control the political environment.

In his 1970 book, Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era Brzezinski wrote:

“The technotronic era involves the gradual appearance of a more controlled society. Such a society would be dominated by an elite, unrestrained by traditional values. Soon it will be possible to assert almost continuous surveillance over every citizen and maintain up-to-date complete files containing even the most personal information about the citizen. These files will be subject to instantaneous retrieval by the authorities.

In the technotronic society the trend would seem to be towards the aggregation of the individual support of millions of uncoordinated citizens, easily within the reach of magnetic and attractive personalities exploiting the latest communications techniques to manipulate emotions and control reason.”

How nice.   Well, Obama’s attractive personality has certainly been given the full Hollywood treatment complete with a glossy Madison Avenue shine.

These days Brzezinski is leaving the latest communication techniques to manipulate emotions and control reason to his daughter Mika, a New World Order media propagandist on MSNBC’s Morning Joe talk show.

Back in 1981 with help from the CIA, Zbignew Brzezinski created Al Qaeda as an opposition force to the Soviets in Afghanistan. That same year, Brzezinski recruited a CIA operative code named Tim Osman to lead the Al Qaeda “freedom fighters”.

The name Osman has Islamic historical significance and also irony. The Ottomans were named after Osman, an elite bloodline. Osman’s son ruled as Sultan and was known as the “Hero of the world”.

Indeed, Tim Osman became a hero to many in the Muslim world on September 11, 2001. His real name was Osama Bin Ladin.

Back in 1978, former CIA Director and future President George HW Bush and Salem Bin Laden founded Arbusto Energy. Salem was Osama Bin Laden’s brother. The Bush and Bin Laden families have deep business ties going back to the 1940’s.

In 1988 the Saudis bought a portion of President Bush’s son GW’s floundering oil company, Harken. Although the company had no overseas experience, Harken wins a contract in the Persian Gulf and makes enormous profits.

Two major investors in GW’s company are Salem bin Laden and Khalid bin Mahfouz. Salem bin Laden is Osama Bin Laden’s oldest brother.

Khalid bin Mahfouz is a Saudi banker with a 20 percent stake in the corrupt BCCI, the Bank of Credit & Commerce International, a $20 billion rogue empire shut down by regulators in 62 countries in July, 1991.

Today, we see Wachovia-Wells Fargo, Bank of America and HSBC have partnered with the black network. When caught laundering drug money, these banks are all given slaps on the wrists, while small time dealers and users are incarcerated and have their assets seized.

Still, today’s corrupt banksters have nothing on the wanton evil and corruption of the thugs at B.C.C.I.

B.C.C.I was the largest money-laundering operation ever created, serving dictators, terrorists and drug smugglers alike.

B.C.C.I. even owned an American Bank, First American Bankshares, a Washington-based holding company with offices stretching from Florida to New York, whose chairman was former U.S. Defense Secretary Clark Clifford.

This caliber of leadership was omnipresent at B.C.C.I. The bank was in fact, run as a military operation, including a clandestine division of the bank called the “black network,” which functioned as a global intelligence operation with a Mafia-esque enforcement squad.

The B.C.C.I black network operated primarily out of Karachi, Pakistan, using sophisticated intelligence gathering equipment and operated a criminal operation including bribery, extortion, racketeering, kidnapping and murder.

This is how the New World Order rolls.

To this day, the black network operates a lucrative arms-trade business and transports drugs and gold, assisted by Western and Middle Eastern intelligence agencies.

In the 1980’s The National Security Council used B.C.C.I. to funnel money for the Iran-contra deals. The CIA maintained accounts to fund other covert operations. The Defense Intelligence Agency also maintained a slush-fund account to pay for clandestine operations.

B.C.C.I. worked closely with Israel’s spy agencies and other Western intelligence groups mostly arranging arms deals to terrorist groups and rogue nations. The bank maintained cozy relationships with international terrorists in Libya, Syria and the Palestine Liberation Organization.

The Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in 1979 accelerated the growth of B.C.C.I.’s black network.

By the mid-1980’s, the CIA’s Islamabad operation was one of the largest U.S. intelligence stations in the world.

The black network’s original purpose was to pay bribes, intimidate authorities and squash investigations. In the early 1980s the black network began running its own drugs, weapon and currency deals.

The bank’s organizational web consisted of dozens of shell companies, offshore banks, branches and subsidiaries in 70 countries. The CIA, MOSSAD and other Western intelligence agencies continue their clandestine collaborations with the black network to this day.

You may recall in 1997, a CNN camera crew interviewed Osama Bin Laden from his secret hideout while Our government was supposedly diligently working to “track him down.” In fact, Our government wasn’t looking for Osama Bin Laden at all.

On 9/27/2001, the WALL STREET JOURNAL reported that in January 2000 former President George H. W. Bush met with the bin Laden family on behalf of the Carlyle Group. Bush denied the meeting took place until a thank you note was found confirming that it did indeed take place.

The SUNDAY HERALD, GLASGOW reported on 10/7/2001, that an earlier meeting between Bush and Bin Laden took place in November 1998 on behalf of the Carlyle Group in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia.

The BBC reported in late January 2001 that after the elections, US intelligence agencies were told to ‘back off’ investigating the Bin Ladens and Saudi royals.

Early in 2001, FBI agent Robert Wright, attempted to pursue an investigation into Saudi multimillionaire Yassin al-Qadi, but was told by his superiors, “it’s just better to let sleeping dogs lie.”

Really? The more we learn about the ties between the Bush family, the Bin Laden’s, the FBI, 9/11 and the bogus war on terror the more one must wonder:

Did GW Bush really want to capture Bin Laden?

Apparently not.

After all, they are both part of the same insider clique. Interestingly, on Sept. 11, 2001, members of the Carlyle Group including Bush senior, and his former secretary of state, James Baker were meeting at the Ritz Carlton Hotel in Washington, D.C.. Also in attendance was Shafiq bin Laden, another of Osama’s brothers.

After news of the Bin Laden-Bush connection became public, the elder Bush stepped down from Carlyle to escape the heat.

Although all flights were halted on 9/11 due to the terrorist attacks, there was one exception. With no interrogation and despite the fact that 15 of the 19 hijackers were from Saudi Arabia, the Bush Regime authorized planes to pick up 140 Saudi nationals, including 24 members of the Bin Laden family, living in various cities in the U.S. to bring them back to Saudi Arabia.

In fact, there is no country on earth who has promulgated more chaos and destabilization in the Middle East than the Saudis, who have invested billions since the 1970s to eradicate the Sufi, moderate Sunni and Shiite versions of Islam and replacing it with the radical, anti-women, anti-Western Wahhabi Salafism.

It is the Saudis who want a draconian global Caliphate under Sharia Law. They are the hidden force behind the rise of radical Islam.

We can also thank the Saudis for spreading misogyny and terror throughout the Muslim world, funding mosques and madrasas from Morocco to Pakistan to Indonesia and here in the U.S.

Take a moment to explore the great cultural changes that have occurred in Islam. Before the 1970’s women wearing head scarves and burqa were non existent. Today they are omnipresent.

Under Sharia, women are third class citizens subject to honor killings, rape and stonings for allowing themselves to be raped.

Why this aspect of Islam isn’t exposed in the media and called Islamophobia or hate further amplifies enormous hypocrisy.

Unlike homophobia, which isn’t a phobia, but rather a rejection of homosexuality.  People aren’t actually afraid of homosexuals.  The same cannot be said about Islam.

Radical Islamists have killed millions in recent years.  Islamophobia is a rational reaction to the very real and deadly threat Islam poses to the world.   So Islamophobia is actually justified.  In fact, homosexuals should fear Islam the most, since many are thrown of rooftops these days.

I cannot understand how so many progressive and liberal thinkers support Islam since many liberal causes are abhorred by Islam.  This defies logic, but many thing liberals profess defy logic.

For instance, if there is a supposed war on women, and such outcries about inequality by liberals, why is Islam and Sharia Law left out of the media love fest?

The truth is, most are unaware or unwilling to believe the historical fact that Islam, including Muhammad, launched their own Crusades, a jihad against Christianity long  before the European Crusades.

In fact, the First Christian Crusade was in response to decades long barbarism from Islam, much like the new era of terrorism we see today.

As in ancient times, a growing number of Muslim clerics, scholars, and activists want to impose Sharia Law around the world. This jihad continues, funded mostly by the Saudis.

The B.C.C.I scandal illustrates many connections and partnerships with the secret societies.   These alliances serve the Council on Foreign Relations crowd’s quest for financial control of the economies and political systems of the world.

The global quest of the secret societies is to establish central banks, plunder those countries’ natural resources and install friendly socialist puppet regimes under control of the central banks, which are they themselves private corporations.

Georgetown Professor Carroll Quigley saw nothing wrong with the plot, only the fact that it was a secret. Quigley had more than twenty years of inside dealings with the Council on Foreign Relations and their members and was given two years to explore the records and minutes of the CFR to research into what would become his 1966 book, TRAGEDY AND HOPE.

In TRAGEDY AND HOPE, Quigley wrote:

“In 1891, Cecile Rhodes organized a secret society with members in a ‘Circle of Initiates’ and an outer circle known as the ‘Association of Helpers’ later organized as the Round Table organization.

In 1909-1913, they organized semi-secret groups known as Round Table Groups in the chief British dependencies and the United States. In 1919, they founded the Royal Institute of International Affairs. Similar Institutes of International Affairs were established in the chief British dominions and the United States where it is known as the Council on Foreign Relations.

After 1925, the Institute of Pacific Relations was set up in twelve Pacific area countries. They were constantly harping on the lessons to be learned from the failure of the American Revolution and the success of the Canadian federation of 1867 and hoped to federate the various parts of the empire and then confederate the whole with the United Kingdom. …

There does exist and has existed for a generation, an international Anglophile network which operates to some extent in the way the Radical Right believes the Communists act. In fact, this network, which we may identify as the Round Table Groups, has no aversion to cooperating with the Communists, or any other groups, and frequently does so.

I know of the operations of this network because I have studied it for twenty years and was permitted for two years, in the early 1960s, to examine its papers and secret records. I have no aversion to it or to most of its aims and have, for much of my life, been close to it and to many of its instruments.

I have objected, both in the past and recently, to a few of its policies but in general my chief difference of opinion is that it wishes to remain unknown, and I believe its role in history is significant enough to be known.

The powers of financial capitalism had another far-reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole.

This system was to be controlled in a feudalist fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at in frequent meetings and conferences. The apex of the systems was to be the Bank for International Settlements in Basel, Switzerland, a private bank owned and controlled by the world’s central banks which were themselves private corporations.

Each central bank sought to dominate its government by its ability to control Treasury loans, to manipulate foreign exchanges, to influence the level of economic activity in the country, and to influence cooperative politicians by subsequent economic rewards in the business world.”

One must remember that before the Rothschild IMF and World Bank nation killers got their mitts on Iraq and Afghanistan there were only seven countries that lacked a Rothschild controlled central bank: Afghanistan, Iraq, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea and Iran.

Today, thanks to ongoing U.S. military involvement only three countries lack a Rothschild bank. Cuba, North Korea and Iran. There are other corporate interests in the region that include Syria.

This explains the zealous efforts to demonize Iran and Syria, doesn’t it?

Communist Cuba was recently brought into the fold by Obama’s reestablishing trade relations. There can be little doubt that Cuba will soon emerge with yet another Rothschild central bank.

That leaves North Korea and Iran. What does that tell you?

It makes one wonder why radical Islam has been allowed to flourish thus far, despite wars and lack luster interventions, does it not?

One must consider that part of Hussein Obama’s fundamental transformation of Amerika involves violent fundamentalist Islamic jihadis. This does seem to be the case.

After all, Islam and the goals of the New World Order are quite similar. Like the Anglo-American establishment seeks world dominance, so does Islam.

Interestingly, both want control of the globe with one world government and one world religion, controlling all aspects of human life and behavior.

It seems that these all of these decades old factors: B.C.C.I, the black network, the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, destabilization of the Middle East, the rise of ISIS, the fundamental transformation of Amerika and the rise of radical Islam are being used to help implement the New World Order.

This could very well be. After all, we have members of the Muslim Brotherhood in high positions of power currently operating in the Obama Regime.

Consider the following:

Hasan Al-Banna founded the Muslim Brotherhood in Cairo in 1928. Today, the Muslim Brotherhood is the most powerful organization in Egypt. In his book, Jihad, Al-Banna argues that Muslims must take up arms against unbelievers.

“The verses of the Qur’an and the Sunnah summon people in to jihad, to warfare, to the armed forces, and all means of land and sea fighting.”

Those who forget history are condemned to repeat it. While the Western world has adopted a more or less secular live for today attitude, deferring children, Muslims are doing the exact opposite and multiplying their numbers.

In fact, Muslims outpace the extinction level birth rates seen in Europe by 4-1 and 4-2 in the US.

By 2070, Islam will be the dominant religion on earth. Islam’s stated intention is TO RULE THE WORLD UNDER AN ISLAMIC CALIPHATE, GOVERNED BY SHARIA LAW.

This is not rhetoric. It is their stated plan.

So now, out of his Christian charity, Obama is bringing Syrian Muslim refugees across Our already unsecured borders, but not allowing any Christians.

And hundreds, if not thousands of Muslim Clerics, many presiding over Mosques here in America are promoting jihad against the infidels to create a global Caliphate.

Already, “refugees” with forged passports and terrorist ties have been identified. Still Obama stands firm to clothe, feed and house these Syrian “refugees.”

Radio host Michael Savage made a great point recently saying that if you had a bowl of M&M’s and in this bowl were a few poisonous ones that would cause instant death would you eat any of the M&M’s, or would you chuck out the whole bowl?

Somehow logic and common sense has been erased from the public’s psyche in favor of compassion. The elite are masters of controlling emotions and human behavior and many have indeed fallen under their spell.

Retired US. Air Force Gen. Tom McInerney, former assistant vice chief of staff and commander in chief of U.S. Air Forces Europe is not under the spell. Earlier this year, General McInerney announced the presence of the Muslim Brotherhood inside the U.S. government on a radio program.

Of course, the controlled mainstream media continue to ignore this critically important revelation, despite recent events in Paris and the Trojan Horse Refugee Crisis Islamic extremists still maintain key positions within Our Federal government.

No wonder HUSSEIN Obama replaced all of Our best, most Patriotic Constitutional Generals with compliant pawns of the regime.

Now it is making more and more sense why Hussein would allow in Syrian refugees and has placed members of the Muslim Brotherhood into high security positions inside the Federal government including homeland security, doesn’t it?

Gee, how can that happen?

How about Huma Abedin, the wife of degenerate pervert Congressman, Anthony Weiner, whose family has undeniable family ties to the Muslim Brotherhood?

Huma’s mother and brother Hassan are deeply involved with the Muslim Brotherhood. Hassan, is also on the board of the Oxford Centre For Islamic Studies where he is a fellow. Other board members including “Al-Qaeda associate, Omar Naseef and the notorious Muslim Brotherhood leader Sheikh Youssef Qaradawi who are both listed as Oxford Center For Islamic Studies Trustees.”

What about Arif Alikhan, a devout Sunni Muslim, who is an open advocate for a Sharia Law takeover of the United States.

Alikhan also happens to be a former deputy mayor of Homeland Security and Public Safety for the City of Los Angeles responsible for thwarting the LAPD’s plan to monitor activities at radical mosques known to have provided aid and comfort to the 9/11 hijackers.

Arif Alikhan was appointed assistant secretary for the Office of Policy Development in Barack Obama’s Department of Homeland Security in 2009 and became a Professor of Homeland Security and Counterterrorism in 2010.

You can’t make this stuff up. How can this man be working for the Department of Homeland Security? You tell me.

What about granting the FBI Presidential appointee seal of approval to the grandson of the Muslim Brotherhood’s founder, Siraj Wahhaj, a co-conspirator in the 1993 World Trade Center bombing?

Did you know the FBI supervised the construction of the WTC bomb using an informant named Emad Salem? I bet you didn’t. The FBI had their fingerprints all over the 1993 WTC bombing and 9/11/01.

Speaking of 9/11/01, in 2007, Maj. General Wesley Clarke revealed the true foreign policy agenda of the U.S. after 9/11, which was to take out seven countries in five years: “We’re going to take out seven countries in 5 years, starting with Iraq, and then Syria, Lebanon, Libya, Somalia, Sudan and, finishing off, Iran”

Then there is Eboo Patel, a member of Obama’s Advisory Council on Faith-Based Neighborhood Partnerships spoke at a Muslim Students Association and Islamic Society of North America and partnered with Tariq Ramadan.

Ramadan is the grandson of Siraj Wahhaj. Wahhaj advocates for the Islamic takeover of America under the banner of Sharia Law. He was also named as a possible co-conspirator in the 1993 World Trade Center bombing and has defended the convicted WTC bombers.

Like Obama, Patel has strong ties with former leaders of the terrorist Weather Underground members Bill Ayers and Bernadine Dorn.

Could this all be a coincidence?

Consider this: Aren’t the Weathermen’s propagandized ideologies once again being spewed today by the Obama Regime and the controlled mainstream media? You bet they are.

Issues such as “white privilege”, racism and world communism are all touchstones of the Obama Regime, are they not?

It all makes perfect sense according to the late FBI informant, Larry Grathwohl, who stated terrorists Bill Ayers and Bernadine Dorne launched the political career of Barry Soetoro HUSSEIN Obama from their home in Chicago.

Bill Ayers, I might add, is also an associate of Eboo Patel. In fact, both Ayers and Patel are frequent vistitors at the White House.

Way to go Barry!

The Weather Underground Terrorist Group was also allowed to fester in the 1970’s, with little intervention despite the bombing of the U.S. Capital, the Pentagon and post offices. Why?

Why would we install Homeland Security Advisor, Mohamed Elibiary, who is quoted by ISIS terrorists and is an admitted admirer of the late Ayatollah Khomeini” who seized the American embassy in Tehran in 1979 and the imprisoned U.S. embassy officials for 444 days.

Elibiary has advised numerous law-enforcement organizations on homeland security-related matters and was named to President Obama’s Homeland Security Advisory Council in 2010. Elibiary misused classified documents in order to promote the notion of “Islamophobia” was widespread.

Does this not concern you? What about this: Malick Obama is Barry Soetoro Hussein Obama’s half brother. And wouldn’t you know it, Malick is a terrorist in charge of finances and arms procurement for the Muslim Brotherhood. How about that?

And you thought only the Bushes and Bin Ladens kept it in the family.

You can’t make this stuff up.

The oversight of the Muslim Brotherhood’s international investments is one reason for the Obama administration’s support of the Muslim Brotherhood, according to an Egyptian news IDO, a group created by the Sudanese government, which is labeled as a terrorist state by the U.S. State Department.

And the Obama Regime refuses to call these terrorists Radical Islamists. Are you starting to see why?

According to documents uncovered by Freedom Outpost, Obama’s top supporter, Marty Nesbitt, a long-time aid and chief consultant to Obama’s re-election campaign launched a foundation to develop and build a Presidential library for the Communist in Chief. The foundation tied to this endeavor is headed by none other than Malik Obama.

Al-Jazeera also reports on Hussein Obama’s ties to the Muslim Brotherhood.

Aside from the fact that the CIA, MOSSAD, MI6 and the secret government have their dirty fingerprints all over most of the politically arousing acts of false flag terrorism we experience from ISIS and Al-CIA-da, there are definitely independent, unaffiliated lone wolf radicals and groups of radicalized Islamists who are intent upon waging their own Jihad and unleashing even more chaos on the West. Make no mistake about it.

Foreigners who have no Constitutional rights are being favored as Americans have seen Our rights and liberties slowly eroded.

Since 9/11, America has spent more than a trillion dollars fighting terrorism. Forteen years of forsaken our civil liberties in the pursuit of this endless Hegelian battle while allowing Our government to be infiltrated with our own enemies.

Incredible as this may sound, it is nonetheless true. We have funded Our enemies. And these enemies have infiltrated America.

Make no mistake about it, there are sleeper terrorist cells right here in the US.

We would be fools to assume otherwise, since there are 35 known terrorists training camps right here in the US in Our own back yard.

One must understand that America’s fundamental values and Our Constitution are diametrically opposed to Islam and Sharia Law, despite what Obama, communist and Islamic professors, intellectuals and the lamestream media degenerates profess.

Another important thing to consider in this Hegelian conflict is why has ISIS not struck Israel? The answer should be obvious by now. Like most answers to the secrets of the New World Order, they are hidden in plain sight. ISIS is a fabrication of the CIA and MOSSAD.

Like the growth of the Muslim Brotherhood in Our government. Apparently, Federal government employees, like the Syrian refugees are not being vetted by the FBI and are allowed to be placed in highly sensitive government positions?

An apparent CIA Hollywood front company called FINAL SOLUTION PRODUCTIONS was caught producing ISIS recruitment videos last February. This of course, was swept under the rug of mainstream media silence. To be clear, radical Islam is very REAL. It is not just CIA/MOSSAD/MI6 false flag attacks.

Radical Islam is real and growing. In fact, many recent converts found radical Islam not only in US mosques and the internet, but in prison.

Could the secret societies, who are the powers behind the rise of Saudi Arabia be facilitating the war on terror?

I think evidence of this is overwhelming.

Let’s take a look back to the early 1970’s when Secretary of State Henry Kissinger made a secret deal with Saudi Arabia for the exclusive purchase of oil.

In fact, the biggest and most profitable oil company is a PRIVATELY HELD corporation called: ARAMCO OIL (Arabian American Oil)

The Bush and Bin Ladin families and other global elitists have deep connections to ARAMCO OIL to this day.

When we wonder why HUSSEIN Obama drops leaflets warning ISIS (a CIA/MOSSAD creation) that the US would be bombing oil trucks we start to see the motive, don’t we?

So, Kissinger made the agreement to buy all the oil from Saudi Arabia and NOT drill in the vast oil fields of the United States as a “gesture” to the Saudis. As a result, the Saudis would have a guaranteed source of income from the USA in perpetuity.

The plan was to deplete all of the Saudi’s oil and then drill in the USA for our own oil and, in turn, have a monopoly on the oil production in the world well into the 21st Century. We are well on Our way to accomplishing this feat. It may also explain why Saudi Arabia funds terrorism against the West.

But the story does not end there. Kissinger also had the Saudis agree that ALL INTERNATIONAL OIL TRANSACTIONS were to be only in UNITED STATES DOLLARS.

This means that, if Germany wants to buy oil on the open market it must first buy US Dollars and then purchase its oil.   How nice.

This is one of the reasons why Gaddafi was taken out. He no longer wanted to be paid in U.S. petro dollars. He wanted to be paid in gold for Libyan oil.

The U.S. dollar is a fiat monetary instrument. Fiat money is not BACKED by any real commodity. It is merely a “promise to pay.”

The Nixon Administration, in cahoots with the FED, decided to take the US off the GOLD STANDARD in 1971, thus making the deal work. So, in 1972, Kissinger made the “secret oil deal” and Nixon took the US off the Gold Standard thus, paving the way for inflation and a weaker dollar.

Now since the US was “secretly dependent” on Saudi oil that meant the US would have to DEFEND its oil interests in Saudi Arabia and the only Democracy in the Middle East the State of Israel. And this secret deal continues to this day.

So, the predicament that ensuing administrations have faced all stem from having to protect Saudi Arabia one of the most repressive totalitarian ISLAMIC regimes in the Middle East, who use their oil proceeds to fund global terrorism and also be the number one supporter of Israel, who are the sworn enemies of Islam.

The result: Conflict, war and terrorism.

Most Americans are not aware of this political conundrum.

The recent clamor for American Energy Independence threatens this whole veil of secrecy and the plot to deindustrialize America by implementing Agenda 21 protocols.

The post 2008 economic boom in North Dakota and Montana are a thorn in the side of the collectivists as a direct result of oil drilling

Hey, if you want a $15 hour job at Mac Donald’s don’t protest, move to Fargo and you will get it.

Of course, the economic development in these oil rich states and other like Texas, downplay oil’s roll in the improvement.

This is why the EPA and the environmental movement was created, to intentionally slow economic growth, raise energy costs and reduce the standard of living of most Americans.

This is all occurring as America has an abundance of oil to last for at least the next 100 years.   A fact well known to Kissinger and geologists back in 1972.

The Secret Oil Deal is also the “underlying basis” of the PRESERVATION OF THE STATE OF ISRAEL. Assuring that the US kept its bargain with the Saudis, also meant America had to defend Israel. By building up Israel’s military to one of the biggest in the WORLD, the US has a land base from which to launch military operations anywhere in the Middle East. It is as simple as that. And convenient, since the CIA and MOSSAD frequently work together, hand in hand. Like on 9/11/01.

The clever Political Zionists have so far successfully hijacked the Jewish People in the name of Israel, creating a false paradigm that maintains any attack on Israel is an attack on the Jewish People, which is nonsense.

Why does the media and Our politicians give Israel a free pass when the Orthodox Jews, Rabbis, the UN, Amnesty International and other human rights groups have condemned Israel for its Apartheid against the Palestinians?

Why the bias? Well, first off, you must understand that Zionism and Judaism are diametrically opposed.

The State Of Israel was a Zionist ploy, a political ideology that is condemned by all true religious Jews.

When thousands of Jewish Rabbi’s come to the U.S. Capital to protest against the Apartheid State of Israel, and the Zionist perversion of Judaism there is no media coverage at all.

But when Al Sharpton and Co. stage a Black Lives Matter protest the whole world is over exposed to their dangerous and divisive propaganda.   Why is that?

For Christians, there is also a biblical warning:

“Beware of the false Jews, those who say they are Jews but are really of the synagogue of Satan” – Rev 2:9

It is not anti-Semetic to be anti-Israel, in fact to be anti-Israel is to be pro Jewish. The Zionists have caused all of the destabilization of the middle east since 1947.

Despite what AIPAC, the mainstream media and Our corrupt so called “leaders” profess, Israel is an Apartheid police state. And like Saudi Arabia, America and Israel are more partners and collaborators than allies.

These are merely the facts.

Obama’s carefully chosen promises were really nothing more than payback to his special interest owners, like Solyndra.

The promises Obama has broken were simply lies necessary to garner support for various aspects of the Regime’s agenda, like mandated socialist healthcare.

Obama is no dummy. He knows exactly what he is doing. As Kissinger noted, Obama has been tasked with furthering the aims of the New World Order. And true to form, Marxist Obama is delivering. He is competently and systematically destroying our economy, our military and every value America holds dear.

Like the corruption of the Bush and Clinton Crime Families, the Obama Regime is no different. It is business as usual. They all serve the masters of the black network. They all have been selected to move America further into the New World Order.

And like Hitler and Stalin, Obama employs communists, thugs, tax cheats and criminals to do the Great Work. Sleazy, divisive and Corruptible folks. People like Eric Holder and Lois Lerner.

After all Obama nominated tax cheat Tom Daschle to be Secretary of Health and Human Services. When Daschle turned down the position, Obama nominated another tax cheat Kathleen Sebelius.

Obama also nominated tax cheat Nancy Killefer to be his Chief Performance Officer and tax cheat Hilda Solis to be the Secretary of Labor. He appointed another tax cheat Ron Kirk be the White House Chief Trade Representative.

Speaking of tax cheaters, Al Sharpton owes millions in taxes with no action taken against him. Just watch what happens if you owe the IRS and don’t pay.

The blatant nepotism and corruption of the Obama Regime is omnipresent. So is Obama’s blatant affinity for Marxists. His White House Communications Director Anita Dunn, said that one of her favorite political philosophers was Mao Tse-tung, the Chinese dictator who murdered sixty millions of his own people.

Obama also has an obvious soft spot for Islam. In July 2010, Charles Bolden, the administrator of NASA, said that Obama had told him that the primary purpose of NASA was “to reach out to the Muslim world.”

Indeed. In January 2012, Obama appointed members of the Muslim Brotherhood to high positions of power in Our government while Congress was in recess, which is a violation of the Constitution, something Obama does regularly. Of course, he invokes the Constitution when it serves the transformation agenda.

After the 9/11 Benghazi attacks the Obama Regime lied about the fact it was an obvious terrorist attack, creating a bogus narrative that Susan Rice was tasked to peddle to the American people on the Sunday morning circuit about an inflammatory video.

It took more than an entire week before the Obama administration was forced to acknowledge that Benghazi was indeed a terrorist attack. Still, the Regime refused to identify the terrorists as radical Muslims.

At that same time, the Washington Post reported Obama’s false statement that he had called Bengahzi a terrorist attack from the beginning.

After the attack began, U.S. military was ordered to “stand down,”. Obama falsely reported that not such stand down order had been made.

Although the Obama Regime made many revisions to its talking points, White House Press Secretary Jay Carney falsely stated that only a “single adjustment” had been made, and that it simply involved changing the wording of “consulate” to “diplomatic facility.”

ABC News published a complete list of all the changes to the talking points, which can be read here.

Among the changes was the deletion of the following paragraph:

“The Agency has produced numerous pieces on the threat of extremists linked to al-Qa’ida in Benghazi and eastern Libya. These noted that, since April, there have been at least five other attacks against foreign interests in Benghazi by unidentified assailants, including the June attack against the British Ambassador’s convoy. We cannot rule out the individuals has previously surveilled the U.S. facilities, also contributing to the efficacy of the attacks.”

Victoria Nuland, a State Department spokeswoman, played a key role in the editing of the talking points. But instead of firing her for this, Obama offered her a promotion.

Stalin and Mao would be so proud of you, Barrack. . .

So would Josef Goebbels, Hitler’s Minster of Propaganda, who said:

“If you tell a lie big enough and keep repeating it, people will eventually come to believe it. The lie can be maintained only for such time as the State can shield the people from the political, economic and/or military consequences of the lie. It thus becomes vitally important for the State to use all of its powers to repress dissent, for the truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the truth is the greatest enemy of the State.”

The distortion of history and the clear and present totalitarian socialist agenda American’s have been slowly been subjected for decades by democrats and republicans alike evidences the operation of a corrupt, oligarchical, one party, government controlled media dictatorship.

The political divisiveness created by the Obama Regime is unprecedented in Our history. Using Communist street thug Alinsky tactics, Obama has America divided in every way: race, religion, class, sexual preferences, gay marriage, you name it.

While Americans are divided, they are also distracted from the economy, the lack of good paying jobs and a  growing welfare state.

There has been more social chaos and upheaval in the last seven years than in the last forty. And like Hitler and Stalin, Obama has employed the sleaziest of the sleazy and the most corrupt of the corruptible: criminals, cheats, liars, derelicts and deviants in his continuing efforts to fundamentally transform America  into a totalitarian socialist welfare state.

Thanks to the massive media love fest the elite have bestowed upon Obama, I can think of no one, aside from Hitler, who has so transformed a nation in such short time.

As the growing chaos and division in Our country illustrates, the change is not for the better.

For out of chaos will come order.

A New World Order.

ADDITIONAL  LINKS, ARTICLES, SOURCES AND VIDEOS:

http://www.goodreads.com/book/show/631725.Early_Islam

http://www.nytimes.com/2015/09/02/opinion/thomas-friedman-our-radical-islamic-bff-saudi-arabia.html?_r=0

http://www.theguardian.com/world/2010/dec/05/wikileaks-cables-saudi-terrorist-funding

http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2014/aug/31/combat-terror-end-support-saudi-arabia-dictatorships-fundamentalism

http://www.wnd.com/2008/04/61488/

http://www.denverpost.com/rodriguez/ci_4319898

https://www.corbettreport.com/osama-bin-laden-pronounced-dead-for-the-ninth-time/

http://www.globalresearch.ca/why-does-the-u-s-support-saudi-arabia-a-country-which-hosts-and-finances-islamic-terrorism-on-behalf-of-washington/5398408

http://www.nytimes.com/1993/10/31/nyregion/bomb-informer-s-tapes-give-rare-glimpse-of-fbi-dealings.html?pagewanted=all

http://www.jstor.org/stable/4328744

http://usatoday30.usatoday.com/money/economy/story/2011-08-27/Unemployed-Go-to-North-Dakota/50136572/1

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0362331913000773

http://www.jewishhistory.org/the-rise-of-islam/

http://www.washingtonsblog.com/2014/09/sibel-2.html

http://whatreallyhappened.com/WRHARTICLES/fiveisraelis.html

http://abcnews.go.com/2020/story?id=123885

http://www.globalresearch.ca/the-federal-reserve-cartel-the-eight-families/25080

http://humansarefree.com/2013/11/complete-list-of-banks-ownedcontrolled.html

http://politicalvelcraft.org/2012/06/03/in-the-year-2000-there-were-seven-countries-without-a-rothschild-owned-central-bank-now-there-are-more/

http://www.globalresearch.ca/america-created-al-qaeda-and-the-isis-terror-group/5402881

Rise of The Gulf: Saudi Arabia as a Global Player

by Nicolás M. Depetris Chauvin:

AMERICA ALONE by Mark Steyn

Subscribe to TRUTH TALK NEWS and Howard Nema on youtube.

TRUTH TALK NEWS where news and HowardNema.com

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced and verifiable.

It is critical that you take the initiative to confirm the information contained in this presentation.

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

http://www.HowardNema.com
http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews
http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com
http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNewsLIVE

‘One basic truth can be used as a foundation for a mountain of lies, and if we dig down deep enough in the mountain of lies, and bring out that truth, to set it on top of the mountain of lies; the entire mountain of lies will crumble under the weight of that one truth, and there is nothing more devastating to a structure of lies than the revelation of the truth upon which the structure of lies was built, because the shock waves of the revelation of the truth reverberate, and continue to reverberate throughout the Earth for generations to follow, awakening even those people who had no desire to be awakened to the truth.’

Delamer Duverus

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE.

All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are free and independent of any network, group or association.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes

MAJ. GEN. SMEDLEY BUTLER AND THE FASCIST PLOT TO TAKE OVER AMERICA

 

By Howard Nema

In 1933,  to further the great Quest for a New World Order, America’s richest businessmen designed a massive coup  to establish a fascist dictatorship in the United States.

I am sure most Americans are unaware of this, since the event is rarely depicted in history books and aside from one History Channel documentary, has been ignored by the media for 82 years.

With  the Black Lives Matter and other front groups with paid for agitators and protestors forwarding the Obama Transformation Agenda we must all be concerned.

Oh yes. There has been a massive transformation of America in the last seven years.   A secular humanist atheistic communist transformation.   A Cultural Marxist revolution of demoralization and debauchery in an increasingly anything goes hedonistic society.

Yes, there has been a fundamental transformation of America. It began under Bush after 9/11/01 and intensified under Obama.

This should give us all concern since the bankers and big business magnates behind this fundamental transformation of America are the same forces behind the plot in 1933.

Only today, the elite are far wealthier and even more powerful and influential.     As a result we must expose the enemy at every opportunity and be ever vigilant of Our individual rights to maintain  the freedom of Our Republic.

 

As the elite secretly continue their plot to steal the wealth of the world today and create a cashless two class neo-feudal society, the elitists in 1933 plotted to secretly finance an army, organized by leading officers of the Morgan and Du Pont combine including the biggest names in business and finance at that time:

John Davis – Former Democratic presidential candidate and a senior attorney for J.P. Morgan.

Irene Du Pont – Right-wing chemical industrialist and founder of the American Liberty League, the organization assigned to execute the plot.

Grayson Murphy – Director of Goodyear, Bethlehem Steel and a group of J.P. Morgan banks.

William Doyle – Former state commander of the American Legion and a central plotter of the coup.

Al Smith –  Former governor of New York and a codirector of the American Liberty League.

John J. Raskob – A high-ranking Du Pont officer and a former chairman of the Democratic Party. In later decades, Raskob would become a “Knight of Malta,” a Roman Catholic Religious Order with a high percentage of CIA spies, including CIA Directors William Casey, William Colby and John McCone.

Robert Clark – One of Wall Street’s richest bankers and stockbrokers.

Gerald MacGuire – Bond salesman for Clark, and a former commander of the Connecticut American Legion. MacGuire was the key recruiter to General Butler.

The plotters attempted to recruit General Smedley Butler to lead the coup. They selected him because he was a war hero who was popular with the troops. The plotters felt his good reputation was important to make the troops feel confident that they were doing the right thing by overthrowing a democratically elected president.

However, this was a mistake: Butler was popular with the troops because he identified with them. That is, he was a man of the people, not the elite.

When General Butler was approached to lead the coup, he pretended to go along with the plan.

The elitist traitors wanted General Butler to deliver an ultimatum to Roosevelt.     Roosevelt would pretend to become sick and incapacitated from his polio, and allow a newly created cabinet officer, a “Secretary of General Affairs,” to run things in his stead.

The secretary, of course, would be carrying out the orders of Wall Street. If Roosevelt refused, then General Butler would force him out with an army of 500,000 war veterans from the American Legion. But MacGuire assured Butler the cover story would work:

“You know the American people will swallow that. We have got the newspapers. We will start a campaign that the President’s health is failing. Everyone can tell that by looking at him, and the dumb American people will fall for it in a second…”

Of course, money was no object to those of the Rothschild’s ilk.   Clark told Butler that he would spend half his $60 million fortune to save the other half.

“We need a fascist government in this country to save the nation from the communists who want to tear it down and wreck all that we have built in America.   The only men who have the patriotism to do it are the soldiers, and Smedley Butler is the ideal leader. He could organize a million men overnight.”

MacGuire travelled to Italy to study Fascism and  reported back to his boss, Robert Clark, that they should implement the same thing type of government as Mussolini.

Big business admired Mussolini because he had used a strong hand to deal with labor unions, put out social unrest, and get the economy working again, albeit at the point of a gun.

Americans are unaware due to the elite’s control of  education, the media and history most are unaware of the many famous elitists  back then who admired Hitler and Mussolini:

Henry Ford, John D. Rockefeller, John and Allen Dulles (who, besides being millionaires, would later become Eisenhower’s Secretary of State and CIA Director, respectively), and, of course, everyone on the above list.

The plot fell apart when Gen. Butler revealed the details of the coup before the McCormack-Dickstein Committee, which would later become known as the House Un-American Activities Committee.

One would find it hard to argue that it does indeed appear that the plethora of communist themes and ideologies have become blatantly visible in Our society today, which  illustrates that the despised Mc Carthy era communist witch hunts of the 1950’s may now have some merit.

The McCormack-Dickstein Committee heard the testimony of Butler and French, but failed to call in any of the coup plotters for questioning, other than MacGuire.

In fact, in true secret society New World Order fashion, the Committee whitewashed the public version of its final report, deleting the names of powerful businessmen whose had politicians in their pocket to protect the façade of these traitorous criminals reputations.

Of course, the elite-controlled media have been silent about this since 1933.

Butler, appalled by the cover-up, went on national radio to denounce it, but with little success.  In 1967 John Pivak uncovered the Committee’s internal report which confirmed Butler’s story:

“In the last few weeks of the committee’s life it received evidence showing that certain persons had attempted to establish a fascist organization in this country… There is no question that these attempts were discussed, were planned and might have been placed in execution if the financial backers deemed it expedient…

MacGuire denied [Butler’s] allegations under oath, but your committee was able to verify all the pertinent statements made to General Butler, with the exception of the direct statement suggesting the creation of the organization. This, however, was corroborated in the correspondence of MacGuire with his principle, Robert Sterling Clark, of New York City, while MacGuire was abroad studying the various form of veterans’ organizations of Fascist character.”

Needless to say, the survival of America’s democracy is not an automatic or sure thing, especially under the Obama Regime, as We the People are being incrementally influenced by divisive mainstream media socialist propaganda, cultural Marxism, demoralization of Our society and outright communism.

American youth are the main targets. This communist agenda depends on mind controlling Our kids to embrace socialism under the guise of fairness and quality, which socialism is neither.

In today’s world, Americans must remain vigilant against these internal domestic enemies of freedom more so than foreign threats.

The reason America has not been invaded by a foreign nation since the War of 1812 is due to the fact that Americans are so well armed.

This frustrates and infuriates the global elite since all rational nations are fully aware that an invasion of America would be suicide, as troops would be fiercely met by Our well armed populace.

This is why there is such a mass media rally cry against guns and calls for gun control.    There is no other reason.  The New World Order agenda is based on a very simple premise: “USE OUR POWER AND INFLUENCE TO CONTROL THE WORLD”

The tyrants who wish to enslave America cannot take control over such a well armed populace. As a result, for 50 years, the controlled mainstream media has propagandized gun violence to the extent that Americans would want to willingly give up Our guns.

Do so at your own peril, my fellow Americans, because history has a way of repeating itself. American gun rights are the last resort against tyranny in government. NEVER GIVE UP YOUR GUNS!

As Abraham Lincoln rightly noted:

“America will never be destroyed from the outside. If we falter and lose our freedoms, it will be because we destroyed ourselves.”

 

Sources and Additional Information:

Jonathon Vankin and John Whalen, The 60 Greatest Conspiracies of All Time (Secaucus, N.J.: Carol Publishing Group, 1997) Jules Archer,

The Plot to Seize the White House (New York: Hawthorne Books, 1973) George Seldes,

Even the Gods Can’t Change History  (Secaucus, N.J.: Lyle Stuart, Inc., 1976)

John Spivak, A Man in His Time (New York: Horizon Press, 1967)

War Is A Racket by Maj. General Smedley Butler

TRUTH TALK NEWS where news and HowardNema.com
Subscribe to TRUTH TALK NEWS and Howard Nema on youtube.
“Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced, accurately presented and verifiable.

It is critical that you take the initiative to confirm the information contained in this presentation.

For a library of additional links, books, articles and related information please visit HowardNema.com

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

http://www.HowardNema.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNewsLIVE

‘One basic truth can be used as a foundation for a mountain of lies, and if we dig down deep enough in the mountain of lies, and bring out that truth, to set it on top of the mountain of lies; the entire mountain of lies will crumble under the weight of that one truth, and there is nothing more devastating to a structure of lies than the revelation of the truth upon which the structure of lies was built, because the shock waves of the revelation of the truth reverberate, and continue to reverberate throughout the Earth for generations to follow, awakening even those people who had no desire to be awakened to the truth.’

Delamer Duverus

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site.     Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE.

All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are free and independent of any network, group or association.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes

 

THE KEYSTONE PIPELINE AND THE AMERICAN WELFARE STATE

OBAMA LIAR

 

OBAMA  LIES TO AMERICA:

SAYS KEYSTONE PIPELINE

WON’T SIGNIFICANTLY STIMULATE

THE ECONOMY, CREATE JOBS,  OR

LOWER OIL PRICES. . . . . . .

BUT IT WOULD ADD TO GLOBAL WARMING

Really?

All I see getting added to here are the welfare rolls.    What do you see?

 

By Howard Nema

For seven years Obama has blocked the Keystone Pipeline. The Ministry of Truth reported that the pipeline would not be in the best interests of United States National Security and would contribute to global warming.

http://www.nytimes.com/2015/11/07/us/obama-expected-to-reject-construction-of-keystone-xl-oil-pipeline.html?_r=0

The goal of the United States National Security interests is to maintain this lie to assist in the willing reduction of Americans freedom and standards of living in order to save the planet.

All the while billionaires and multimillionaires who made their fortunes on capitalism rail on capitalism, promoting socialism and economic inequality as they lower everyone else’s standard of living.

Many, like the eco-friendly tree huggers buy fully into the deception.

They  willingly reduce their carbon footprint by living in 400 square foot eco-friendly geo-homes while Al Gore and Obama spew carbon, which by the way  has been insanely demonized as a deadly poison gas.    A gas that without it,  life on earth could not  exist!

But  I digress.

Yes, Obama and the eco-fascists constantly  jet across the world burning hundreds of thousands of gallons of jet fuel  while preaching the fire and brimstone New Age religion of climate change  fanaticism  and warn about the deadly dangers of global warming to Gaia earth instead of warning about the destruction of Our dollar, inflation and the standard of living.

Then  Obama has the audacity to say We the People can’t be selfish and keep our thermostats so high in the winter and low in the summer, selling a bill of goods to the sheople, who willingly accept discomfort and buy into reducing their carbon footprint and their standard of living while the traitor and chief increasing his own.

Why is it  always we who have to sacrifice and do with less while they themselves live in 20,000 square foot mansions kept at 72 degrees year round in pure comfort?

Outrageous isn’t it?    Talk about hot air.   Hot shit.

Fools.   For now it appears voluntary.  As the movement grows the deniers are attacked and hated more and more..

This Hegelian ploy must be abated, or the iron boot of hot tyranny will fall upon the unfaithful to the New Age way of life.    Yes.   Even today, in our so supposedly tolerant and liberal society,  many are already calling for the imprisonment of deniers.

How very Medieval, no.  After all, we are dealing with neo-feudalism.

The more people buy into these carbon tax schemes and willing submission to this ever increasing soft tyranny, the less there will be a need to use force to control the herd.

The resisters will be and are targeted as radicals and extremists, while the compliant slaves are praised for their intelligence and wisdom.

Fools.

The ultimate road the transformers of America want the sheople to go down is the road of submission to the will of the State. The more who go along with the New Age New World Order indoctrination of humanity, the less resistance they will have to contend with and the more orderly the selection process can continue.

Oh yes. I said selection process. As it was before the Bolshevik Revolution and the rise of Hitler and the Nazis so it is today. Make no mistake about it. Tune it all out if you’d like to, but the pieces are all once again being put into place for a great social change, as Obama called it.   A fundamental transformation.

Indeed.   Into the New World Order.

Fools.

OBAMA SERVES TEH ELITEIn 2007 Obama promised shovel ready jobs to rebuild our electrical grid and our crumbling roads and bridges. To this day, there hasn’t been one shovel.

Economic growth consists of mostly part time jobs paying $10 per hour or less, but Obama says we don’t need the pipeline because it will not significantly improve Our economy since gasoline prices are already so low.

Interesting how the spike of gas prices in 2008 has been used as a political tool and the many long term economic benefits are downplayed, or ignored.

OBAMA LIE PRE PRESIDENT

Gee, you’d think they want to reduce the standard of living of every American?

http://keystone-xl.com/benefits-of-keystone-xl-oil-pipeline-us-jobs-economic-benefits-energy-security-environmental-responsibility-pipeline-safety-TransCanada/

Here are just a few reasons to support the Keystone XL Pipeline:

Jobs.  This project is the definition of shovel-ready.   Almost overnight, Keystone XL could put 9,000 hard-working American men and women directly to work.

The U.S. State Department’s Final Supplemental Environmental Impact Statement (PDF, 4 MB) found that the project would support more than 42,000 direct and indirect jobs nationwide. Learn more about Keystone XL jobs. Economic Benefits Keystone XL will contribute more than $3 billion towards U.S. GDP. Taxes paid by the project will greatly benefit the towns and counties it passes through.

The U.S. State Department’s Final Supplemental Environmental Impact Statement (PDF, 4 MB) showed Keystone XL will provide a substantial increase in tax revenues for counties along the pipeline route, with 17 of 27 expected to see increases of 10 percent or more.

Keystone XL connects the largest most sophisticated refining hub in the Gulf Coast with the third largest oil reserves on the planet and the second largest oil-producing region in the United States. Safe, secure access to domestic crude oil is key to ensuring long-term energy security. That’s exactly what Keystone XL provides.

Fears of environmental damages are unfounded.  The State Department’s Final SEIS, and four previous environmental impact statements written over the past five years, containing more than 17,000 pages of scientific research, all reached a similar conclusion: Keystone XL would have minimal impact on the environment.

Multiple scientific studies have also shown that Keystone XL and the development of the oil sands will not add to the global warming fraud or put the global climate in jeopardy.

Safety.  It has been well-established that pipelines are, by far, the safest mode of transportation for crude oil and natural gas. A recent Fraser Institute study shows that pipeline workers are less likely to be injured on the job and pipelines have fewer incidents per mile than trains and trucks.

The State Department environmental impact reports have concluded that Keystone XL would have a degree of safety greater than any other crude oil pipeline in operation in the U.S.

That’s because  59 additional special safety conditions that go above and beyond federal regulations. Crude oil needs to move from wells to the refineries in the safest and most efficient way possible, no compromises.

Learn more @ the Keystone XL blog post:

Gas prices were made artificially high for years before 2008 due to speculation.    Supply and demand from drilling in North Dakota and Montana, whose economies are booming as a result, are the reason gas prices are reduced to near where they should naturally be.

The oil boom that caused the economic growth seen in North Dakota is so great that it has spawned growth in other depressed industries and revitalized the entire state.

In fact, the economy is so good, if you want $15 hour minimum wage, you can go work at Mac Donalds in Fargo and make $15 due to the economic laws of supply and demand, not minimum wage, which by the way is $7.25.

Fools and socialists, (one can argue they are both one and the same), do not seem to realize that markets cannot sustain $15 per hour jobs if demand for a product or service doesn’t meet the supply.

In NYC there are thousands of fast food joints. If the demand only calls for $10.00 per hour wages, raising the minimum wage will result in layoffs, closings and replacement by robots and machines. While this may have been science fiction in the past, today robotics and artificial intelligence are viable and growing alternatives to human labor.

Are you aware that by 2029 it is extimated that 30% of traditional jobs will be replaced by artificial intelligence and robotics?

http://www.businessinsider.com/experts-predict-that-one-third-of-jobs-will-be-replaced-by-robots-2015-5

Do you realize with this will mean here in America, with open borders, unsustainable welfare obligations and debt?

Do you even care?

Are you not outraged how America is willingly being led down the path of destruction by a cult of personality charlatan who, in true Masonic fashion, hoodwinked his way into office by enormous sums given to him by Wall Street, the very class he is supposed to be opposed to?

These are the same puppet masters who cooked up the Hegelian 2008 bailout to save their corrupt, greedy skins. These are the same Machiavellian deceivers who concocted the plan to create a housing bubble, selling cut and paste mortgages and worthless derivatives resulting in the loss of 20 million Americans homes.

These same criminals have profited ten fold as a result of their conjuring up this elaborate scheme, the seeds of it sown when Bill Clinton repealed Glass-Steagall in 1998.

The creators of this economic suffering are the very same who profit from it, while the average American struggles to fill their gas tanks to get to their $9 hour part time job at Wal-Mart and the social services office to get their food stamps.

http://www.pewresearch.org/files/2014/12/FT_14.12.16_wealthInequality4.png

Currently, the sheople are getting a little break in the reduction of gasoline prices adding to the illusion of economic progress, deceived into believing that America is indeed on the road to recovery. Sadly, we are not.

No, America is not on the road to recovery, yet we are still addicted to the ether pumped out of the Obama regime and believe the Goebbels-esque hype.

What happens when Obamacare mandates kick in in January? Everyone must have costlier insurance or pay a tax. This year the tax will be about $2 grand.

Does it speak to any of you that Obamacare calls for 16,000 new IRS agents, but no new doctors?

What happens when as a result of Obama taxing the coal industry into oblivion and electric prices “necessarily spiking” 40 percent as Obama himself agreed they will. And they will.

So Obama shoots down the Keystone Pipeline like a drone strike and ignores the collateral damage associated with his collectivism.

Teleprompter reading Obama voiced the edicts of the eco-fascist power brokers who control his abominable administration and are fast working to deindustrialize America while increasing welfare rolls.

The absolutely abhorrent lies spewed by this eco-fascist that the Keystone Pipeline would not significantly help our already “improving” economy is laughable. Indeed, things are far better than they were in 2008. But we need to increase growth exponentially and in each and every way.

http://www.factcheck.org/2014/10/obamas-numbers-october-2014-update/

But Obama’s record is deceiving. The economic progress has created an economic recovery of low or lower income,  and in many cases part time jobs. This recovery finds Americans who were out of work taking jobs as far lower wages as a result.

This is why many college graduates have degrees in worthlessness and are flipping burgers at Wendy’s or are serving lattes at Starbucks. This level of recovery was not created by, or assisted by anything Obama has done. It is simply the stabilizing effect of economics. Economics stifled by taxation, regulation and a myriad of limits to growth.

This recovery has benefited corporations the most, but due to loopholes in regulations pay little or no taxes. These communists want a progressive income tax on the people. That is why the Federal Reserve Crime Syndicate was enacted. To transfer the wealth to the Illuminati New World Order banksters. The writing is on the wall. We must end all taxation on personal income and property. Tax the corporations and mandate them to serve the people.

There was a time when corporations had to prove their service was beneficial to society in order to continue doing business. I think it is long past time America takes the same approach. This will lead to better and safer products, especially in the pharmaceutical and food industries. This will also lead to higher earnings, better working conditions and benefits for workers.

Let the corporations pay, not the government and we will change the world for the better.

Yes, America is better than it was in 2008, no doubt. Still, for too long economic conditions in America continue to be stagnant. There is a malaise. Our economy has flatlined.

There are signs of improvement, but these economic improvements are mostly in wealthier parts of Our country like the New York City Metro area, which is an international hub of commerce.

2015 Main Street in Torrington, CT looks much the same as  like  2008 Torrington but  with more shuttered store fronts, section 8 housing, methadone clinics and homeless shelters.

Like many once thriving manufacturing towns, Torrington has bit the dust.

The same cannot be said of Stamford or Greenwich, Connecticut or other affluent communities where 20,000 square foot mansions are regularly being built, even back in 2008.    This is where the hedge fund managers and billionaires reside.

And they like to live large.

We the sheople, the miniscule insignificant useless eaters have to submit to these elites and  their propagandized deceptions to bolster and implement their bogus  carbon schemes and other nefarious collectivist ploys.

Still, the fact is the majority of Americans still living pay check to pay check, have $10,000 of credit card debt and little or no savings or retirement funds.

And we call this economic progress.

Obama eluding to lower gasoline prices is nothing more than a ruse to shoot down the Keystone pipeline. Certainly, the mass herds of sheople who have continuously bought and support Obama’s fundamental transformation of America believe every word he says, since on the surface his record looks pretty good compared to economic conditions under Bush.

Obama killed Gaddafi, a stabilizer of radical violent Islamic extremists so the Rothschilds could get into Libya and set up a central bank. This led to the Benghazi terror attack and the murder of Ambassador Stevens and the lies about an inflammatory video sold and propagandized on every Sunday morning political show for weeks by the Regime’s minion Susan Rice.

In the corrupt communist Obama Regime political agendas trump truth, justice and the general welfare of the American people if need be. It is pure communism. A means to an end. We mean nothing to these slime, yet want everything from us. They want us to kneel at their feet and swear allegiance to great State.

We are to be used and abused by these Marxist elitists like a pimp treats his stable of crack whores, addicting them to candied rhetoric and creating wilful obedience. Any dissent to this is met with outrage, anger and hate. It is like the “two minutes hate” from Orwell’s 1984.    Hate all who oppose The Brotherhood.

To illustrate the insidious craftiness of the Regime’s Hegelian ploy executed with Machiavellian precision, the Obama regime refuses to calls violent Islamic extremists terrorists as they invoke Allah and stab and behead Americans on Our soil.

The regime activated the predetermined plan to “bring the troops home and end the war” to intentionally destabilized the entire region by pulling the troops out.

This was all part of the fundamental transformation.

Over the past seven years, green has become the new red. The communist/collectivist activities of the Obama regime have their constituents hoodwinked over the fact that the democrats are truly the wealthiest of the wealthy and that all of these collectivist measures to get Americans off their addiction to fossil fuels have benefited Obama’s constituents to the tune of billions of dollars of taxpayer money being funneled to insolvent companies like Solyndra, who duped taxpayers out of more than $550 million before going bankrupt.

The left continuously blame the right for a war on the poor and middle class, when these communists are stealing the wealth of America and squandering it for their capitalist cronies. The irony is murderous.

While Unions, who are by definition creatures of the left and many wise America workers who are desperately trying to improve their standard of living and get better paying jobs point this out.

Our communist in chief and the teleprompter writer spin doctors focus on the many great Agenda 21 achievements that have so far transformed the country, and as a result, there would be no need for the pipeline because it would not significantly help to create jobs or the economy.

Really?

This horse shit is again taken as gospel by the Obama legion, who more and more resemble Germans in the mid 1930’s supporting der Fuhrer.

After all, if you remember your history, American Banks and corporations funded Hitler’s rise and fall from 1924 to 1945 aided by the Vril Society and the German Bavarian Secret Societies of Yale’s Skull and Bones and the Thule Society, both known as the Brotherhood of Death, both symbolized by the skull and crossbones sported by the Nazis.

Here is a relevant and very interesting correlation:

Hitler also transformed Germany, did he not? All these new ideologies and programs were forced on the population. As Germany became an economic powerhouse throughout the 1930’s Hitler became a God to the German people.

But their God was an angel of darkness disguised as light. A false prophet who built up Germany only to have her destroyed and left in worse economic ruin than in 1918, or at any time in its history.

Comparisons to Obama, Bush and Hitler are applicable. As noted, we are today exposed to a soft tyranny, grandiose corruption and deception and serious moral decay to distract the people from noticing this forced transformation and planned deindustrialization.

Oh the lies.

Remember? You can keep your own doctor? You can keep your insurance. There are no weapons of Mass destruction.

Many deceptions. Remember Hitler signed the Munich Pact, then invaded Poland.

History repeats itself, in similar forms. As George Santayana noted: ‘Those who cannot remember the past are condemned to repeat it.’

Speaking of the past: Where are those good paying shovel ready jobs Obama promised to build up our crumbling infrastructure when he was on the campaign trail in 2007?

There are none and there will be none. No true economic development will be fostered that benefits the majority of Americans, who are in fact the most economically strapped.

When the goal is to get as many people on welfare and dependence on government programs, you cannot have too much economic progress. This is assisted by corporate welfare and the Federal Reserve artificially pumping up the stock market, which mostly benefits corporations.

The stock market and the 1% have profited more under Obama than under any other administration in the last 50 years. The gap between rich is even larger than at the turn of the 20th century when Teddy Roosevelt attacked the trusts and instituted the first social justice programs.

http://www.pewresearch.org/fact-tank/2014/12/17/wealth-gap-upper-middle-income/

Just because today’s poor have cell phones, welfare and food stamps doesn’t mean there is improvement in American’s standard of living.

In fact the exact opposite is true. The Oligarchs who own Obama and both democrat and republican parties are single minded in their intent to destroy America.

While Americans willfully accept lies and treason from the puppet masters at the Council on Foreign Relations and the United Nations, this process of creating a two class neo-feudal society by filtering wealth up to the top 1/10 of one percenters by income redistribution has duped the poor and middle class, mostly democrats to unknowingly embrace their own servitude.

Can they not see the writing on the wall? No, nor can they see the forest because of the trees.

This continuous 60 year effort to deindustrialize America and steal the people’s wealth has been achieved thus far by lying traitors and one sided trade deals like NAFTA, GATT and now the Trans-Pacific Partnership, that have resulted in the loss of millions of U.S. jobs that will never return.

While pushing for NAFTA, you may recall how Al “global warming” Gore sold the lie to the American Sheople on Larry King, “this is a great deal for America, Larry.”

No. It was yet another great deal for the Oligarchs who were rewarded with cheap slave labor from third world countries at the expense of the American people, not their betterment.

Once again, the Hegelian Machiavellian deceivers are duping Americans to believe that the Keystone pipeline won’t help significantly improve Our stagnant economy, nor help us to reduce the size of government and Our National Debt.

What fools to believe this.

This is what happens when our leaders are lionized and transformed into pop-culture icons and celebrities. The cult of personality rules over the stupid sheople, more than ever.

History has proven that trade deals like GATT and NAFTA result in the exact opposite of their supposed intent. It is a simple deception called the law of reversal.

Hitler’s propaganda minister Josef Goebbels noted that you make the lie simple and keep repeating it the people will believe it.

Like the Bin Laden fable, or a myriad of other political lies and deceptions that have resulted in the conditions we face living in America today.

America is fast becoming a third world socialist cesspool thanks to the cognitive dissonance created by these deceivers who have convinced America to willfully slip the noose around Our collective necks and leap off into the deep end into totalitarian socialism.

What America faces now is a soft tyranny. In many ways, soft tyranny is more insidious than hot tyranny, when non-conformists are disappeared, jailed and executed.

When this type of tyranny is used as it was used by Hitler, Stalin, Mao and a long list of totalitarian socialists, the realities of the regimes are more obvious.

When rights and wealth are willingly relinquished as we have occurring today in Amerika the blame is not on the cruel dictator, but rather a specific economic or political group, like rich republicans, or Christians for instance.

Hitler used the same tactic when he demonized the Jews. In Obama’s case, the lies of getting rich Americans to paying their fair share is laughable, since these very same rich Americans own Obama’s ass.

UN New World Order tools Bill Gates and Warren Buffett say they don’t pay enough in taxes and call for higher taxation on the rich, while advocating global warming carbon taxes for everyone based on their carbon footprint and other Marxist deceptions, including the depopulation agenda. They are merely figureheads who continue to profit off the poor and middle class who continue to pay.

Gates and Buffett are peasants when compared to the wealth of the ruling class oligarchs they serve, of the Rockefeller, Rothschild, Royal Family ilk. Gates and Buffett have been tasked as the poster boys for United Nations Agenda 21 deindustrialization and depopulation.

How most Americans cannot notice, realize or believe this is happening means are either delusional, in denial, or more likely victims of cognitive dissonance.

You could say that to some extent we enjoy Our servitude. We like it in a sort of masochistic way.

It seems we enjoy getting raped and abused by Uncle Sam.

It seems rather than fight to truly live free, many submit to simplify their own existence and conform to set ways designed by psycho social engineering think tanks.

Despite the rhetoric from both sides of the political spectrum the rich continue to get richer as the middle class slowly edges down into poverty. History proves this, starting with Johnson’s “Great Society”.

The thing is, since the establishment of the “Great Society” in 1964 with welfare programs and other costly measures that have totalled more than $4 trillion, poverty levels are very much the same as they were in 1964.

What is not the same, is the size of the middle class which has shrunk dramatically over the last seven years and continues to shrink.

But as mentioned, it is not Obama alone. Yes, he has moved the New World Order deindustrialization agenda further than any president since Johnson, but all subsequent presidents have led America down this path to neo-fuedalism, both democrat and republican.

How and why the average American hasn’t noticed this, or doesn’t care is unbelievably foolish.

The State is breeding a permanent lazy welfare class, who are made as comfortable as possible in their poverty by the State with food stamps, rent payments, welfare, free health insurance and even cell phones.

All of this is supplied by taxes from the productive sector, which will eventually dwindle down to a handful of multi-national corporations that will supply all of American’s needs.

This is already happening. Mergers and acquisitions are killing competition. Small business takes most of the hits. The oligarchs don’t want mom and pop businesses, they want Americans to be forced to shop a big mega stores subsidized by U.S. tax dollars.

So when all of this is put into perspective it is easy to see why America has evolved and is being transformed into an ever growing welfare state.

This is why illegals swarm over Our borders unabated through both republican and democrat administrations. It has nothing to do with compassion, or fairness, or equality, but it has everything to do with this fundamental transformation of America into a welfare state on the path to world government.

ADDITIONAL LINKS:

http://www.libertyforlife.com/banking/rothschild-crime-ring-all-over-carbon-tax-scam.html

http://www.prnewswire.co.uk/news-releases/rothschild-australia-and-e3-international-to-take-the-lead-in-the-global-carbon-trading-market-154464275.html

http://www.foreignpolicyjournal.com/2011/03/24/a-rothschild-plan-for-world-government/

http://www.forbes.com/sites/jamestaylor/2015/05/19/updated-nasa-data-polar-ice-not-receding-after-all/

http://spectator.org/articles/41975/why-world-getting-warmer-even-though-it-getting-colder

http://www.express.co.uk/news/nature/617144/Antarctica-not-shrinking-growing-ice-caps-melting

http://www.express.co.uk/news/nature/548516/North-South-poles-not-melting-Dr-Benny-Peiser

http://www.dailymail.co.uk/sciencetech/article-2738653/Stunning-satellite-images-summer-ice-cap-thicker-covers-1-7million-square-kilometres-MORE-2-years-ago-despite-Al-Gore-s-prediction-ICE-FREE-now.html

Philip Dru Administrator by Col. Mandel House

Nation Killing: How the New World Order Rolls by Howard Nema

War is a Racket by Major General Smedley Butler

Tragedy and Hope by Carroll Quigley

Subscribe to TRUTH TALK NEWS and Howard Nema on youtube.

“Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

TRUTH TALK NEWS original logo banner upgrad MAY 2014

All information reported on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com is sourced, accurately presented and verifiable. 

It is critical that you take the initiative to confirm the information contained in this presentation.

Find your own truth.

There is only one truth.

Seek and you will find it.

Please take advantage and review the valuable information contained on this website.

http://www.HowardNema.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNewsLIVE

‘One basic truth can be used as a foundation for a mountain of lies, and if we dig down deep enough in the mountain of lies, and bring out that truth, to set it on top of the mountain of lies; the entire mountain of lies will crumble under the weight of that one truth, and there is nothing more devastating to a structure of lies than the revelation of the truth upon which the structure of lies was built, because the shock waves of the revelation of the truth reverberate, and continue to reverberate throughout the Earth for generations to follow, awakening even those people who had no desire to be awakened to the truth.’

Delamer Duverus

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.
All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE.

All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are free and independent of any network, group or association.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes

 

THE DESIGNED UNDERMINING OF AMERICA

By Howard Nema

America has truly become a flock of sheep. We once set trends, now we follow trends, the best promoted trends. We pick sides more out of popularity than substance. It is as if politics is a sporting event. Here’s an example:

On March 31, 2008, Obama said, “the biggest problems that we’re facing right now have to do with George Bush trying to bring more and more power to the executive branch and not go through Congress at all.  And that’s what I intend to reverse when I am President.”    Well that’s politics, right?

Interesting, how when Bush was lying and usurping power, the demo-com team rightfully lambasted him and went wild, but when Obama lies and usurps the Constitution all is well. In fact, there are cheers and applause from team.

Madness.

This reaction, or in Obama’s case, the lack of it, amplifies the ignorance and sports team like allegiance to political parties and ideologies here in America and around the world.  Party and ideological loyalty trumps logic, reason and truth.

Politics has become a sporting event. The Blue team vs. The Red team.  And like Tom Brady, the players cheat.   It is also interesting how much attention was given to this NFL scandal and so little attention to the real cheats in Washington and on Wall Street.

They never seem to pay for their misdeeds do they?

Bush should have been impeached and so should Obama.

Both parties are corrupt and owned by these same forces pushing for world government which they claim will be a better, more equitable and environmentally sound world.

In truth, these kind and noble sounding forces conceal evil intent and are a severe threat to the freedom and prosperity of all humanity.

Despite all the rhetoric, propaganda and perceived philanthropy, the international global elite cabal behind this agenda care nothing of Our freedom, Our soveriegnty, or Our welfare.

They owe allegiance to NO POLITICAL PARTIES, only their own adepts and the goals of the Order.     They own the media and promulgate divisiveness, hatred and racism, while raping and pillaging Our economy and the working class, always profiting on the very miseries they inflict on us, always planning wars for more profit and domination and always trying their best to keep everyone in the dark.

While professing to be for the worker and the middle class they plunder and personally profit, slowly, steadily and systematically destroying  what is left of the middle class by exploiting the very workers they claim to be rising out of poverty and leading them into neo-fuedal serfdom.

THREE CITY STATES SLAVE OWNERS

For those who are not aware,  the Pope is working for a one world government and has called for a New World Order.   As Marxist and Alinsky-ite  Obama transforms America, the Jesuit Marxist Pope Francis is transforming the Catholic Church.

Pope Francis’ visit to America is not a spiritual one, but rather a political one promoting global warming and the invasion of America by illegal aliens and growing acceptance of gay marriage and transsexualism.

Deception is nothing new at the Vatican, who for decades denied the fact that priests  and were molesting children.  The Pope and the Vatican denounce this evil, but  and allow the abuses to continue.   The same is true for Satanic rituals and blood sacrifices committed by priests.     The Vatican has been many skeletons in its closet.

roberto-calvi-blogtaormina-300x173Further corruption at the Vatican Bank resulted in the murder of God’s banker, Roberto Calvi and the poisoning of Pope John Paul I only 33 days after being elected Pope in 1979.

john-paul-1-sized ROBERT CALVI HANGED

As it is with the Vatican, so it is with republic-scum and the demo-coms, who are both helping to affect the same incremental transformation into totalitarian socialism, while calling for peace, equality, fairness and compassion.

VATICAN FREEMASONRY

This ongoing agenda is assisted by the controlled mainstream media, pop cultural influence and far left radical professors in colleges and public schools across America pushing Marxism and blaming America for all the world’s problems, not the purveyors of greed, despotism and death themselves.

Capitalism, America and Americanism are not to blame.  The global elite manipulators are to blame.

 

They, the  owners of the 147 companies that control Our economy and the world as a whole.   They are  the ones to blame for most of the misery in the world, not America.    Carroll Quigley  was quite frank about it in his 1966 book, Tragedy and Hope:  A History of the World In Our Time.  Here is a quote:

 

carroll_quigley_tragedy_n_hope

More quotes:

arthur_schlesinger_new_world_order_pay_by_blood_n_money

CFR-iluminquote1 cfr3

KENNEDY-NWO-SPEECH

Many have attempted to warn and expose the powers behind the Illuminati New World Order agenda:

 

 

Nearly a century since NYC Mayor John Hylan’s warning, slowly, incrementally both political parties have been co-opted and society has undeniably moved toward authoritarian socialism.

But this is how this nefarious agenda has thrived, through deception, manipulation and distortion of true history.   It is slow work.

Below are remarks from on the 1961 Congressional Record regarding the May-June 1947 Partisan Review which revealed that the suppressed hidden agenda of the United States was socialism and world government.  He further noted that the People have been  kept in the dark because it is believed that We are not sophisticated enough to see the value in world government:

CFR-SCHELE-WORLD-GOVTas1-Copy

CFR-ROAYL-INScrg1-CopyCFR-NEED-NOW

But the dumbed down sheep don’t realize this.   I know.  It is certainly not taught in school, but the agenda and assimilation into socialism permeates each and every U.S. classroom.   The doctrines of socialism and secularism are omnipresent.   I know.  I was one of the drones programmed by the Public Education system.   I was one of them.

It took me 38 years to even begin to  notice what was really going on in the world, so I understand why people are so clueless or dismissive of the truth.  That was me.

It is a difficult and deeply emotional process waking up.  To understand and digest the complexities if the New World Order can be overwhelming.   But with research comes understanding.

The first thing to note is that people think in minutes, days, weeks, months–a few years a head at most.  They do not carefully plot and plan complicated world events that will not occur for years, or decades, often incrementally.    Most folks, even the brightest of the bright do not know the enemy, or how the enemy operates.

Do you?

Do you notice?

Do you even care?

Are you in denial that this is indeed what is going on?

Do you want it?

Goethe said, “no one is more hopelessly enslaved, than one who falsely believes himself to be free.” If himself, instead of themselves, or herself offends you, than you further amplify my point.

Have you ever researched the Council on Foreign Relations, its mission statement and goals, or read Tragedy And Hope by Carroll Quigley, or the Prince by Machiavelli?

If not, it is long past time you do.   Or maybe you’re more interested in pop culture?

Caitlyn

 

 

 

 

 

Society puts actors and pop culture icons on such high pedestals, people react more like fans to politicians than constituents.

 

OBAMANOIDOBAMANOIIDDS

How can any of us support blatant bi-partisan liars, whose lies will and have affected all of us in the most tragic and negative of ways?

Would you accept these lies from your children, or your employees, or your friends?  Of course not.  So why do we accept lies from pop cultured icons designed to deceive us.

The true agenda of the age old quest of the secret societies “Great Work” of building the New World Order, if properly understood should rouse powerful opposition, but always the attention is focused elsewhere.

Symptoms are focused upon, instead of the root causes of the New World Disorder.

Ferguson and Baltimore are great examples of this use of division to stop the oppressed from looking at the real problems, which have been caused by liberalism and the forces behind the scenes fanning the flames of the New World Order agenda.

Can you see what has happened? How much we already have been transformed into a totalitarian socialist state since 9/11 by both of these corrupt political parties?   NSA spying, the Patriot Act, targeting of groups and religions?

Sadly, America is more interested in deflated football scandals than sustaining Our liberties, as more and more are willingly giving up their God given inalienable rights and freedoms in trust of the Government. Free Speech zones and political correctness are cancers on Our RIGHT TO LIFE, LIBERTY and the PURSUIT OF HAPPINESS. No where did Our founders say “trust the government”. The gov’t has all of the answers.

Despite Obama saying government doesn’t have all the answers, that is not his and other communists true feelings. Government will cure all the ills of the poor and oppressed.

What hypocrites.

Government has created more poverty than the private sector, even at the turn of the 20th century, when the wealth gap was much like it is now.  All the money continues to be siphoned to the top of the Illuminati pyramid.

Sure the poor have free insurance, rent and cellphones, but they are still IN POVERTY and dependent on Government as a result of the 50 years and counting War on Poverty.

Like the 40 year War on Drugs and the 15 year war on terrorism, the war on poverty is another Machiavellian deception to garner control and incrementally strip rights and Constitutional provisions.

For example, Obama professes how much American’s religious freedoms matter, unless they interfere with the totalitarian socialist agenda, like in the case of a Christian woman is jailed for her religious beliefs against gay marriage, but a Muslim flight attendant who refused to serve alcohol to passengers is defended by the media.

This obvious prejudice, and typical  hypocrisy  from those supposedly abhor prejudice, has been promoted and sold and embedded in common culture through education and mass media for decades as a way to further transform society on the path to one world government.

This is not a conspiracy theory.   It is not even a conspiracy.   It is a fact.   Out in the open.  The United Nations documents the intended transition. Of course, most Americans think the U.N. is a good thing, working for world peace and stopping hunger and helping the poor children in Africa and the Middle East. Yes, helping allow millions of Christians, many children to be slaughtered, beheaded and crucified with practically zero media or public attention.

The writing is on the wall:

I encourage you to study the United Nations documents and also the treaties which, once ratified by individual nations, become INTERNATIONAL LAW. The United Nations created the Commission for Global Governance, if you don’t believe this, visit the United Nations website and look it up.

The Commission for Global Governance released a report: Our Global Neighborhood, that predicates a world court, a global tax, and global police force. And the U.S. State Department Publication 7277 outlines a one world police force under the United Nations. So many prominent world leaders are calling for a one world government the intention is obvious.

Yet most people are so occupied by life’s responsibilities, careers, sports and television, they have little time to study what’s going on in the corridors of power.

The coming one world government is being set up in the political arena under the flag of the United Nations, through organizations such as the Trilateral Commission, Council of Foreign Relations, the Royal Institute of International Affairs, the Bilderbergers, and the Club of Rome whose members include many world leaders, media personalities and other influential people.

The published goal of the Council of Foreign Relations for example is a one world government.   Fortunately, a growing number of people are becoming aware of these influential groups.

The core of these groups adhere to the illuminist philosophy.

Another focus is control of economics with free trade agreements, the International Monetary Fund, World Bank and the Bank of International Settlements.

The coming global monetary crisis is intended to institute a universal debt-based currency controlled by the International Financiers and issued to individuals against biometric identification cards.   This is all about control!

BILDERBERG NICE

Another area of focus is religion.   Organizations like the World Council of Churches and the Parliament of World Religions were established to introduce a new world religion.

NEW AGE freemasonnewage

The New Age philosophy.   It is based on a pantheistic/humanist philosophy.   Pay careful attention when you study the documents and reports published by the United Nations and related organizations.

This philosophy is now being taught in the education system and has been implemented under programs such as Goals 2000.

The New World Order will be SOCIALISM. Read the United Nations declarations and treaties for proof of this fact. The individual will be subservient to the state. Rights and power reside in and derive from the state, not the individual.

United Nations documents all speak of collectivism. They claim that private ownership and management of property is not to the benefit of the human race. These things are cloaked in a pleasant language, and most people are taken in and deceived. Yet few bother to study these documents.

In the New World Order you will be in serfdom to the controlling elite! You will have no liberty, and no rights. The State will look after you for your best interests. Do you see how the governments of the free world are slowly becoming more involved in everyday life?

This is exactly what socialism is. The government becomes involved in every aspect of personal life. Today we require a license for so many things. People are fined for collecting rain water. Homes are condemned by the State for living off the grid and not being connected to electric or city water. This is not freedom.

In the New World Order, private ownership of property will be abolished. You will only own what you need “after all this is best for the world.” “We need to be looked after.”

Terms such as ‘sustainable development’ mean depopulation and serfdom. The masses continue to fall for lie after lie after lie. Study history and you will discover that there have been very few free societies.

Those that were free were either overthrown or fell into the trap of socialism, totally unaware of the dangers until it was too late.

round table

Socialism (communism) is always implemented through deception. History portrays a repetitive phenomenon . . . enslavement-revolt-freedom-apathy-enslavement.   Enslavement frequently followed revolution because the people did not realize that socialism was slavery, not freedom.

Today environment is being used to make people feel guilty, enticing them to accept socialism as necessary. The environmental movement has been co-opted to strip private ownership of control and exploitation of resources.

Many environmental ‘facts’ are lies, exaggerations and unscientific claims to manipulate the masses in the classic Hegelian Dialectic: create the problem, create opposition to the problem, then present your own predetermined solution.      

Global warming is a perfect example.

I recommend reading the study, ‘The Report From Iron Mountain,’ which suggested the environment as a tool by which to manipulate the masses to accept loss of freedom to a one world government.

Although a landowner pays taxes, and is steward of his land, its usage is dictated by international bureaucrats, ’empowered’ by vague treaties, driven by an insane ‘theology’, genocidal philosophy ‘approved’ by the bullying bribing tactics of governments.

“The United Nation’s goal is to reduce population selectively by encouraging abortion, forced sterilization, and control human reproduction, and regards two-thirds of the human population as excess baggage, with 350,000 people to be eliminated per day.” Jacques Cousteau, UNESCO Courier, November 1991.

Anyone who speaks against the incoming system will be labeled ‘anti government’ or a ‘trouble maker’, and either executed or imprisoned with majority assent. Citizens will support the new order because they will have been brainwashed by propaganda and will not understand what is really happening.

 

 

Already in the United States those who support the Constitution, Patriots and the Militia groups are ridiculed as crazy paranoids and dangerous extremists. In Australia, it’s the supporters of Pauline Hanson’s One Nation and Graham Campbell’s Australia First Parties who are ridiculed and persecuted.

These are simply people who are aware of what is going on. If you are one of those who believe that these patriots who are against globalism are crazy and deluded, have you done any research into this, or are you blindly following what the media feeds you?

UN_exterior_NYC_dbun_sCurrently the United Nations is trying to establish the framework for an international criminal court. When this is established the United Nations will be able to detain anyone from any nation and bring them before a panel of judges who will hear the case and pass judgment.

This international court will deal with are ‘crimes against humanity’ and ‘environmental crimes.’ If you think there is nothing wrong with this I suggest you read how the U.N. defines ‘environmental crime.’

A system is being created whereby those in control will be empowered to manufacture a crime and arrest anyone they deem a threat. The courts have no jury, one is guilty until proven innocent, and there is no appeal.

Also, because this Court is international, and your nation has surrendered its authority, your own country cannot protect you. This is going to directly affect YOU!

In the coming world government YOU will have no personal liberty and no freedom.

Did you know that the Global Biodiversity Assessment calls for human population to be reduced from 5.6 billion to 1 to 2 billion within the next decade? (reference GBA Section 9.2.3.2).

Read the Declaration Towards a Global Ethic and learn what it classifies as ‘authentically human.’ This is a UNEP (United Nations Environmental Program) prepared by Hans Kung.

Agenda-21-Is-Evil

More proof is clearly visible in the actions of the government. Allowing blatant criminality to thrive. Allowing, funding or creating terrorism, like on 9/11/01, or allowing illegal gun running like in Fast And Furious, ignoring terrorism, like in Benghazi, CIA drug smuggling and the pushing the world to swallow the global warming fraud to pay carbon taxes to the Rothschild’s bank are just a few examples of corruption and deception used as excuses to create bigger, more costly and authoritarian government.

The Founding Fathers were and rightfully so, very wary of the dangers of big government against the freedoms of the people. It is in GOD WE TRUST, not the government we trust.

If you think otherwise, you are probably living in the wrong country, or were mind controlled by the U.S Department of Education. Basically, the New World Order is a total transformation into a truly God less world.

A demoralization and destruction of the family and acceptance of the New Age ideology of Gaia religion. A one world, secular religion. This is why morality has declined.

MILEY LICKING METALThis is why mass media hypersexualization permeates Our culture.

Deviance, decadence and violence abound. The roots of this were fermented during the counter culture.

In essence, the civil rights movement and women’s liberation had severe blowback in the form of divorce, broken homes, poverty and American’s child replacement rate.

Muslims, Latinos and illegal aliens have more children than any other group in today’s America. In fact, Muslims worldwide have a 4-1 ratio replacement rate. By 2070 Islam will be the dominant religion, if we all haven’t killed one another by then.

The goal is depopulation which is slowly being attained through war, famine, pestilence and pharmacological and nutritional poisoning.

Anyone who doesn’t understand this proves my point of how we have been slowly brainwashed and transformed over the last 50 plus years. The political horse and pony show is a smoke screen, folks. As Josef Stalin said, “it doesn’t matter who votes, but who counts the votes.”

Benjamin Disraeli, Britain’s 1st prime minister adds even more clarity when he rightly noted in 1848 that:

“The world is governed by very different personages from what is imagined by those who are not behind the scenes.”

 

TRUTH TALK NEWS where news and HowardNema.com

Subscribe, follow and share the truth!

http://www.HowardNema.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNewsLIVE

‘One basic truth can be used as a foundation for a mountain of lies, and if we dig down deep enough in the mountain of lies, and bring out that truth, to set it on top of the mountain of lies; the entire mountain of lies will crumble under the weight of that one truth, and there is nothing more devastating to a structure of lies than the revelation of the truth upon which the structure of lies was built, because the shock waves of the revelation of the truth reverberate, and continue to reverberate throughout the Earth for generations to follow, awakening even those people who had no desire to be awakened to the truth.’

Delamer Duverus

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE. All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are free and independent of any network, group or association.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes

 

 

 

 

VERIFIABLE RESEARCH ON 9/11

Research Compiled by Paul Thompson

LINK TO ORIGINAL SOURCE INCLUDING LINKS ALL TO ALL MEDIA ARTICLES. To verify 9/11 research, click on links to original articles on mass media websites.

9/11 was one of the most pivotal days in world history. Its impact will be felt for years to come. You owe it to yourself to go beyond the sound bites and the simplified official story. This is an extremely complicated story with many players and motives. Not everything makes sense or fits neatly together. It’s a story full of espionage, deceit, and lies. But if there are forces out there tricking us, they can only succeed if we, the general public, remain ignorant and passive.

We are limiting our sources in this 9/11 research to those one might call “mainstream.” It’s not that one can only trust the mainstream media. In fact, much of the best reporting today is coming from alternative media. But many people are initially very skeptical. Some of the 9/11 research below may seem very hard to believe. Yet remember that each entry below is reported by respected major media sources and can easily be verified by clicking on the links provided to the original source.

A number of foreign media sources are used in this 9/11 research summary, especially since these stories have often received much more attention in Europe than in the US. But we’ve tried to use common sense. For instance, a story in a Pakistani newspaper that reflects poorly on Pakistan would be much less likely to be propaganda than the same story coming from an Indian newspaper. In a few cases we’ve used partisan sources to add more detail. Information or comments from partisan sources (including our own comments) is either italicized, or noted as such. After seeing the importance of what’s being hidden, you will very likely want to join in working together to build a brighter future.

Important Note: To skip directly to research for the day of 9/11, click here. And for any link not active on the 9/11 research summary, you can use the Internet archive to search for the original article. For instructions on how to do this, click here.

America’s top military leaders drafted plans to kill innocent people and commit acts of terrorism in US cities to trick the public into supporting a war against Cuba in the early 1960s. Approved in writing by the Pentagon Joint Chiefs, Operation Northwoods even proposed blowing up a US ship and hijacking planes as a false pretext for war. [ABC News, 5/1/01, Pentagon Documents]

1982-1991: Afghan opium production skyrockets from 250 tons in 1982 to 2,000 tons in 1991, coinciding with CIA support and funding of the mujaheddin. [Star Tribune, 9/30/01]

1984: Bin Laden moves to Peshawar, a Pakistani town bordering Afghanistan, and is running a front organization for the mujaheddin known as MAK, which funnels money, arms and fighters from the outside world into the Afghan war. [New Yorker, 1/24/00] “MAK was nurtured by Pakistan’s state security services, the Inter-Services Intelligence agency, or ISI, the CIA’s primary conduit for conducting the covert war against Moscow’s occupation.” [MSNBC, 8/24/98] He becomes closely tied to the warlord Gulbuddin Hekmatyar, and greatly strengthens Hekmatyar’s opium smuggling operations. [Le Monde, 9/14/01] Hekmatyar had ties with bin Laden, the CIA and drug running, and has also been called “an ISI stooge and creation” by the Wall Street Journal. [Atlantic, 5/96, Asia Times, 11/15/01]

Mid-1980’s: The ISI starts a special cell of agents who use profits from heroin production for covert actions “at the insistence of the CIA.” This cell promotes the cultivation of opium and extraction of heroin in Pakistani territory as well as in the Afghan territory under mujaheddin control for being smuggled into Soviet controlled areas, in order to turn the Soviet troops into heroin addicts. After the withdrawal of Soviet troops, the ISI’s heroin cell started using its network of refineries and smugglers for smuggling heroin to Western countries and using the money as a supplement to its legitimate economy. [Financial Times, Asian edition, 8/10/01] The ISI grows so powerful on this money, that Time magazine later states, “Even by the shadowy standards of spy agencies, the ISI is notorious. It is commonly branded ‘a state within the state,’ or Pakistan’s ‘invisible government.'” [Time, 5/6/02]

March 1985: The US decides to escalate the war in Afghanistan. The CIA, British MI6 and the ISI agree to launch guerrilla attacks from Afghanistan into then Soviet-controlled Tajikistan and Uzbekistan, attacking military installations, factories and storage depots within Soviet territory until the end of the war. The CIA also begins supporting the ISI in recruiting radical Muslims from around the world to come to Pakistan and fight with the Afghan mujaheddin. The CIA gives subversive literature and Korans to the ISI, who carry them into the Soviet Union. Eventually, around 35,000 Muslim radicals from 43 Islamic countries will fight with the Afghan mujaheddin. Tens of thousands more will study in the hundreds of new radical Islamic schools funded by the ISI and CIA in Pakistan. [Washington Post, 7/19/92, Pittsburgh Post-Gazette, 9/23/01, Honolulu Star-Bulletin, 9/23/01, The Hindu, 9/27/01, Taliban: Militant Islam, Oil and Fundamentalism in Central Asia, Ahmed Rashid, 3/01] In the late 1980’s, Pakistan’s Prime Minister Benazir Bhutto, feeling the mujaheddin network has grown too strong, tells President George Bush Sr., “You are creating a Frankenstein.” But the warning goes unheeded. [Newsweek, 10/1/01]

1991: Future National Security Advisor Rice joins Chevron’s board of directors, and works with Chevron until being picked as Bush’s National Security Advisor in 2001. Chevron even names an oil tanker after her. Rice is hired for her expertise in Central Asia, and much of her job is spent arranging oil deals in the Central Asian region. Chevron also has massive investments there. [Salon, 11/19/01]

March 1991: Although the Gulf War against Iraq just ended, the US does not withdraw all of its soldiers from Saudi Arabia, but stations some 15,000-20,000 there permanently. [Nation, 2/15/99] In 1991, President Bush Sr. falsely claims that all US troops have withdrawn. [Guardian, 12/21/01] Their presence isn’t admitted until 1995, and there has never been an official explanation as to why they are there. The Nation postulates that they are there to prevent a coup. Saudi Arabia has an incredible array of high-tech weaponry, but may lack the expertise to use it and local soldiers may have conflicting loyalties. In 1998, bin Laden will release a statement: “For more than seven years the United States has been occupying the lands of Islam in the holiest of places, the Arabian peninsula, plundering its riches, dictating to its rulers, humiliating its people, terrorizing its neighbors, and turning its bases in the peninsula into a spearhead through which to fight the neighboring Muslim peoples.” [Nation, 2/15/99]

July 5, 1991: The Bank of England shuts down the Bank of Credit and Commerce International (BCCI), the largest Muslim bank in the world. This bank based in Pakistan financed numerous Muslim terrorist organizations and laundered money generated by illicit drug trafficking and other illegal activities, including arms trafficking. Bin Laden and many other terrorists had accounts there. American and British governments knew about all this yet kept the bank open for years. The ISI had major connections to the bank. But, as later State Department reports indicate, Pakistan remains a major drug trafficking and money laundering center despite the bank’s closing. [Detroit News, 9/30/01] The Washington Post claims, “The CIA used BCCI to funnel millions of dollars to the fighters battling the Soviet occupation of Afghanistan.” A French intelligence report in 2001 will state, “The financial network of bin Laden, as well as his network of investments, is similar to the network put in place in the 1980s by BCCI for its fraudulent operations, often with the same people (former directors and cadres of the bank and its affiliates, arms merchants oil merchants, Saudi investors).” A senior US investigator will say US agencies were looking into these ties because “they just make so much sense, and so few people from BCCI ever went to jail.” [Washington Post, 2/17/02]

1993 (A): Canadian police arrest Ali Mohamed, a high-ranking al-Qaeda figure. However, they release him when the FBI says he is a US agent. [Globe and Mail, 11/22/01] Mohamed, a former US Army sergeant, then will continue to work for al-Qaeda for a number of years. He trains bin Laden’s personal bodyguards and trains a terrorist cell in Kenya that later blows up the US embassy there. Meanwhile, at least between 1993 and 1997 he tells secrets to the FBI about al-Qaeda’s operations. He is arrested in late 1998 and subsequently convicted of his role in the 1998 US embassy bombing in Kenya. [CNN, 10/30/98, Independent, 11/1/98] Says a former Egyptian intelligence officer: “For five years he was moving back and forth between the US and Afghanistan. It’s impossible the CIA thought he was going there as a tourist. If the CIA hadn’t caught on to him, it should be dissolved and its budget used for something worthwhile.” [Wall Street Journal, 11/26/01]

1993 (B): One of bin Laden’s men buys a jet from the US military–and it was the Pentagon which unwittingly gave permission for the aircraft to leave the base. This aircraft is later used to transport missiles from Pakistan that kill US special forces in Somalia. Bin Laden also has some of his followers begin training as pilots in US flight schools. [Sunday Herald, 9/16/01]

1993 (C): An expert panel commissioned by the Pentagon postulates that an airplane could be used as a missile to bomb national landmarks. But the panel decides not to publish this idea in their report, Terror 2000, partly in fear of inspiring terrorists. However, in 1994 one of the panel’s experts will write in Futurist magazine: “Targets such as the World Trade Center not only provide the requisite casualties but, because of their symbolic nature, provide more bang for the buck. In order to maximize their odds for success, terrorist groups will likely consider mounting multiple, simultaneous operations with the aim of overtaxing a government’s ability to respond.” [Washington Post, 10/2/01]

February 26, 1993: An attempt to blow up the WTC fails. Six people are killed in the misfired blast. Analysts later determine that had the terrorists not made a minor error in the placement of the bomb, both towers could have fallen and up to 50,000 people could have been killed. The attempt is organized by Ramzi Yousef, who has close ties to bin Laden. [Congressional Hearings, 2/24/98] The New York Times later reports on Emad Salem, an undercover agent who ends up being the key government witness in the trial against the bomber. Salem testifies that the FBI knew about the attack beforehand and told him they would thwart it by substituting a harmless powder for the explosives. However, this plan was called off by an FBI supervisor, and the bombing was not stopped. [New York Times, 10/28/93] Why did the FBI seemingly let the terrorists go ahead with the bombing? Several of the bombers were trained by the CIA to fight in the Afghan war – the CIA later concludes in internal documents that it was “partly culpable” for this bombing attempt. [Independent, 11/1/98] One of the attackers left a message found by investigators stating, “Next time, it will be very precise.” 9/11 can be seen as a completion of this failed attack. [AP, 9/30/01]

1994 (A): Mohammed al-Khilewi, the First Secretary at the Saudi Mission to the United Nations, defects and seeks political asylum in the US. He brings with him 14,000 internal government documents depicting the Saudi royal family’s corruption, human-rights abuses, and financial support for terrorists. He meets with two FBI agents and an Assistant US Attorney. “We gave them a sampling of the documents and put them on the table,” says his lawyer, “but the agents refused to accept them.” [New Yorker, 10/16/01]

1994 (B): Coincidentally, three separate attacks this year involve hijacking airplanes to crash them into buildings. A disgruntled Federal Express worker tries to crash a DC-10 into a company building in Memphis but is overpowered by the crew. A lone pilot crashes a small plane onto the White House grounds, just missing the President’s bedroom. An Air France flight is hijacked by a terrorist group linked to al-Qaeda, with the aim of crashing it into the Eiffel Tower, but French Special Forces storm the plane before it takes off. [New York Times, 10/3/01]

September 1994: Starting as Afghani exiles in Pakistan religious schools, the Taliban begin their conquest of Afghanistan. [MSNBC, 10/2/01] “The Taliban are widely alleged to be the creation of Pakistan’s military intelligence [the ISI]. Experts say that explains the Taliban’s swift military successes.” [CNN, 10/5/96] Less often reported is that the CIA worked with the ISI to create the Taliban. A long-time regional expert with extensive CIA ties says: “I warned them that we were creating a monster.” He adds that even years later, “The Taliban are not just recruits from ‘madrassas’ (Muslim theological schools) but are on the payroll of the ISI.” [Times of India, 3/7/01] The same claim is made on CNN in February 2002. [CNN, 2/27/02] The Wall Street Journal will state in November 2001: “Despite their clean chins and pressed uniforms, the ISI men are as deeply fundamentalist as any bearded fanatic; the ISI created the Taliban as their own instrument and still supports it.” [Asia Times, 11/15/01]

1995: For the first time, though not the last, the government of Sudan offers the US all of its files on bin Laden and al-Qaeda. The US turns down the offer. Bin Laden had been living in Sudan since 1991, because there were no visa requirements to live there. Sudan was surveilling him, collecting a “vast intelligence database on Osama bin Laden and more than 200 leading members of his al-Qaeda terrorist network… [The US was] offered thick files, with photographs and detailed biographies of many of his principal cadres, and vital information about al-Qaeda’s financial interests in many parts of the globe.” [Guardian, 9/30/01]

January 6, 1995: One pilot, Abdul Hakim Murad, who learned to fly in US flight schools, confesses that his role was to crash a plane into the CIA headquarters as part of this phase of attacks. [Washington Post, 9/23/01, CNN, 9/18/01]

April 3, 1995: Time magazine’s cover story reports on the potential for terrorists to kill thousands in highly destructive acts. Senator Sam Nunn outlines a scenario in which terrorists destroy the US Capitol Building by crashing a radio-controlled airplane into it. [Time, 4/3/95] High-ranking al-Qaeda leaders later claim that Flight 93’s target was the Capitol Building. [Guardian, 9/9/02]

October 21, 1995: The oil company Unocal signs a contract with Turkmenistan to export $8 billion worth of natural gas through a $3 billion pipeline which would go from Turkmenistan through Afghanistan to Pakistan. Political considerations and pressures allow Unocal to edge out a more experienced Argentinean company for the contract. Henry Kissinger, a Unocal consultant, calls it “the triumph of hope over experience.” [Washington Post, 10/5/98]

1996 (A): FBI investigators are prevented from carrying out an investigation into two relatives of bin Laden. The FBI wanted to learn more about Abdullah bin Laden, “because of his relationship with the World Assembly of Muslim Youth [WAMY] – a suspected terrorist organization.” Abdullah was the US director of WAMY and lived with his brother Omar in Falls Church, Virginia, a town just outside Washington. WAMY has its offices at 5613 Leesburg Pike. Remarkably, it is later determined that four of the 9/11 hijackers lived at 5913 Leesburg Pike at the same time the two bin Laden brothers were there. A high-placed intelligence official tells the Guardian: “there were always constraints on investigating the Saudis. There were particular investigations that were effectively killed.” An unnamed US source says to the BBC, “There is a hidden agenda at the very highest levels of our government.” [BBC Newsnight, 11/6/01, Guardian, 11/7/01]

1996 (B): An Israeli think tank publishes a paper entitled “A Clean Break: A New Strategy for Securing the Realm.” The paper isn’t much different from other Israeli right-wing papers at the time, except the authors: the lead writer is Richard Perle, now chairman of the Defense Policy Board in the US, and very influential with President Bush. Several of the other authors now hold key positions in Washington. The paper advises the new, right-wing Israeli leader Binyamin Netanyahu to make a complete break with the past by adopting a strategy “to engage every possible energy on rebuilding Zionism …” The first step would be the removal of Saddam Hussein in Iraq. A war with Iraq would destabilize the entire Middle East, allowing governments in Syria, Iran, Lebanon and other countries to be replaced. “Israel will not only contain its foes; it will transcend them,” the paper concludes. [Guardian, 9/3/02, see the original paper here]

1996 (C): The Saudi Arabian government starts paying huge amounts of money to al-Qaeda, becoming its largest financial backer. They also give money to other extremist groups throughout Asia. This money vastly increases the capability of al-Qaeda. [New Yorker, 10/22/01] A legal team involved in a 9/11 lawsuit later claims they have a transcript made by French intelligence of a meeting of Saudi princes and business leaders in Paris this year in which the Saudis agree to continue sponsoring bin Laden’s network. There is a similar follow up meeting two years later. [Minneapolis Star Tribune, 8/16/02] Says one US official, “’96 is the key year… Bin Laden hooked up to all the bad guys – it’s like the Grand Alliance – and had a capability for conducting large-scale operations.” The Saudi regime, he says, had “gone to the dark side.” Electronic intercepts by the NSA “depict a regime increasingly corrupt, alienated from the country’s religious rank and file, and so weakened and frightened that it has brokered its future by channeling hundreds of millions of dollars in what amounts to protection money to fundamentalist groups that wish to overthrow it.” US officials later privately complain “that the Bush Administration, like the Clinton Administration, is refusing to confront this reality, even in the aftermath of the September 11th terrorist attacks.” [New Yorker, 10/22/01]

1996 (D): The CIA’s Counter-Terrorism Center creates a special unit to focus specifically on bin Laden. About 10-15 individuals are assigned to the unit initially. This grows to about 35-40 by 9/11. [Newsweek, 10/1/01, Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02]

1996-2000: The CIA officer in charge of running operations against Al Qaeda from Washington writes, “I speak with firsthand experience (and for several score of CIA officers) when I state categorically that during this time senior White House officials repeatedly refused to act on sound intelligence that provided multiple chances to eliminate Osama bin Laden.” [Los Angeles Times, 12/5/04] In late 1998, President Clinton signs a directive authorizing the CIA to plan an assassination of bin Laden. The CIA draws up detailed profiles of bin Laden’s daily routines, where he sleeps, and his travel arrangements. The assassination never happens, supposedly because of inadequate intelligence. An officer who helped draw up the plans says, “We were ready to move” but “we were not allowed to do it because of this stubborn policy of risk avoidance… It is a disgrace.” [Philadelphia Inquirer, 9/16/01] From 1998 to 2000, the US permanently stations two submarines in the Indian Ocean to hit al-Qaeda with cruise missiles on short notice. Six to ten hours advance warning is needed to review the decision, program the cruise missiles and have them reach their target. On at least three occasions, spies in Afghanistan report bin Laden’s location with information suggesting he would remain there for some time. Each time, Clinton approves the strike. Each time, CIA Director Tenet says the information is not reliable enough, and the attack cannot go forward. [New York Times, 12/30/01]

1996-2001: Federal authorities are aware for years before 9/11 that suspected terrorists with ties to Osama bin Laden are receiving flight training at schools in the US and abroad. In 1996, FBI agents visit two flight school operators to obtain information about several Arab pilots who are eventually convicted of plotting to bomb U.S. airliners. In 1998, FBI agents question officials from Airman Flight School in Norman, Okla., about a graduate later identified in court testimony as a pilot for bin Laden. One convicted terrorist even confesses that his planned role in a terror attack was to crash a plane into CIA headquarters. Three days after 9/11, FBI Director Mueller describes reports that several of the hijackers had received flight training in the US as news. A senior government official later acknowledges that law enforcement officials were aware that up to a dozen people with links to bin Laden had attended U.S. flight schools. [Washington Post, 9/23/01, CBS, 5/30/02, Time, 6/10/02]

March 1996: The US pressures Sudan to do something about bin Laden, who is based in that country. Sudan readily agrees, not wanting to be labeled a terrorist nation. Sudan’s Minister of Defense engages in secret negotiations with the CIA in Washington. Sudan offers to extradite bin Laden to anywhere he might stand trial. US officials turn down the offer, but insist that bin Laden leave the country for anywhere but Somalia. [Village Voice, 10/31/01, Washington Post, 10/3/01] Bin Laden leaves under pressure two months later. CIA Director Tenet later denies Sudan made any offers to hand over bin Laden. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02]

April 1996: In continuing negotiations between the US and Sudan, the US again rejects Sudan’s offer to turn over voluminous files about bin Laden and al-Qaeda (See also 1995 and May 2000). Another American involved in the secret negotiations later says that the US could have used Sudan’s offer to keep an eye on bin Laden, but that the efforts were blocked by another arm of the federal government. “I’ve never seen a brick wall like that before. Somebody let this slip up,” he says. “We could have dismantled his operations and put a cage on top. That’s the story, and that’s what could have prevented September 11. I knew it would come back to haunt us.” [Village Voice, 10/31/01, Washington Post, 10/3/01] Around this time Sudan also offers their al-Qaeda intelligence to MI6, the British intelligence agency, and are also rebuffed. A Sudanese government source later adds, “We have been saying this for years.” The offer is not taken up until after 9/11. [Guardian, 9/30/01]

May 18, 1996: Sudan expels bin Laden at the request of the US and Saudi Arabia. Bin Laden and al-Qaeda then move to Afghanistan, taking all of their money, resources and personnel. Bin Laden flies there in a C-130 transport plane with an entourage of about 150 men, women and children. [Los Angeles Times, 9/1/02] The US knows in advance that bin Laden is going to Afghanistan, but does nothing to stop him. Elfatih Erwa, Sudan’s minister of state for defense at the time, later says in an interview: “We warned [the US]. In Sudan, bin Laden and his money were under our control. But we knew that if he went to Afghanistan, no one could control him. The US didn’t care. It’s crazy.” [Village Voice, 10/31/01, Washington Post, 10/3/01]

June 25, 1996: Explosions destroy the Khobar Towers in Dhahran, Saudi Arabia, killing 19 American soldiers and wounding 500. [CNN, 6/26/96] Bin Laden admitted instigating the attacks in a 1998 interview. [Miami Herald, 9/24/01] Ironically, the bin Laden family is later awarded the contract to rebuild the installation. [New Yorker, 11/5/01]

July 6-August 11, 1996: US officials identify crop-dusters and suicide flights as potential terrorist weapons that could threaten the Olympic Games in Atlanta, Georgia. They take steps to prevent any air attacks. Planes are banned from getting too close to Olympic events. [Chicago Tribune, 11/18/01]

August 13, 1996: Unocal and Delta Oil of Saudi Arabia come to agreement with state companies in Turkmenistan and Russia to build a natural gas pipeline from Turkmenistan to Pakistan via Afghanistan, the agreement is finalized the next year. [Unocal website, 8/13/96] The Boston Herald later reports that, “The prime force behind Delta Oil appears to be Mohammed Hussein al-Amoudi” and that his business interests are “enmeshed” with those of Khalid bin Mahfouz. [Boston Herald, 12/10/01] The two are later included in a secret United Nations list of financiers funding al-Qaeda. [Los Angeles Times, 12/24/02, UN report, 12/19/02 or here]

September 27, 1996: The Taliban conquer Kabul [AP, 8/19/02], establishing control over much of Afghanistan. A surge in military success of the Taliban at this time is later attributed to an increase in direct military assistance from Pakistan’s ISI. [New York Times, 12/8/01] The oil company Unocal is hopeful that the Taliban will stabilize Afghanistan, and allow its pipeline plans to go forward. In fact, “preliminary agreement [on the pipeline] was reached between the [Taliban and Unocal] long before the fall of Kabul.” [Telegraph, 10/11/96]

1997: Former National Security Advisor Zbigniew Brzezinski publishes a book in which he portrays the Eurasian landmass as the key to world power, and Central Asia with its vast oil reserves as the key to domination of Eurasia. He states that for the US to maintain its global primacy, it must prevent any possible adversary from controlling that region. He notes that because of popular resistance to US military expansionism, his ambitious strategy could not be implemented “except in the circumstance of a truly massive and widely perceived direct external threat.” [The Grand Chessboard: American Primacy and its Geostrategic Imperatives]

December 1997: CIA agent Robert Baer, newly retired from the CIA and working as a terrorism consultant, meets a former police chief from the Persian Gulf nation of Qatar. He learns how 9/11 mastermind Khalid Shaikh Mohammed was sheltered from the FBI by the Qatari government. He passes this information to the CIA in early 1998. The ex-police chief also tells him that Mohammed is a key aide to bin Laden, and that based on Qatari intelligence, Mohammed “is going to hijack some planes.” He passes this information to the CIA as well, but again the CIA doesn’t seem interested, even when he tries again after 9/11. [UPI, 9/30/02, Vanity Fair, 2/02, See No Evil: The True Story of a Ground Soldier in the CIA’s War on Terrorism, Robert Baer, 2/02, pp. 270-271]

December 4, 1997: Representatives of the Taliban are invited guests to the Texas headquarters of Unocal to negotiate their support for the pipeline. Future President Bush Jr. is Governor of Texas at the time. The Taliban appear to agree to a $2 billion pipeline deal, but will do the deal only if the US officially recognizes the Taliban regime. The Taliban meet with US officials, and the Telegraph reports that “the US government, which in the past has branded the Taliban’s policies against women and children ‘despicable,’ appears anxious to please the fundamentalists to clinch the lucrative pipeline contract.” [BBC, 12/4/97, Telegraph, 12/14/97]

1998 (A): A military report describes a program called “Joint Vision 2010.” The article mentions that the military is working on a “variety of new imaging and signals intelligence sensors deployed aboard the Global Hawk, DarkStar, and Predator unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs)…” [Department of Defense Annual Report, 1998] Global Hawk is a technology that enables pilotless flight and has been functioning since at least early 1997. [Department of Defense, 2/20/97]

1998 (B): An American Muslim named Aukai Collins later says he was an FBI informant between 1996 and 1999, informing on the Muslim community in Phoenix, Arizona. For six months in 1998, he is a casual acquaintance of hijacker Hani Hanjour while Hanjour is taking flying lessons. [AP, 5/24/02] Collins sees nothing suspicious about Hanjour as an individual, but he tells the FBI about him because Hanjour appears to be part of a larger, organized group of Arabs taking flying lessons. [Fox News, 5/24/02] He says the FBI “knew everything about the guy,” including his exact address, phone number and even what car he drove. The FBI denies Collins told them anything about Hanjour, and denies knowing about Hanjour before 9/11, though they acknowledge that they paid Collins to monitor the Islamic and Arab communities in Phoenix. [ABC News, 5/23/02]

1998: (C) The FBI office in Oklahoma City sends a memo warning that “large numbers of Middle Eastern males” are getting flight training in Oklahoma and could be planning terrorist attacks. [Time, 6/10/02, CBS, 5/30/02, AP, 9/26/01, CNN, 9/18/01]

February 12, 1998: Unocal Vice President John J. Maresca – later to become a Special Ambassador to Afghanistan – testifies before the House of Representatives that until a single, unified, friendly government is in place in Afghanistan the trans-Afghani pipeline will not be built. He suggests that with a pipeline through Afghanistan, the Caspian basin could produce 20 percent of all the non-OPEC oil in the world by 2010. [House International Relations Committee testimony, 2/12/98]

Early 1998: Bill Richardson, the US Ambassador to the UN, meets Taliban officials in Kabul (all such meetings are technically illegal, because the US still officially recognizes the government the Taliban ousted as the legitimate rulers of Afghanistan). US officials at the time call the pipeline project a “fabulous opportunity” and are especially motivated by the “prospect of circumventing Iran, which offered another route for the pipeline.” [Boston Globe, 9/20/01]

June 1998: US intelligence obtains information from several sources that bin Laden is considering attacks in the US, including Washington and New York. This information is given to senior US officials in July 1998. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02]

August 1998 (A): A CIA intelligence report asserts that Arab terrorists are planning to fly a bomb-laden aircraft from a foreign country into the WTC. The FBI and the FAA don’t take the threat seriously because of the state of aviation in that unnamed country. Later, other intelligence information connects this group to al-Qaeda. [New York Times, 9/19/02, Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02] An FBI spokesman says the report “was not ignored, it was thoroughly investigated by numerous agencies” and found to be unrelated to al-Qaeda. [Washington Post, 9/19/02]

August 1998 (B): Within minutes of each other, truck bombs blow up the US embassies in Tanzania and Kenya, killing more than 220. For some of the time that bin Laden’s men were plotting to blow up the two embassies, US intelligence was tapping their phones. [Newsweek, 10/1/01]

August 9, 1998: The Northern Alliance capital of Afghanistan, Mazar-i-Sharif, is conquered by the Taliban. Military support of Pakistan’s ISI plays a large role; there is even an intercept of an ISI officer stating, “My boys and I are riding into Mazar-i-Sharif.” [New York Times, 12/8/01] This victory gives the Taliban control of 90% of Afghanistan, including the entire pipeline route. CentGas, the consortium behind the gas pipeline that would run through Afghanistan, is now “ready to proceed. Its main partners are the American oil firm Unocal and Delta Oil of Saudi Arabia, plus Hyundai of South Korea, two Japanese companies, a Pakistani conglomerate and the Turkmen government.” [Telegraph, 8/13/98]

September 1998: US intelligence finds information that bin Laden’s next operation could possibly involve crashing an aircraft loaded with explosives into a US airport. This information is provided to senior US officials. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02, Washington Post, 9/19/02]

October 1998: FBI agents Robert Wright and John Vincent are tracking a terrorist cell in Chicago, but are told to simply follow suspects around town and file reports. The two agents believe some of the money used to finance the 1998 US embassy bombings leads back to Chicago and Saudi multimillionaire businessman Yassin al-Qadi. Supervisors try, but temporarily fail, to halt the investigation into al-Qadi’s possible terrorist connections. However, at this time, a supervisor prohibits Wright and Vincent from making any arrests connected to the bombings, or opening new criminal investigations. Even though they believe their case is growing stronger, in January 2001 Wright is told that the Chicago case is being closed and that “it’s just better to let sleeping dogs lie.” Wright tells ABC: “Those dogs weren’t sleeping, they were training, they were getting ready. … September the 11th is a direct result of the incompetence of the FBI’s International Terrorism Unit. … Absolutely no doubt about that.” Chicago federal prosecutor Mark Flessner, also working on the case, says there “were powers bigger than I was in the Justice Department and within the FBI that simply were not going to let [the building of a criminal case] happen [ABC, 11/26/02, ABC, 12/19/02, ABC, 12/19/02]

Autumn 1998: US intelligence hears of a bin Laden plot involving aircraft in the New York and Washington areas. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02, New York Times, 9/18/02]

November 4, 1998: The US charges bin Laden with the US embassy bombings in Kenya and Tanzania, and announces a record $5 million reward for information leading to his arrest. [PBS Frontline, 2001]

December 4, 1998: CIA Director Tenet issues a “declaration of war” on al-Qaeda, in a memorandum circulated in the intelligence community. Tenet says, “We are at war… I want no resources or people spared in this effort, either inside CIA or the [larger intelligence] community.” Yet a Congressional joint committee later finds that few FBI agents had ever heard of the declaration. There is no massive shift in budget or personnel until after 9/11. The number of CTC (Counter-Terrorism Center) analysts focusing on al-Qaeda rises from three in 1999 to five by 9/11. [New York Times, 9/18/02, Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02]

December 5, 1998: In the wake of the al-Qaeda US embassy attacks, the US gives up on putting a pipeline through Afghanistan. Unocal announces it is withdrawing from the CentGas pipeline consortium, and closing three of its four offices in Central Asia. [New York Times, 12/5/98]

December 21, 1998: In a Time magazine cover story entitled “The Hunt for Osama,” it is reported intelligence sources have evidence that bin Laden may be planning his boldest move yet – a strike on Washington or possibly New York City in an eye-for-an-eye retaliation. [Time, 12/21/98]

1999 (A): MI6, the British intelligence agency, gives a secret report to liaison staff at the US embassy in London. The reports states that al-Qaeda has plans to use “commercial aircraft” in “unconventional ways”, “possibly as flying bombs.” [Sunday Times, 6/9/02]

1999 (B): Secretary of State Madeleine Albright repeatedly asks about having a “boots on the ground” option to kill bin Laden, using the elite Delta Force. Joint Chiefs of Staff head Shelton says he wants “nothing to do” with such an idea. He calls it naive, and ridicules it as “going Hollywood.” [Washington Post, 12/19/01]

April 1999: A Saudi government audit shows that five of Saudi Arabia’s billionaires have been giving tens of millions of dollars to al-Qaeda. The audit shows that these businessmen transferred money from the National Commercial Bank to accounts of Islamic charities in London and New York banks that serve as fronts for bin Laden. [USA Today, 10/29/99] $2 billion of the bank’s $21 billion is also found to be missing. The only action taken is that the founder of National Commercial Bank, Saudi Arabia’s biggest bank, is placed under house arrest and majority control in the bank is bought out by the Saudi government. [Ottawa Citizen, 9/29/01]

July 4, 1999: With the chances of a pipeline deal with the Taliban looking increasingly unlikely, the US government finally issues an executive order prohibiting commercial transactions with the Taliban. [Executive Order, 7/4/99]

July 14, 1999: US government informant Randy Glass records a conversation between some illegal arms dealers and ISI agents, held at a restaurant within view of the WTC. An ISI agent points to the WTC and says, “Those towers are coming down.” Glass passes these warnings on, but he claims “The complaints were ordered sanitized by the highest levels of government.” [WPBF Channel 25, 8/5/02, New York Observer, 10/1/01, Palm Beach Post, 10/17/02]

September 1999: A report prepared for US intelligence entitled the “Sociology and Psychology of Terrorism” is completed. It states: “Al-Qaeda’s expected retaliation for the US cruise missile attack … could take several forms of terrorist attack in the nation’s capital. Al-Qaeda could detonate a Chechen-type building-buster bomb at a federal building. Suicide bomber(s) belonging to al-Qaeda’s Martyrdom Battalion could crash-land an aircraft packed with high explosives (C-4 and Semtex) into the Pentagon, the headquarters of the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), or the White House.” The report is by the National Intelligence Council, which advises the President and US intelligence on emerging threats. [AP, 5/18/02, read the complete report on-line] The Bush administration later claims to never have heard of this report until May 2002, despite the fact that it had been publicly posted on the internet since 1999, and “widely shared within the government.” [CNN, 5/18/02, New York Times, 5/18/02]

October 1999: The CIA readies an operation to capture or kill bin Laden, secretly training and equipping approximately 60 commandos from the ISI. Pakistan supposedly agrees to this plan in return for the lifting of economic sanctions and more economic aid. The plan is ready to go by October, but it is aborted because on October 12, General Musharraf takes control of Pakistan in a coup. Musharraf refuses to continue the operation despite the promise of substantial rewards. [Washington Post, 10/3/01]

November 1999: Hijackers Nawaf Alhazmi and Khalid Almihdhar enter the US for the first time. They are met at the Los Angeles International Airport by a Saudi man named Omar al-Bayoumi. Al-Bayoumi drives them to San Diego, arranges for them to live in an apartment a few doors away in the same apartment building, guarantees the lease and pays $1,550 in cash to cover the first two months rent. He also helps them open a bank account, obtain car insurance, get Social Security cards and call flight schools in Florida. [Newsweek, 11/24/02, Washington Post, 12/29/01, Sunday Mercury, 10/21/01] Al-Bayoumi is arrested after 9/11, but released after one week. Some FBI officials later suggest that al-Bayoumi was an al-Qaeda agent. The possibility that the Saudi government may have funded him creates headlines in November 2002. [Washington Post, 10/01]

November 3, 1999: The head of Australia’s security services admits that the Echelon global surveillance system exists; the US still denies its existence. The BBC describes Echelon’s power as “astounding,” and elaborates: “Every international telephone call, fax, e-mail, or radio transmission can be listened to by powerful computers capable of voice recognition. They home in on a long list of key words, or patterns of messages. They are looking for evidence of international crime, like terrorism.” [BBC, 11/3/99]

2000: At some point during this year, an FBI internal memo states that a Middle Eastern nation has been trying to purchase a flight simulator in violation of US restrictions. The FBI refuses to disclose the date or details. [Los Angeles Times, 5/30/02]

January 2000 (A): Former President George Bush Sr. meets with the bin Laden family on behalf of the Carlyle Group. He also met with them in 1998. Bush’s chief of staff could not remember that this meeting took place until shown a thank you note confirming the meeting. [Wall Street Journal, 9/27/01, Guardian, 10/31/01]

January 2000 (B): A DEA government document later leaked to the press [DEA report, 6/01] suggests that a large Israeli spy ring starts penetrating the US from at least this time, if not earlier. This ring, which will later become popularly known as the “art student spy ring,” is later shown to have strange connections to the events of 9/11. [Insight, 3/11/02]

January-May 2000: Lead 9/11 hijacker Mohamed Atta is put under surveillance by the CIA while living in Germany. [AFP, 9/22/01, Berliner Zeitung, 9/24/01] He is “reportedly observed buying large quantities of chemicals in Frankfurt, apparently for the production of explosives [and/or] for biological warfare. The US agents reported to have trailed Atta are said to have failed to inform the German authorities about their investigation,” even as the Germans are investigating many of his associates. “The disclosure that Atta was being trailed by police long before 11 September raises the question why the attacks could not have been prevented with the man’s arrest.” [Observer, 9/30/01] A German newspaper adds that Atta was still able to get a visa into the US on May 18. “Experts believe that the suspect remained under surveillance in the United States.” [Berliner Zeitung, 9/24/01] This correlates with a Newsweek claim that US officials knew Atta was a “known [associate] of Islamic terrorists well before [9/11].” [Newsweek, 9/20/01] However, a Congressional inquiry later reports that the US “intelligence community possessed no intelligence information linking 16 of the 19 hijackers [including Atta] to terrorism or terrorist groups.” [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02]

January 5-8, 2000: About a dozen of bin Laden’s trusted followers hold a secret, “top-level al-Qaeda summit” in the city of Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. [CNN, 8/30/02, San Diego Union-Tribune, 9/27/02] Plans for the October 2000 bombing of the USS Cole and the 9/11 attacks are discussed. [USA Today, 2/12/02, CNN, 8/30/02] At the request of the CIA, the Malaysian secret service follows, photographs, and even videotapes these men, and then passes the information on to the US. However, the meeting is not wiretapped. [Newsweek, 6/2/02, Ottawa Citizen, 9/17/01, Observer, 10/7/01, CNN, 3/14/02, New Yorker, 1/14/02]

January 15, 2000: Shortly after the al-Qaeda meeting in Malaysia, hijackers Nawaf Alhazmi and Khalid Almihdhar fly from Bangkok, Thailand, to Los Angeles, California. [MSNBC, 12/11/01] The CIA tracks Alhazmi, but apparently doesn’t realize Almihdhar is also on the plane. The US keeps a watch list database known as TIPOFF, with over 80,000 names of suspected terrorists as of late 2002. [Los Angeles Times, 9/22/02] The list is checked whenever someone enters or leaves the US. “The threshold for adding a name to TIPOFF is low,” and even a “reasonable suspicion” that a person is connected with a terrorist group, warrants being added to the database. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02] Almihdhar and Alhazmi are important enough to have been mentioned to the CIA Director several times this month, but are not added to the watch list. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02] Furthermore, “astonishingly, the CIA … [didn’t] notify the FBI, which could have covertly tracked them to find out their mission.” [Newsweek, 6/2/02]

February 23, 2000: European Parliament hearings over Echelon, the global surveillance network, draw banner headlines across Europe. A report prepared for the European Parliament not only confirms that Echelon exists, but has found that Echelon had twice helped US companies gain an advantage over Europeans. The EU sets up a commission to determine if action should be taken against Britain for security breaches. [New York Times, 2/24/00] The US continues to deny the very existence of Echelon. But it exists, as Echelon partners Britain and Australia now admit. [BBC, 5/29/01]

March 2000: An FBI agent, reportedly angry over a glitch in an e-mail tracking program that has somehow mixed innocent non-targeted e-mails with those belonging to al-Qaeda, supposedly accidentally destroys all of the FBI’s Denver-based intercepts of bin Laden’s colleagues in a terrorist investigation. The tracking program is called Carnivore. But the story sounds dubious, and is flatly contradicted in the same article: “A Justice Department official, speaking on condition of anonymity, said Tuesday night that the e-mails were not destroyed.” [AP, 5/28/02]

March 5, 2000: An unnamed nation tells the CIA that hijacker Nawaf Alhazmi had flown from the January meeting in Malaysia to Los Angeles. [New York Times, 10/17/02] This confirms what the CIA already knows. [CNN, 3/02] The CIA also learns that hijacker Khalid Almihdhar arrived in the US on the same flight. [Michael Rolince Testimony, 9/20/02] Yet again, CIA fails to put their names on a watch list, and fails to alert the FBI so they can be tracked. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02] CIA Director Tenet later claims that “Nobody read that cable in the March timeframe.” [New York Times, 10/17/02] Yet the Congressional inquiry report states that the day after the cable was received, “another overseas CIA station noted, in a cable to the bin Laden unit at CIA headquarters, that it had ‘read with interest’ the March cable, ‘particularly the information that a member of this group traveled to the US…'” [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02]

Spring 2000: Sources who know bin Laden later claim that bin Laden’s mother has a second meeting with her son Osama in Afghanistan. The trip is approved by the Saudi royal family. The Saudis pass the message to him that “‘they wouldn’t crack down on his followers in Saudi Arabia as long as he set his sights on targets outside the desert kingdom.” In late 1999, the Saudi government had told the CIA about the upcoming trip, and suggested placing a homing beacon on her luggage. This doesn’t happen – Saudis later claim they weren’t taken seriously, and Americans claim they never received specific information on her travel plans. [New Yorker, 11/5/01, Washington Post, 12/19/01]

April 2000: Spruce Whited, director of security for the Portland Public Library, later says Atta and possibly a second hijacker are regulars at the library and frequently use public Internet terminals at this time. He says four other employees recognize Atta as a library patron. “I remember seeing (Atta) in the spring of 2000,” he says. Whited also says federal authorities have not inquired about the library sightings. [Boston Herald, 10/5/01, Portland Press Herald, 10/5/01] According to the official story, Atta doesn’t arrive in the US until June 3, 2000. [Miami Herald, 9/22/01, Australian Broadcasting Corp. 11/12/01] Why does the FBI appear uninterested in these early sightings of Atta?

May 2000: The CIA and FBI send a joint investigative team to Sudan to investigate if that country is a sponsor of terrorism. Sudan offers again to hand over their voluminous files on al-Qaeda, and the offer is again turned down. [Guardian, 9/30/01]

January-June 2000: Pakistani ISI Director General Ahmad orders an aide to wire transfer about $100,000 to hijacker Atta. [Dawn, 10/8/01, Times of India, 10/9/01, Wall Street Journal, 10/10/01, AFP, 10/10/01] The individual who makes the wire transfer at Ahmad’s direction is Saeed Sheikh, later convicted for kidnapping and murdering reporter Daniel Pearl in February 2002. ABC News later reports, “federal authorities have told ABC News they’ve now tracked more than $100,000 from banks in Pakistan to two banks in Florida to accounts held by suspected hijack ringleader Mohamed Atta.” [ABC News, 9/30/01]

July 2000: The Taliban ban poppy growing in Afghanistan. As a result, the opium yield drops dramatically in 2001, from 3,656 tons to 185 tons. [Guardian, 2/21/02, Reuters, 3/3/02, Observer, 11/25/01]

Summer 2000: A secret military operation named Able Danger identifies four future 9/11 hijackers, including lead hijacker Mohamed Atta, as a potential threat and members of Al Qaeda. Yet none of this is mentioned later in the 9/11 Commissions’ final report .When questioned, the 9/11 commission’s chief spokesman initially says that staff members briefed about Able Danger did not remember hearing anything about Atta. Days later, however, after provided detailed information, he says the uniformed officer who briefed two staff members had indeed mentioned Atta. Officials say that the information was not included in the report because the account had sounded inconsistent with what the commission knew about Atta. [New York Times, 8/11/05]

August-September 2000: An unmanned spy plane called the Predator begins flying over Afghanistan, showing incomparably detailed real-time video and photographs of the movements of what appeared to be bin Laden and his aides. Clinton is impressed by a two-minute video of bin Laden crossing a street heading towards a mosque. Bin Laden is surrounded by a team of a dozen armed men creating a professional forward security perimeter as he moves. The Predator had been used since 1996 in the Balkans, but its use is stopped in Afghanistan after a few trials when a Predator crashes. The White House presses ahead with a program to arm the Predator with a missile, but the effort is slowed by bureaucratic infighting between the Pentagon and the CIA over who would pay for the craft, and who would have ultimate authority over its use. [New York Times, 12/30/01, Washington Post, 12/19/01]

September 2000: A neo-conservative think-tank, Project for the New American Century (PNAC), writes a blueprint for the creation of a global “Pax Americana.” Titled Rebuilding America’s Defenses: Strategy, Forces and Resources For a New Century, the document was written for the Bush team even before the 2000 Presidential election. It was commissioned by future Vice President Cheney, future Defense Secretary Rumsfeld, future Deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, Florida Governor and President Bush’s brother Jeb Bush, and future Vice President Cheney’s Chief of Staff Lewis Libby. The report calls itself a blueprint for maintaining global US preeminence, precluding the rise of a great power rival, and shaping the international security order in line with American principles and interests. The plan shows Bush intended to take military control of the Persian Gulf whether or not Saddam Hussein was in power, and should retain control of the region even if there is no threat. The report calls for the subversion of any growth in political power of even close allies. It also mentions that “advanced forms of biological warfare that can ‘target’ specific genotypes may transform biological warfare from the realm of terror to a politically useful tool.” The report advocates the transformation of the US military. But, the authors acknowledge: “the process of transformation, even if it brings revolutionary change, is likely to be a long one, absent some catastrophic and catalyzing event – like a new Pearl Harbour”. [BBC, 2/14/07, Sunday Herald, 9/7/02, click here to download report]

September 15-October 1, 2000: Olympics officials later reveal that “A fully loaded, fueled airliner crashing into the opening ceremony before a worldwide television audience at the Sydney Olympics was one of the greatest security fears for the Games.” In fact, “IOC officials said the scenario of a plane crash during the opening ceremony was uppermost in their security planning at every Olympics since terrorists struck in Munich in 1972.” Bin Laden was considered the number one threat. [Sydney Morning Herald, 9/20/01]

October 24-26, 2000: Pentagon officials carry out a “detailed” emergency drill based upon the crashing of a hijacked airliner into the Pentagon. [Military District of Washington News Service, 11/3/00, Mirror, 5/24/02] The Pentagon is such an obvious target that, “For years, staff at the Pentagon joked that they worked at ‘Ground Zero’, the spot at which an incoming nuclear missile aimed at America’s defenses would explode. There is even a snack bar of that name in the central courtyard of the five-sided building, America’s most obvious military bulls eye.” [Telegraph, 9/16/01] After 9/11, a Pentagon spokesman will claim: “The Pentagon was simply not aware that this aircraft was coming our way, and I doubt prior to Tuesday’s event, anyone would have expected anything like that here.” [Newsday, 9/23/01]

December 19, 2000: The Washington Post reports that “the United States has quietly begun to align itself with those in the Russian government calling for military action against Afghanistan, and has toyed with the idea of a new raid to wipe out Osama bin Laden. [Washington Post, 12/19/00]

December 20, 2000: Counter-terrorism expert Richard Clarke submits a plan to “roll back” al-Qaeda in response to the USS Cole bombing. The main component is a dramatic increase in covert action in Afghanistan to “eliminate the sanctuary” for bin Laden there. However, since there are only a few weeks left before the Bush administration takes over, it is decided to defer the decision to the new administration. One month later, the plan is rejected and no action is taken. Russia’s President Putin later claims he “tried to egg on the previous Clinton administration” – without success – to act militarily against the whole Taliban regime: “Washington’s reaction at the time really amazed me. They shrugged their shoulders and said matter-of-factly: ‘We can’t do anything because the Taliban does not want to turn him over.'” [Guardian, 9/22/01]

2000 – 2001: The military conducts exercises simulating what the White House says was unimaginable at the time: hijacked airliners used as weapons to crash into targets and cause mass casualties. One imagined target is the World Trade Center. [USA Today, 4/19/04]

2001: At some point during the year, Julie Sirrs, a Defense Intelligence Agency agent, travels twice to Afghanistan. She claims DIA officials knew in advance about both trips. Sirrs sees a terrorist training center, and meets with Northern Alliance leader Ahmad Massoud, who is later assassinated by the Taliban on September 9. On her second trip, she returns with what she later claims is a treasure trove of information, including evidence that bin Laden is planning to assassinate Massoud. However, upon returning, a security officer meets her flight and confiscates her material. The DIA and the FBI investigate her. She says no higher-ups want to hear what she had learned in Afghanistan. Ultimately, Sirrs’ security clearance is pulled and she resigned. She eventually quits the DIA in frustration. [ABC News, 2/18/02]

January 2001 (A): An Arizona flight school alerts the FAA that hijacker Hani Hanjour lacks the English and flying skills necessary for the commercial pilot’s license he has. The flight school manager: “I couldn’t believe he had a commercial license of any kind with the skills that he had.” An FAA official actually sits next to Hanjour in class to observe his skills. This official offers a translator to help Hanjour pass, but the flight school points out “that went against the rules that require a pilot to be able to write and speak English fluently before they even get their license.” [AP, 5/10/02, New York Times, 6/19/02] FAA “records show [Hanjour] obtained a commercial pilot’s license in April 1999, but how and where he did so remains a lingering question that FAA officials refuse to discuss.” [Cape Cod Times, 10/21/01] Yet despite his poor flying skills, official reports later state Hanjour executes a 330 to 360 degree turn of AA Flight 77 over Washington on 9/11 in under four minutes and manages a precision hit on the Pentagon. [New York Times, 10/16/01, NTSB Report, 2/19/02]

January 2001 (B): Hijackers Hamza Alghamdi and Mohand Alshehri rent a post office box in Delray Beach, Florida, according to the Washington Post. Yet FBI Director Mueller later claims they don’t enter the country until May 28, 2001. [Washington Post, 9/30/01, Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/26/02]

January 4, 2001: The FBI’s investigation into the USS Cole bombing learns that terrorist Khallad bin Atash had been a principal planner of the bombing. [AP, 9/21/02] The FBI shares this information with the CIA. When CIA analysts reexamine pictures from the Malaysian meeting to learn more about this, they find a picture of him standing next to hijacker Khalid Almihdhar. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02, Newsweek, 6/2/02] The CIA is aware that Almihdhar entered the US a year earlier, yet they don’t attempt to find him. CNN later notes that at this point the CIA at least “could have put Alhazmi and Almihdhar and all others who attended the meeting in Malaysia on a watch list to be kept out of this country. It was not done.” [CNN, 6/4/02] More incredibly, even bin Atash is not placed on the watch list at this time, despite being labeled as the principal planner of the Cole bombing. [Los Angeles Times, 9/22/02]

January 31, 2001: The final report of the US Commission on National Security/21st Century, co-chaired by former Senators Gary Hart (D), and Warren Rudman (R) is issued. The bipartisan report was put together in 1998 by then-President Bill Clinton and then-House Speaker Newt Gingrich. The report has 50 recommendations on how to combat terrorism in the US, but all of them are ignored by the Bush Administration. Instead, the White House announces in May that it will have Vice President Cheney study the potential problem of domestic terrorism, despite the fact that this commission had just studied the issue for 2 1/2 years. According to Senator Hart, Congress was taking the commission’s suggestions seriously, but then, “Frankly, the White House shut it down.” Interestingly, both this commission and the Bush Administration were already assuming a new cabinet level National Homeland Security Agency would be enacted eventually even as the general public remained unaware of the term and the concept. [Salon, 9/12/01, download the complete report here: USCNS Reports]

Late January 2001: An analyst on BBC’s Newsnight later reports that he received a phone call from a high-placed member of a US intelligence agency telling him that “while there’s always been constraints on investigating Saudis…after the elections, the [US intelligence] agencies were told to ‘back off’ investigating the Bin Ladens and Saudi royals, and that angered agents.” A secret document obtained by the BBC shows that the FBI was hot on the trail of members of the Bin Laden family for links to terrorist organisations before September 11th, but the agents involved were not permitted to continue the investigation. [BBC, 11/6/01]

February 2001: A former CIA anti-terror expert later claims that an allied intelligence agency sees “two of Osama’s sisters apparently taking cash to an airport in Abu Dhabi [United Arab Emirates], where they are suspected of handing it to a member of bin Laden’s al-Qaeda organization.” This is cited as one of many incidents showing an “interconnectedness” between Osama bin Laden and the rest of his family. [New Yorker, 11/5/01]

February-July 2001: A trial is held in New York City for four defendants charged with involvement in the 1998 US embassy bombings. Testimony reveals that two bin Laden operatives had received pilot training in Texas and Oklahoma, and another had been asked to take lessons. One bin Laden aide becomes a government witness and gives the FBI detailed information about a pilot training scheme. This new information does not lead to any new FBI investigations into the matter. [Washington Post, 9/23/01]

February 26, 2001: Bin Laden attends the wedding of his son Mohammad in Kandahar, Afghanistan. Although bin Laden is supposedly long estranged from his family, bin Laden’s mother, two brothers and sister are also said to have attended, according to the only journalist who was invited. [Reuters, 3/1/01]

March 2001: Taliban envoy Rahmatullah Hashimi meets with reporters, middle-ranking State Department bureaucrats and private Afghanistan experts in Washington. He discusses turning bin Laden over, but the US wants to be handed bin Laden directly, and the Taliban want to turn him over to some third country. About 20 more meetings on giving up bin Laden take place up till 9/11, all fruitless. [Washington Post, 10/29/01] Hashimi also proposes that the Taliban would hold bin Laden in one location long enough for the US to locate and destroy him. However, this offer is refused. This is according to Laila Helms, daughter of former CIA director Richard Helms, who is doing public relations for the Taliban at the time [Village Voice, 6/6/01]

March 7, 2001: The Russian Permanent Mission at the United Nations secretly submits “an unprecedentedly detailed report” to the UN Security Council about bin Laden, his whereabouts, details of his al-Qaeda network, Afghan drug running, and Taliban connections in Pakistan. The report provides “a listing of all bin Laden’s bases, his government contacts and foreign advisors,” and enough information to potentially kill him. The US fails to act. Alex Standish, the editor of the highly respected Jane’s Intelligence Review, concludes that the attacks of 9/11 were less of an American intelligence failure and more the result of “a political decision not to act against bin Laden.” [Jane’s Intelligence Review, 10/5/01]

March 26, 2001: The Washington Post reports on major improvements of the CIA’s intelligence gathering capability “in recent years.” A new program called Oasis uses “automated speech recognition” technology to turn audio feeds into formatted, searchable text. It can distinguish one voice from another and differentiates “speaker 1” from “speaker 2” in transcripts. Software called Fluent performs “cross lingual” searches, even translating difficult languages like Chinese and Japanese (apparently such software is much better than similar publicly available software) as well as automatically assessing their importance. There’s also software that can turn a suspect’s “life story into a three-dimensional diagram of linked phone calls, bank deposits and plane trips,” and other software to efficiently and quickly process vast amounts of video, audio and written data. [Washington Post, 3/26/01] However, the government will later report that a number of messages about the 9/11 attacks, such as one stating “tomorrow is the zero hour” weren’t translated until after 9/11 because analysts were “too swamped.” [ABC News, 6/7/02]

Spring 2001: The Sydney Morning Herald later reports, “The months preceding September 11 [see] a shifting of the US military’s focus. Over several months beginning in April [2001] a series of military and governmental policy documents [are] released that [seek] to legitimize the use of US military force in the pursuit of oil and gas.” An article in the Army War College’s journal by a former staff member of the Senate armed services committee argues for the legitimacy of “shooting in the Persian Gulf on behalf of lower gas prices.” He also “advocate[s] the acceptability of presidential subterfuge in the promotion of a conflict” and “explicitly urge[s] painting over the US’s actual reasons for warfare as a necessity for mobilising public support for a conflict.” In April, the commander of US forces in the Persian Gulf/South Asia area, testifies to Congress that his command’s key mission is “access to [the region’s] energy resources.” The next month US Central Command begins planning for war with Afghanistan, plans that are later used in the real war. [Sydney Morning Herald, 12/26/02]

April 2001: A report commissioned by former US Secretary of State James Baker and the Council on Foreign Relations warns that the US is running out of oil, with a painful end to cheap fuel already in sight. It argues that “the United States remains a prisoner of its energy dilemma,” and that one of the “consequences” of this is a “need for military intervention” to secure its oil supply. It argues that Iraq needs to be overthrown so the US can control its oil. [Sunday Herald, 10/5/02, Sydney Morning Herald, 12/26/02]

April 12-September 7, 2001: At least six hijackers get more than one Florida driver’s license. [South Florida Sun-Sentinel, 9/28/01] Additionally, some hijackers got licenses in multiple states. [South Florida Sun-Sentinel, 9/28/01, Newsday, 9/21/01, Daily Oklahoman, 1/20/02] Why would they need duplicates of even the exact same license, unless it was, as an article put it, to “[allow] two or more people to use the same identity”? [South Florida Sun-Sentinel, 9/28/01]

April 23, 2001: A Global Hawk plane flies 22 hours from the US to Australia without pilot or passengers. A Global Hawk manager says, “The aircraft essentially flies itself, right from takeoff, right through to landing, and even taxiing off the runway”. [ITN, 4/24/01]

May 2001 (A): The White House’s Counter-terrorism Security Group fails to meet after intelligence analysts overhear conversations from an al-Qaeda cell in Milan suggesting that bin Laden’s agents might be plotting to kill Bush at the European summit in Genoa, Italy, in late July. In fact, the group hardly meets at all. By comparison, the Counter-terrorism Security Group met two or three times a week between 1998 and 2000 under Clinton. [New York Times, 12/30/01]

May 2001 (B): Secretary of State Powell gives $43 million in aid to Afghanistan’s Taliban government, purportedly to assist hungry farmers who are starving since the destruction of their opium crop in January on orders of the Taliban. [Los Angeles Times, 5/22/01] This follows $113 million given by the US in 2000 for humanitarian aid. [State Department Fact Sheet, 12/11/01]

May 2001 (C): The US introduces the “Visa Express” program in Saudi Arabia, which allows any Saudi Arabian to obtain visas through their travel agent instead of appearing at a consulate in person. An official later states, “The issuing officer has no idea whether the person applying for the visa is actually the person in the documents and application.” [US News and World Report, 12/12/01, Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02] At the time, warnings of an attack against the US led by the Saudi Osama bin Laden are higher than they had ever been before – “off the charts” as one Senator later puts it. [Los Angeles Times, 5/18/02, Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02] Five hijackers – Khalid Almihdhar, Abdulaziz Alomari, Salem Alhazmi, Saeed Alghamdi, and Fayez Ahmed Banihammad – use Visa Express over the next month to enter the US. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02]

May-August 2001: A number of the hijackers make at least six trips to Las Vegas. At least Atta, Alshehhi, Nawaf Alhazmi, Ziad Jarrah, Khalid Almihdhar and Hani Hanjour were involved. These “fundamentalist” Muslims drink alcohol, gamble, and frequent strip clubs. They even have strippers perform lap dances for them. [San Francisco Chronicle, 10/4/01, Newsweek, 10/15/01]

June 2001 (A): German intelligence warns the CIA, Britain’s MI6, and Israel’s Mossad that Middle Eastern terrorists are planning to hijack commercial aircraft to use as weapons to attack “American and Israeli symbols, which stand out.” A later article quotes unnamed German intelligence sources who state the information was coming from Echelon surveillance technology, and that British intelligence had access to the same warnings. [Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung, 9/11/01, Washington Post, 9/14/01, Fox News, 5/17/02]

June 2001 (B): A 60-page internal memo on the Israeli “art student” spy ring is prepared by the DEA’s Office of Security Programs. [Read the memo here: DEA report, 6/01] The memo is a compilation of dozens of field reports, and was meant only for the eyes of senior officials at the Justice Department, but it is leaked to the press around December 2001. The report connects the spies to efforts to foil investigations into Israeli organized crime activity involving the importation of the drug Ecstasy. The spies also appear to be snooping on top-secret military bases. For instance, on April 30, 2001, an Air Force alert was issued from Tinker Air Force Base in Oklahoma City concerning “possible intelligence collection being conducted by Israeli art students.” By the time of the report, the US has “apprehended or expelled close to 120 Israeli nationals,” but many remain at large. [Le Monde, 3/5/02, Salon, 5/7/02]

June 1-2, 2001: A multi-agency planning exercise sponsored by NORAD (the North American Aerospace Defense Command, in charge of defending US airspace) involves the hypothetical scenario of a cruise missile launched from a barge off the East Coast. Bin Laden is pictured on the cover of the proposal for the exercise. [American Forces Press Service, 6/4/02] After 9/11, the government claims that this type of an attack was completely unexpected, and as a result it had only 14 fighters on standby to defend the entire US. [Newsday, 9/23/01]

June 4, 2001: At some point in 2000, three men claiming to be Afghans but using Pakistani passports enter the Cayman Islands, possibly illegally. [Miami Herald, 9/20/01] In late 2000, Cayman and British investigators begin a yearlong probe of these men which lasts until 9/11. [Los Angeles Times, 9/20/01] They are overheard discussing hijacking attacks in New York City. On this day, they are taken into custody, questioned and released some time later. This information is forwarded to US intelligence. [Fox News, 5/17/02]

June 9, 2001: Robert Wright, an FBI agent who spent ten years investigating terrorist funding, writes a memo that slams the FBI. He claims the “FBI was merely gathering intelligence so they would know who to arrest when a terrorist attack occurred” rather than actually trying to stop the attacks. [UPI, 5/30/02] Wright’s shocking allegations are largely ignored when they first become public a year later. He is asked on CNN’s Crossfire, one of the few outlets to cover the story at all, “Mr. Wright, your charges against the FBI are really more disturbing, more serious, than [Coleen] Rowley’s (see August 28, 2001). Why is it, do you think, that you have been ignored by the media, ignored by the congressional committees, and no attention has been paid to your allegations?” The Village Voice says the problem is partly because he went to the FBI and asked permission to speak publicly instead of going straight to the media as Rowley did. The FBI put severe limits on what details Wright can divulge. He is now suing them. [Village Voice, 6/19/02]

June 13, 2001: Egyptian President Mubarak claims that Egyptian intelligence discovers a “communiqué from bin Laden saying he wanted to assassinate George W. Bush and other G8 heads of state during their summit in Italy.” The communiqué specifically mentions this would be done via “an airplane stuffed with explosives.” The US and Italy are sent urgent warnings of this and the attack is apparently aborted. [New York Times, 9/26/01]

June 28, 2001: CIA Director George J. Tenet has been “nearly frantic” with concern. A written intelligence summary for national security adviser Condoleezza Rice says: “It is highly likely that a significant al Qaeda attack is in the near future, within several weeks.” Rice will later claim that everyone was taken by complete surprise by the 9/11 attack. By late summer, one senior political appointee says, Tenet had repeated this threat “so often that people got tired of hearing it.” [Washington Post, 5/17/02]

Late June 2001: White House National Coordinator for Counter-terrorism, Richard Clarke, gives a direct warning to the FAA to increase security measures in light of an impending terrorist attack. The FAA refuses to take such measures. [New Yorker, 1/14/02]

Summer 2001 (A): Around this time, the NSA intercepts telephone conversations between al-Qaeda leader Khalid Shaikh Mohammed and Atta, but does not share the information with any other agencies. Mohammed is on the FBI’s Most Wanted Terrorist List, and is later considered the mastermind of the 9/11 attacks, while Atta was in charge of operations inside the US. [Knight Ridder Newspapers, 6/6/02, Independent, 6/6/02]

Summer 2001 (B): A confidential informant tells an FBI field office agent that he has been invited to a commando training course at a camp operated by al-Qaeda in Afghanistan. The information is passed up to FBI headquarters, which rejects the idea of infiltrating the camp. An “asset validation” of the informant, a routine exercise to determine whether information from the source was reliable, is also not done. The FBI later has no comment on the story. [US News and World Report, 6/10/02]

Summer 2001 (C): Intelligence officials know that al Qaeda both hopes to use planes as weapons and seeks to strike a violent blow within the US, despite government claims following 9/11 that the World Trade Center and Pentagon attacks came “like bolts from the blue.” [Wall Street Journal, 09/19/02]

July 1, 2001: Senators Dianne Feinstein (D) and Richard Shelby (R), both members of the Senate Intelligence Committee, appear on CNN’s “Late Edition with Wolf Blitzer”, and warn of potential attacks by bin Laden. Says Feinstein: “One of the things that has begun to concern me very much as to whether we really have our house in order, intelligence staff have told me that there is a major probability of a terrorist incident within the next three months.” [CNN, 3/02]

July 3, 2001: James Hatfield, author of an unflattering book on Bush called Fortunate Son, claims he has evidence al-Qaeda will try to assassinate Bush at the G8 Summit in Genoa, Italy, possibly through a suicidal plane crash. This is the first public mention of the plot. Intelligence reports later confirm that such an attack was planned but aborted due to high security. What’s unusual is that Hatfield adds: “German intelligence services have stated that bin Laden is covertly financing neo-Nazi skinhead groups throughout Europe to launch another terrorist attack at a high-profile American target.” [Online Journal, 7/3/01] Two weeks later, Hatfield apparently commits suicide. However, there is widespread speculation that his death was payback for his revelation of Bush’s cocaine use in the 1970’s. [Salon, 7/20/01]

July 4-14, 2001: Bin Laden, America’s most wanted criminal with a $5 million bounty on his head, allegedly receives kidney treatment from Canadian-trained Dr. Callaway at the American hospital in Dubai, United Arab Emirates. He is accompanied by Dr. Ayman Zawahiri (who is said to be bin Laden’s personal physician, al-Qaeda’s second-in-command, and leader of Egypt’s Islamic Jihad), plus several bodyguards. Callaway supposedly treated bin Laden in 1996 and 1998, also in Dubai. Callaway later refuses to answer any questions on this matter. [Le Figaro, 10/31/01, Sydney Morning Herald, 10/31/01, Times of London, 11/01/01] During his stay, bin Laden is visited by “several members of his family and Saudi personalities,” including Prince Turki al Faisal, then head of Saudi intelligence, as well as two CIA officers. [Guardian, 11/1/01] The explosive story is widely reported in Europe, but barely at all in the US (possibly only by UPI [UPI, 11/1/01]).

July 10, 2001: Phoenix, Arizona FBI agent Ken Williams sends a memorandum warning about suspicious activities involving a group of Middle Eastern men taking flight training lessons in Arizona. The memorandum specifically suggests that bin Laden’s followers might be trying to infiltrate the civil-aviation system as pilots, security guards or other personnel, and recommends a national program to track suspicious flight-school students. The memo is sent to the counter-terrorism division at FBI headquarters in Washington and to two field offices, including the counter-terrorism section in New York, which has had extensive experience in al-Qaeda investigations. The memo is ignored in all three places, not passed on to others, and no action is taken. [New York Times, 5/21/02, Fortune, 5/22/02] Vice President Cheney states in May 2002 that the memo should never be released to the media or public. [CNN, 5/20/02]

July 12, 2001: While in Dubai, United Arab Emirates to receive lifesaving medical treatment, Bin Laden supposedly meets with CIA agent Larry Mitchell in the Dubai hospital on this day, and possibly others. Mitchell reportedly lives in Dubai as an Arab specialist under the cover of being a consular agent. The CIA, the Dubai hospital and even bin Laden deny the story. Le Figaro and Radio France International stand by it. [Le Figaro, 10/31/01, Radio France International, 11/1/01, Reuters, 11/10/01] The Guardian claims that the two news organizations that broke the story, Le Figaro and Radio France International, got their information from French intelligence, “which is keen to reveal the ambiguous role of the CIA, and to restrain Washington from extending the war to Iraq and elsewhere.” The Guardian adds that during his stay bin Laden is also visited by a second CIA officer. [Guardian, 11/1/01]

July 13, 2001: With the threat of a new terrorist attack on the rise, the CIA has agents reexamine records in the search for new leads. A CIA cable is rediscovered showing that Khallad bin Atash had attended the January 2000 meeting in Malaysia. The CIA official who finds it immediately e-mails the CIA’s Counter-Terrorism Center (CTC), saying bin Atash “is a major league killer who orchestrated the Cole attack and possibly the Africa bombings.” Yet bin Atash is still not put on a terrorist watch list. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02]

Mid-July 2001: John O’Neill, FBI counter-terrorism expert, privately discusses White House obstruction in his bin Laden investigation. O’Neill says: “The main obstacles to investigate Islamic terrorism were US oil corporate interests and the role played by Saudi Arabia in it.” He adds: “All the answers, everything needed to dismantle Osama bin Laden’s organization, can be found in Saudi Arabia.” [CNN, 1/8/02, CNN, 1/9/02, Irish Times, 11/19/01, Bin Laden: The Forbidden Truth, released 11/11/01 (the link is an excerpt containing Chapter 1)]

July 21, 2001: Three American officials, including a former US Ambassador to Pakistan meet with Pakistani and Russian intelligence officers in a Berlin hotel. [Salon, 8/16/02, Guardian, 9/22/01] At the meeting, a former US State Department official passes on a message from Bush officials. He later says, “I think there was some discussion of the fact that the United States was so disgusted with the Taliban that they might be considering some military action.” [Guardian, 9/26/01] Accounts vary, but former Pakistani Foreign Secretary Niaz Naik later says he is told by senior American officials at the meeting that military action to overthrow the Taliban in Afghanistan is planned to “take place before the snows started falling in Afghanistan, by the middle of October at the latest.” The goal is to kill or capture both bin Laden and Taliban leader Mullah Omar, topple the Taliban regime and install a transitional government of moderate Afghans in its place. Uzbekistan and Russia would also participate. Naik also says “it was doubtful that Washington would drop its plan, even if bin Laden were to be surrendered immediately by the Taliban.” [BBC, 9/18/01]

July 24, 2001: Larry Silverstein’s $3.2 billion lease of the WTC is finalized. [NY Times, 02/16/03, Ireizine, 7/26/01] It’s the only time the WTC has ever changed hands. It was previously owned by the New York Port Authority, a bi-state government agency. [ICSC, 4/27/01] Silverstein may get $7 billion in insurance from the 9/11 destruction of the WTC towers. [Guardian, 10/24/01]

July 26, 2001: CBS News reports that Attorney General Ashcroft has stopped flying commercial airlines due to a threat assessment, but “neither the FBI nor the Justice Department … would identify [to CBS] what the threat was, when it was detected or who made it.” [CBS, 7/26/01] “Ashcroft demonstrated an amazing lack of curiosity when asked if he knew anything about the threat. ‘Frankly, I don’t,’ he told reporters.” [San Francisco Chronicle, 6/3/02] It is later reported that he stopped flying in July based on threat assessments made on May 8 and June 19. In May 2002, it’s claimed the threat assessment had nothing to do with al-Qaeda, but Ashcroft walked out of his office rather than answer questions about it. [AP, 5/16/02] The San Francisco Chronicle concludes, “The FBI obviously knew something was in the wind … The FBI did advise Ashcroft to stay off commercial aircraft. The rest of us just had to take our chances.” [San Francisco Chronicle, 6/3/02] CBS’s Dan Rather later says of this warning: “Why wasn’t it shared with the public at large?” [Washington Post, 5/27/02]

July 31, 2001: The FAA issues another warning to US airlines, citing no specific targets but saying “terror groups are known to be planning and training for hijackings, and we ask you therefore to use caution.” These alerts had expired by 9/11. Note that pilots and flight attendants later claim they were never told about warnings such as these. The airlines also disagree about the content of pre-9/11 warnings generally. For instance, American Airlines states these warnings were “extremely general in nature and did not identify a specific threat or recommend any specific security enhancements.” The text of these warnings remain classified. [CNN, 3/02, Ananova, 5/17/02]

Late July 2001 (A): The Taliban Foreign Minister learns that bin Laden is planning a “huge attack” on targets inside America. The attack is imminent, and will kill thousands. He learns this from the leader of the rebel Islamic Movement of Uzbekistan (IMU), which is allied with al-Qaeda at the time. He sends an emissary to pass this information on to the US consul general, and another US official, “possibly from the intelligence services,” also attends the meeting. The message is not taken very seriously. The emissary then takes the message to the Kabul offices of UNSMA, the political wing of the UN. They also fail to take the warning seriously. [Independent, 9/7/02, Reuters, 9/7/02] Isn’t it ironic the US destroyed the Taliban, who tried to warn them of the attacks?

Late July 2001 (B): David Schippers, noted conservative Chicago lawyer and the House Judiciary Committee’s chief investigator in the Clinton impeachment trial, later claims that FBI agents in Chicago and Minnesota contact him around this time and tell him that a terrorist attack is going to occur in lower Manhattan. According to Schippers, the agents had been developing extensive information on the planned attack for many months. However, the FBI soon pulls them off the terrorist investigation and threatens them with prosecution under the National Security Act if they go public with the information. As a result, they contact Schippers hoping he can persuade the government to take action. Schippers tries to pass the information on to high government officials, but apparently his efforts are ignored. Partly in conjunction with Judicial Watch, the public interest law firm, Schippers is now representing at least ten FBI agents in a suit against the US government in an attempt to have their testimony subpoenaed, which would enable them to legally tell what they know without going to jail. [Judicial Watch, 11/14/01, World Net Daily, 10/21/01, Alex Jones Show, 10/10/01, note the sources are partisan, Schipper’s claims are being reported nowhere else]

Late July 2001 (C): CBS later has a brief mention in a long story on another topic: “Just days after Atta return[s] to the US from Spain, Egyptian intelligence in Cairo says it received a report from one of its operatives in Afghanistan that 20 al-Qaeda members had slipped into the US and four of them had received flight training on Cessnas. To the Egyptians, pilots of small planes didn’t sound terribly alarming, but they [pass] on the message to the CIA anyway, fully expecting Washington to request information. The request never [comes].” [CBS, 10/9/02] This appears to be one of several accurate Egyptian warnings based on informants (see June 13, 2001and August 30, 2001).

Late summer 2001: Jordanian intelligence (the GID) makes a communications intercept deemed so important that King Abdullah’s men relay it to Washington. To make doubly sure the message gets through it is passed through an Arab intermediary to a German intelligence agent. The message states that a major attack, code named “The Big Wedding,” is planned inside the US, and that aircraft will be used. “When it became clear that the information was embarrassing to Bush Administration officials and congressmen, who at first denied that there had been any such warnings before September 11, senior Jordanian officials backed away from their earlier confirmations.” Christian Science Monitor calls the story “confidently authenticated” even though Jordan has backed away from it. [International Herald Tribune, 5/21/02, Christian Science Monitor, 5/23/02]

August 2001 (A): The German newspaper Der Spiegel later reports that this month the US company Raytheon landed a 727 six times in a military base in New Mexico without any pilots on board. This was done to test equipment making future hijackings more difficult, by allowing ground control to take over the flying of a hijacked plane. [Der Spiegel, 10/28/01] Even though Der Spiegel got their information directly from Raytheon, most media reports after 9/11 suggest such technology is currently impossible. For instance, the Observer quotes an expert who says “the technology is pretty much there” but still untried. [Observer, 9/16/01] The New York Times reports on a Bush speech in which he mentioned that the government would give grants to research “new technology, probably far in the future, allowing air traffic controllers to land distressed planes by remote control.” [New York Times, 9/28/01]

August 2001 (B): At least six 9/11 hijackers, including all of those that boarded Flight 77, live in Laurel, Maryland from about this time. NSA expert James Bamford later states, “the terrorist cell that eventually took over the airliner that crashed into the Pentagon ended up living, working, planning and developing all their activities in Laurel, Maryland, which happens to be the home of the NSA. So they were actually living alongside NSA employees as they were plotting all these things.” [Washington Post, 9/19/01, BBC, 6/21/02]

August 2001 (C): The French magazine Maximale and the Moroccan newspaper al-Ittihad al-Ichtiraki later simultaneously report that a Moroccan agent named Hassan Dabou had penetrated al-Qaeda to the point of getting close to bin Laden by this time. Dabou claims he learns that bin Laden is “very disappointed” that the 1993 bombing had not toppled the WTC, and plans “large scale operations in New York in the summer or fall of 2001.” Dabou is called to the US to report this information directly, and in so doing blows his cover, losing his ability to gather more intelligence. [Agence France Presse, 11/22/01, International Herald Tribune, 5/21/02, Times of London, 6/12/02]

August 2001 (D): Russian President Putin later states that suicide pilots are training for attacks on US targets. [Fox News, 5/17/02] The head of Russian intelligence also states, “We had clearly warned them” on several occasions, but they “did not pay the necessary attention.” [Agence France-Presse, 9/16/01] A Russian newspaper on September 12, 2001 claims that “Russian Intelligence agents know the organizers and executors of these terrorist attacks. More than that, Moscow warned Washington about preparation to these actions a couple of weeks before they happened.” Interestingly, the article claims that at least two of the terrorists were Muslim radicals from Uzbekistan. [Izvestia, 9/12/01, (the story currently on the Izvestia web site has been edited to delete a key paragraph, the link is to a translation of the original article from From the Wilderness)]

August 2001 (E): Former CIA agent Robert Baer is advising a prince in a Persian Gulf royal family, when a military associate of this prince passes information to him about a “spectacular terrorist operation” that will take place shortly. He is also given a computer record of around 600 secret al-Qaeda operatives in Saudi Arabia and Yemen. The list includes 10 names that will be placed on the FBI’s most wanted terrorists list after 9/11. He is also given evidence that a Saudi merchant family had funded the USS Cole bombing, and that the Yemeni government is covering up information related to that bombing. At the military officer’s request, he offers all this information to the Saudi Arabian government. But an aide to the Saudi defense minister, Prince Sultan, refuses to look at the list or to pass the names on (Sultan is later sued for his complicity in the 9/11 plot). Baer also passes the information on to a senior CIA official and the CIA’s Counter-Terrorism Center, but there is no response or action. Large sections of Baer’s book are blacked out, having been censored by the CIA. [Financial Times, 1/12/02, Breakdown: How America’s Intelligence Failures Led to September 11, Bill Gertz, pp. 55-58, See No Evil: The True Story of a Ground Soldier in the CIA’s War on Terrorism, Robert Baer, 2/02, pp. 270-271, Breakdown: How America’s Intelligence Failures Led to September 11, Bill Gertz, pp. 55-58]

Early August 2001: Britain gives the US another warning about an al-Qaeda attack.The previous British warning was vague as to method, but this warning specifies multiple airplane hijackings. This warning is included in Bush’s briefing on August 6. [Sunday Herald, 5/19/02]

August 6, 2001: President Bush receives a classified intelligence briefing at his Crawford, Texas ranch indicating that bin Laden might be planning to hijack commercial airliners. Titled “Bin Ladin Determined to Strike in US,” the memo focuses on the possibility of terrorist attacks inside the US, with the WTC specifically mentioned. Yet Bush later states the briefing “said nothing about an attack on America.” [CNN, 4/12/04, Washington Post, 4/12/04, White House, 4/11/04] National Security Advisor Rice claims the memo was “fuzzy and thin.” [Newsweek, 5/27/02, New York Times, 5/16/02, Die Zeit, 10/1/02] A Congressional report later describes this memo mentioning “that members of al-Qaeda, including some US citizens, had resided in or traveled to the US for years and that the group apparently maintained a support structure here. The report cited uncorroborated information obtained in 1998 that bin Laden wanted to hijack airplanes to gain the release of US-held extremists. It also described FBI judgments about patterns of activity consistent with preparations for hijackings or other types of attacks, and a number of bin Laden-related investigations underway.” [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02] Incredibly, the New York Times later reports that Bush “broke off from work early and spent most of the day fishing.” [New York Times, 5/25/02] The existence of this memo is kept secret until May 2002. [New York Times, 5/16/02, Washington Post, 5/16/02, Intelligence Briefing, 8/6/01 posted on George Washington University’s National Security Archives]

August 8-15, 2001: At some point between these dates, Israel warns the US that an al-Qaeda attack is imminent. [Fox News, 5/17/02] Two high ranking agents from the Mossad come to Washington and warn the FBI and CIA that from 50 to 200 terrorists have slipped into the US and are planning “a major assault on the United States.” They say indications point to a “large scale target”, and that Americans would be “very vulnerable.” They add there could be Iraqi connections to the al-Qaeda attack. [Telegraph, 9/16/01, Los Angeles Times, 9/20/01, Ottawa Citizen, 9/17/01] The Los Angeles Times later retracts the story after a CIA spokesman says, “There was no such warning. Allegations that there was are complete and utter nonsense.” [Los Angeles Times, 9/21/01] In light of later revelations of a Mossad spy ring trailing numerous Muslim terrorists in the US, it is easy to see that Mossad could have had this information.

August 13-15, 2001: Zacarias Moussaoui trains at the Pan Am International Flight School in Minneapolis, Minnesota, where he pays $8,300 ($1500 by credit card and the remainder in cash) to use a Boeing 474 Model 400 aircraft simulator. After just one day of training, most of the staff is suspicious that he’s a terrorist. They discuss “how much fuel [is] on board a 747-400, and how much damage that could cause if it hit[s] anything.” They call the FBI with their concerns later that day. [New York Times, 2/8/02, Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02] Failing to get much initial interest from the FBI, the flight instructor tells the FBI agents, “Do you realize how serious this is? This man wants training on a 747. A 747 fully loaded with fuel could be used as a weapon!” [New York Times, 2/8/02]

August 15, 2001: Based on the concerns of flight school staff, Zacarias Moussaoui is arrested and detained in Minnesota on the excuse of an immigration violation. [Time, 5/27/02, some reports say the 16th because the arrest happened late at night] The FBI confiscates his possessions, including a computer laptop, but don’t have a search warrant to search through them. But when arresting him, they note he possesses two knives, fighting gloves and shin guards, and had prepared “through physical training for violent confrontation.” An FBI interview of him adds more concerns. For example, he is supposedly in the US working as a “marketing consultant” for a computer company, but is unable to provide any details of his employment. Nor can he convincingly explain his $32,000 bank balance. [MSNBC, 12/11/01, Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02] An FBI report states that when asked about his trips to Pakistan, the gateway to Afghanistan, “the questioning caused him to become extremely agitated, and he refused to discuss the matter further.” The report also notes “Moussaoui was extremely evasive in many of his answers.” [CNN, 9/28/02] His roommate is interviewed on the same day, and tells agents that Moussaoui believes it is “acceptable to kill civilians who harm Muslims,” that Moussaoui approves of Muslims who die as “martyrs”, and says Moussaoui might be willing to act on his beliefs. [Washington Post, 5/24/02] But Minnesota FBI agents quickly become frustrated at the lack of interest in the case from higher ups. [New York Times, 2/8/02] For instance, on August 21, they e-mail FBI headquarters saying it’s “imperative” that the Secret Service be warned of the danger a plot involving Moussaoui might pose to the President’s safety. But no such warning is ever sent. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02, New York Times, 10/18/02]

August 22, 2001 (A): The French give the FBI information requested about Zacarias Moussaoui. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02] The French say Moussaoui has ties with radical Islamic groups and recruits men to fight in Chechnya. They believe he spent time in Afghanistan. He had been on a French watch list for several years, preventing him from entering France. A French justice official later says the government gave the FBI “everything we had” on Moussaoui, “enough to make you want to check this guy out every way you can. Anyone paying attention would have seen he was not only operational in the militant Islamist world but had some autonomy and authority as well.” [Time, 5/27/02] A senior French investigator later says “Even a neophyte working in some remote corner of Florida would have understood the threat based on what was sent.” [Time, 8/4/02] The French Interior Minister also emphasizes, “We did not hold back any information.” [ABC News, 9/5/02] But senior officials at FBI headquarters still maintain that the information “was too sketchy to justify a search warrant for his computer.” [Time, 8/4/02]

August 22, 2001 (B): Counter-terrorism expert John O’Neill quits the FBI. He says it’s partly because of a recent power play against him, but also because of repeated obstruction of his investigations into al-Qaeda. [New Yorker, 1/14/02] In his last act, he signs papers ordering FBI investigators back to Yemen to resume the USS Cole investigation, now that Barbara Bodine is leaving as ambassador (they arrive a couple days before 9/11). He never hears the CIA warning about hijackers Alhazmi and Almihdhar sent out just one day later. Because he fell out of favor a few months earlier, he also is never told about Ken Williams’ flight school memo, nor about the arrest of Zacarias Moussaoui [PBS Frontline, 10/3/02], nor is he at a June meeting when the CIA revealed some of what it knew about Alhazmi and Almihdhar. [PBS Frontline, 10/3/02] The FBI New York office is eventually told of Walid Arkeh’s warning that the WTC would be attacked, but presumably not in time for O’Neill to hear it. One can only wonder what the government’s “most committed tracker of Osama bin Laden and his al-Qaeda network of terrorists” [New Yorker, 1/14/02] could have accomplished if he was aware of these things.

August 23, 2001 (A): According to German newspapers, the Mossad gives the CIA a list of terrorists living in the US, and say that they appear to be planning to carry out an attack in the near future. It is unknown if these are the 19 9/11, hijackers or if the number is a coincidence. However, four names on the list are known and are names of 9/11 hijackers Nawaf Alhazmi, Khalid Almihdhar, Marwan Alshehhi, and Mohamed Atta. [Die Zeit, 10/1/02, Der Spiegel, 10/1/02, BBC, 10/2/02, Ha’aretz, 10/3/02] The Mossad appears to have learned about this through its “art student” spy ring. Yet apparently this warning and list are not treated as particularly urgent by the CIA. Nor are they passed on to the FBI. It’s not clear if this warning influenced the adding of Alhazmi and Almihdhar to a terrorism watch list on this same day, and if so, why only those two. [Der Spiegel, 10/1/02] Israel has denied that there were any Mossad agents in the US. [Ha’aretz, 10/3/02] The US has denied knowing about Atta before 9/11, despite other media reports to the contrary.

August 23, 2001 (B): John O’Neill begins his new job as head of security at the WTC. [New Yorker, 1/14/02] A friend says to him, “Well, that will be an easy job. They’re not going to bomb that place again.” O’Neill replies, “Well actually they’ve always wanted to finish that job. I think they’re going to try again.” On September 10, he moves into his new office on the 34th floor of the North Tower. That night, he tells colleague Jerry Hauer, “We’re due for something big. I don’t like the way things are lining up in Afghanistan” (a probable reference to the assassination of Afghan leader General Massoud on September 9). O’Neill is killed the next day in the 9/11 attack. [PBS Frontline, 10/3/02]

August 23-27, 2001: In the wake of the French intelligence report on Zacarias Moussaoui, FBI agents in Minnesota are “in a frenzy” and “absolutely convinced he [is] planning to do something with a plane.” One agent writes notes speculating Moussaoui might “fly something into the World Trade Center.” [Newsweek, 5/20/02] Minnesota FBI agents become “desperate to search the computer lap top” and “conduct a more thorough search of his personal effects,” especially since Moussaoui acted as if he was hiding something important in the laptop when arrested. [Time, 5/21/02, Time, 5/27/02] They decide to apply for a search warrant under the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA). “FISA allows the FBI to carry out wiretaps and searches that would otherwise be unconstitutional” because “the goal is to gather intelligence, not evidence.” [Washington Post, 11/4/01] Standards to get a warrant through FISA are so low that out of 10,000 requests over more than 20 years, not a single one was turned down. [New York Times, 8/27/02] However, as FBI agent Coleen Rowley later puts it, FBI headquarters “almost inexplicably, throw[s] up roadblocks” and undermines their efforts. Headquarters personnel bring up “almost ridiculous questions in their apparent efforts to undermine the probable cause.” One Minneapolis agent’s e-mail says FBI headquarters is “setting this up for failure.” [Time, 5/21/02, Time, 5/27/02]

August 24, 2001 (A): Frustrated with lack of response from FBI headquarters about Zacarias Moussaoui, the Minnesota FBI contact an FBI agent working with the CIA’s Counter-Terrorism Center, and asks the CIA for help. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02] On this day, the CIA sends messages to stations and bases overseas requesting information about Moussaoui. The message says that the FBI is investigating Moussaoui for possible involvement in the planning of a terrorist attack and mentions his efforts to obtain flight training. It also suggests he might be “involved in a larger plot to target airlines traveling from Europe to the US.” [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02] It calls him a “suspect 747 airline attacker” and a “suspect airline suicide hijacker” – showing that the form of the 9/11 attack isn’t a surprise, at least to the CIA. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02] FBI headquarters responds by chastising the Minnesota FBI for notifying the CIA without approval. [Time, 5/21/02]

August 24, 2001 (B): Hijacker Khalid Almihdhar buys his 9/11 plane ticket on-line using a credit card. Nawaf Alhazmi does the same the next day. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/26/02] Both men had been put on a terrorist watch list on August 23. Procedures are in place for law enforcement agencies to share watch list information with airlines and airports. Such sharing is common, but the FAA and the airlines are not notified, so the purchases raise no red flags. [Los Angeles Times, 9/20/01] An official later states that had the FAA been properly warned, “they should have been picked up in the reservation process.” [Washington Post, 10/2/02]

August 24-29, 2001: The hijackers book their flights for 9/11, using their real names. Most pay using credit cards on the internet. [Miami Herald, 9/22/01] So 9/11 must have been the confirmed date of the attack by August 24. Why would they pay using credit cards in their real names?

August 27, 2001: An agent at the FBI headquarters’ Radical Fundamentalist Unit (RFU) tells the FBI Minnesota office supervisor that the supervisor is getting people “spun up” over Moussaoui. The supervisor replies that he is trying to get people at FBI headquarters “spun up” because he is trying to make sure that Moussaoui does “not take control of a plane and fly it into the World Trade Center.” He later alleges the headquarters agent replies, “[T]hat’s not going to happen. We don’t know he’s a terrorist. You don’t have enough to show he is a terrorist. You have a guy interested in this type of aircraft – that is it.” [Senate Intelligence Committee Report, 10/17/02] Three weeks earlier, Dave Frasca, the head of the RFU unit, had received Ken Williams’ memo expressing concern about terrorists training in US flight schools, and he also knew all about the Moussaoui case, but he apparently wasn’t “spun up” enough to connect the two cases. [Time/CNN, 5/27/02] Neither he nor anyone else at FBI headquarters who saw Williams’s memo informed anyone at the FBI Minnesota office about it before 9/11. [Time, 5/21/02]

August 28, 2001 (A): A report is sent to the FBI’s New York office recommending that an investigation be launched “to determine if [Khalid] Almihdhar is still in the United States.” The New York office tries to convince FBI headquarters to open a criminal investigation, but are immediately turned down. The reason given is a “wall” between criminal and intelligence work – Almihdhar could not be tied to the Cole investigation without the inclusion of sensitive intelligence information. [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/20/02] So instead of a criminal case, the New York office opens an “intelligence case,” excluding all the “criminal case” investigators from the search. [FBI Agent Testimony, 9/20/02] One FBI agent expresses his frustration in an e-mail the next day, saying, “Whatever has happened to this – someday someone will die – and wall or not – the public will not understand why we were not more effective and throwing every resource we had at certain ‘problems.’ Let’s hope the [FBI’s] National Security Law Unit will stand behind their decisions then, especially since the biggest threat to us now, UBL [Usama bin Laden], is getting the most ‘protection.”‘ [New York Times, 9/21/02, FBI Agent Testimony, 9/20/02]

August 28, 2001 (B): A previously mentioned unnamed RFU agent edits the Minnesota FBI’s request for a FISA search warrant to search Zacarias Moussaoui’s possessions. Minnesota is trying to prove that Moussaoui is connected to al-Qaeda through a rebel group in Chechnya, but the RFU agent removes information connecting the Chechnya rebels to al-Qaeda. The FBI Deputy General Counsel who receives the edited request decides on this day that there isn’t enough connection to al-Qaeda to allow an application for a search warrant through FISA, so FISA is never even asked. [Senate Intelligence Committee, 10/17/02] According to a later memo written by Minneapolis FBI legal officer Coleen Rowley (see an edited version of the memo here: Time, 5/21/02), FBI headquarters is to blame for not getting the FISA warrant because of this rewrite of the request. She says “I feel that certain facts … have, up to now, been omitted, downplayed, glossed over and/or mis-characterized in an effort to avoid or minimize personal and/or institutional embarrassment on the part of the FBI and/or perhaps even for improper political reasons.” She asks, “Why would an FBI agent deliberately sabotage a case?” The superiors acted so strangely that some agents in the Minneapolis office openly joked that these higher-ups “had to be spies or moles … working for Osama bin Laden.” Failing to approve the warrant through FISA, FBI headquarters also refuses to contact the Justice Department to try and get a search warrant through ordinary means. Rowley and others are unable to search Moussaoui’s computer until after the 9/11 attacks. Rowley later notes that the headquarters agents who blocked the Minnesota FBI were promoted after 9/11. [Sydney Morning Herald, 5/28/02, Time, 5/21/02]

August 30-September 4, 2001: According to Egyptian President Mubarak, Egyptian intelligence warns American officials that bin Laden’s network is in the advanced stages of executing a significant operation against an American target, probably within the US. [AP, 12/7/01, New York Times, 6/4/02] He says he learned this information from an agent working inside al-Qaeda. US officials deny receiving any such warning from Egypt. [ABC News, 6/4/02]

Early September 2001: An Iranian man known as Ali S. in a German jail awaiting deportation repeatedly phones US law enforcement to warn of an imminent attack on the WTC in the week of September 9-15. He calls it “an attack that will change the world.” After a month of badgering his prison guards, he is finally able to call the White House 14 times in the days before the attack. He then tries to send a fax to Bush, but is denied permission hours before the 9/11 attacks. German police later confirm the calls. Similar warnings also come from a Moroccan man being held in a Brazilian jail. [Deutsche Presse-Agentur, 9/13/01, Ottawa Citizen, 9/17/01, Ananova, 9/14/01, Sunday Herald, 9/16/01]

September 6, 2001: Antoinette DiLorenzo, teaching English to a class of Pakistani immigrants, asks a student gazing out the window, “What are you looking at?” The student points towards the WTC and says: “Do you see those two buildings? They won’t be standing there next week.” At the time, nothing was thought of it, but on September 13 the FBI interviews all the people in the classroom and confirms the event. The FBI later places the boy’s family under surveillance, but apparently are unable to find a connection to the 9/11 plot. An MSNBC reporter later sets out to disprove this “urban myth,” but to his surprise finds all the details of the story are confirmed. The fact that the family are recent immigrants from Pakistan might mean the information came from Pakistan. [MSNBC, 10/12/01] Supposedly, on November 9, 2001, the same student says there will be a plane crash on November 12. On that day, American Airlines Flight 587 crashes on takeoff from New York, killing 260 people. Investigators believe it was an accident. One official at the school says many Arab-American students have come forward with their own stories about having prior knowledge before 9/11: “Kids are telling us that the attacks didn’t surprise them. This was a nicely protected little secret that circulated in the community around here.” [Insight, 9/10/02]

September 6-10, 2001: Suspicious trading occurs on American and United (UAL), the two airlines used in the 9/11 attacks. Between 6 and 7 September, The Chicago Board Options Exchange saw purchases of 4,744 put option contracts [a speculation that the stock will go down] in UAL versus 396 call options [a speculation that stock will go up]. Holders of the put options would have netted a profit of $5 million once the carrier’s share price dived after September 11. On 10 September, more trading in Chicago saw the purchase of 4,516 put options in American Airlines, the other airline involved in the hijackings. This compares with a mere 748 call options in American purchased that day. No other airlines saw such trading in their put options. One analyst says: “I saw put-call numbers higher than I’ve ever seen in 10 years of following the markets, particularly the options markets.” [San Francisco Chronicle, 9/19/01, Associated Press, 9/18/01, AP article archived] “To the embarrassment of investigators, it has also emerged that the firm used to buy many of the “put” options … on United Airlines stock was headed until 1998 by ‘Buzzy’ Krongard, now executive director of the CIA.” [Independent, 10/14/01, Independent article archived] Why didn’t this cause a storm of media attention and further investigation?

September 9, 2001: Hijacker Ziad Jarrah is stopped in Maryland for speeding, ticketed and released. No red flags show up when his name is run through the computer by the state police. However, he already had been questioned in United Arab Emirates at the request of the CIA for “suspected involvement in terrorist activities.” Baltimore’s mayor has criticized the CIA for not informing them that Jarrah was on the CIA’s watch list. [Chicago Tribune, 12/14/01, AP, 12/14/01] The CIA calls the whole story “flatly untrue.” [CNN, 8/1/02]

September 10, 2001 (A): In a speech to the Department of Defense, Defense Secretary Rumsfeld announces that the Department of Defense “cannot track $2.3 trillion in transactions.” CBS later calculates that 25% of the yearly defense budget is unaccounted for, and quotes a long-time defense budget analyst: “[Their] numbers are pie in the sky. The books are cooked routinely year after year.” Coverage of this rather shocking story is nearly nonexistent given the events of the next day. [Department of Defense speech, 9/10/01, CBS, 1/29/02]

September 10, 2001 (B): CBS later reports that on this day, bin Laden is admitted to a military hospital in Rawalpindi, Pakistan, for kidney dialysis treatment. Pakistani military forces guard bin Laden. They also move out all the regular staff in the urology department and send in a secret team to replace them. It is not known how long he stayed. [CBS News, 01/28/02]

September 10, 2001 (C): Attorney General Ashcroft rejects a proposed $58 million increase in financing for the bureau’s counter-terrorism programs. On the same day, he sends a request for budget increases to the White House. It covers 68 programs, but none of them relate to counter-terrorism. He also sends a memorandum to his heads of departments, stating his seven priorities – none of them relating to counter-terrorism. This is more than a little strange, since Ashcroft stopped flying public airplanes in July due to terrorist threats (see July 26, 2001) and he told a Senate committee in May that counter-terrorism was his “highest priority.” [New York Times, 6/1/02, Guardian, 5/21/02]

September 10, 2001 (D): The trading ratio on United Airlines is 25 times greater than normal at the Pacific Exchange. Pacific Exchange officials later decline to state if this abnormality is being investigated. [San Francisco Chronicle, 9/19/01]

September 10, 2001 (E): According to CBS News, in the afternoon before the attack, “alarm bells were sounding over unusual trading in the US stock options market.” It has been documented that the CIA, the Mossad and many other intelligence agencies monitor stock trading in real time using highly advanced programs such as Promis. Both the FBI and the Justice Department have confirmed the use of such programs for US intelligence gathering through at least this summer. This would confirm that CIA should have had additional advance warning of imminent attacks against American and United Airlines planes. [CBS, 9/19/01] There are even allegations that bin Laden was able to get a copy of Promis. [Fox News, 10/16/01]

September 10, 2001 (F): US officials later admit American agents had infiltrated al-Qaeda cells in the US, though how many and how long they had been in al-Qaeda remains a mystery. On this day, electronic intercepts connected to these undercover agents hear messages such as: “Watch the news,” and “Tomorrow will be a great day for us.” As to why this didn’t lead to boosted security or warnings the next day, officials call these leads “needles in a haystack.” What other leads may have come from this prior to this day are not revealed. [USA Today, 6/4/02] At least until February 2002, the official story was that the “CIA failed to penetrate al-Qaeda with a single agent.” [ABC News, 2/18/02] FBI Director Mueller later claims “To this day we have found no one in the United States except the actual hijackers who knew of the plot” (see June 18, 2002)

September 10, 2001 (G): Eight hours prior to the attacks, San Francisco Mayor Willie Brown receives a warning from “my security people at the airport” advising him to be cautious in traveling. [San Francisco Chronicle, 9/12/01] He was scheduled to fly to New York the next morning. [San Francisco Chronicle 9/14/01, San Francisco Chronicle, 9/12/01, US State Department, 9/7/01] This story may well be a red herring, but there’s been no investigation to provide a definitive answer.

September 10, 2001 (H): Senator Dianne Feinstein (D) with Senator Jon Kyl (R) sent a copy of draft legislation on counter-terrorism and national defense to Vice President Cheney’s office on July 20. She is told by Cheney’s top aide on this day “that it might be another six months before he would be able to review the material.” [Newsweek, 5/27/02]

September 10, 2001 (I): Two days after 9/11, Newsweek reports: “The state of alert had been high during the past two weeks, and a particularly urgent warning may have been received the night before the attacks, causing some top Pentagon brass to cancel a trip. Why that same information was not available to the 266 people who died aboard the four hijacked commercial aircraft may become a hot topic on the Hill.” [Newsweek, 9/13/01] Far from becoming a hot topic, the only additional media mention of this story is in the next issue of Newsweek: “a group of top Pentagon officials suddenly canceled travel plans for the next morning, apparently because of security concerns.” [Newsweek, 9/24/01]

September 10, 2001 (J): Former president Bush is with a brother of Osama bin Laden at a Carlyle business conference. The conference is interrupted the next day by the attacks. [Washington Post, 3/16/03]

September 11, 2001

September 11, 2001 (A): Warren Buffett, the second richest man on Earth [BBC, 6/22/01], schedules a morning charity event inside Offutt Air Force Base in Nebraska. At least one CEO who would otherwise have died in the WTC attends. Attendees had just arrived when the first WTC attack occurs. This base is the center of the nation’s military defenses, and the same base that Bush will fly to later in the day. The timing, probable attendance, and location of the meeting is curious, to say the least, as is the total lack of any mention of the meeting anywhere, except for one aside by a business leader (Anne Tatlock, CEO and President of Fiduciary and Franklin)explaining why she survived the WTC attack. [San Francisco Business Times, 2/1/02, Forbes 10/15/01] Bush flies to this same base that day, where there is an underground command center. [CNN, 9/12/01, CBS, 9/11/02]

September 11, 2001 (B): An advertisement for a “homeland security” event in 2002 will mention the following curious sentence: “On the morning of September 11th 2001, Mr. [John] Fulton and his team at the CIA were running a pre-planned simulation to explore the emergency response issues that would be created if a plane were to strike a building. Little did they know that the scenario would come true in a dramatic way that day.” [National Law Enforcement Security Institute, 8/02] Fulton’s team is part of the National Reconnaissance Office, which “operates many of the nation’s spy satellites. It draws its personnel from the military and the CIA.” The simulation was to start at 9:00 A.M., four miles from where one of the real hijacked planes took off. The government calls the simulation just a “bizarre coincidence.” [AP, 8/22/02] The government has repeatedly claimed that no one imagined a plane deliberately crashing into a building. [New York Times, 10/3/01] Four wargames were also in progress at the time of the attacks. [C-SPAN Congressional Testimony, 3/11/05]

September 11, 2001 (C): Data recovery experts later looking at 32 hard drives salvaged from the 9/11 attacks discover a surge in credit card transactions from the WTC in the hours before and during the attacks. Unusually large sums of money were rushed through computers even as the disaster unfolded. Investigators say, “There is a suspicion that some people had advance knowledge of the approximate time of the plane crashes in order to move out amounts exceeding $100 million. They thought that the records of their transactions could not be traced after the main frames were destroyed.” [Reuters, 12/18/01, CNN, 12/20/01]

September 11, 2001 (D): The 9/11 attack: four planes are hijacked, two crash into the WTC, one into the Pentagon, and one crashes into the Pennsylvania countryside. At least 3,000 people are killed. According to officials, the entire US is defended by only 14 fighters (two planes each in seven military bases). [Dallas Morning News, 9/16/01] And “they no longer included any bases close to two obvious terrorist targets – Washington, DC, and New York City.” A defense official says: “I don’t think any of us envisioned an internal air threat by big aircraft. I don’t know of anybody that ever thought through that.” [Newsday, 9/23/01]

Timeline for the Day of the Attacks

Department of Defense (6/1/01) and FAA (7/12/01) procedure: In the event of a hijacking, the FAA hijack coordinator on duty at Washington headquarters requests the military to provide escort aircraft. Normally, NORAD escort aircraft take the required action. The FAA notifies the National Military Command Center by the most expeditious means. [DOD/, 6/1/01, FAA, 7/12/01, FAA 7/12/01]

“Pilots are supposed to hit each fix with pinpoint accuracy. If a plane deviates by 15 degrees, or two miles from that course, the flight controllers will hit the panic button. They’ll call the plane, saying “American 11, you’re deviating from course.” It’s considered a real emergency, like a police car screeching down a highway at 100 miles an hour.” [MSNBC, 9/12/01]

If NORAD (North American Aerospace Defense Command) hears of any difficulties in the skies, they begin the work to scramble jet fighters [take off and intercept aircraft that are off course]. Between Sep 2000 and June 2001 fighters were scrambled 67 times. [AP, 8/12/02] When the Lear jet of golfer Payne Stewart didn’t respond in 1999, F-16 interceptors were quickly dispatched. According to an Air Force timeline, a series of military planes provided an emergency escort to Payne’s stricken Lear about 20 minutes after ground controllers lost contact with his plane. [Dallas Morning News, 10/26/99]

(6:45 A.M.) Approximately two hours prior to the first attack, two workers in Israel at the instant messaging company Odigo receive messages warning of the WTC attack. This Israeli owned company has its headquarters two blocks from the WTC. The two employees claim not to know who sent the warnings. [Washington Post, 9/28/01, Ha’aretz, 9/26/01]

(8:13 A.M.) At the same time that flight controllers are asking Flight 11 to climb to 35,000 feet, the transponder stops transmitting. Air traffic manager Glenn Michael says later, “We considered it at that time to be a possible hijacking.” [“when given permission to climb to 35,000 feet,” AP, 8/12/02, “8:13:47 – 46R: AAL11, now climb maintain FL350,” New York Times, 10/16/01, shortly after trying emergency frequencies, Christian Science Monitor, 9/13/01] The official story says NORAD is not notified the plane is hijacked until 8:40 – 27 minutes later. [NORAD, 9/18/01]

(8:20 A.M.) Flight 11 starts to veer dramatically off course around this time. [USA Today flight path image] Recall that if a plane goes two miles off course, it should be considered an emergency situation. [MSNBC, 9/12/01]

(8:20 A.M.) Boston flight control decides that Flight 11 has probably been hijacked, but they don’t notify other air traffic control centers for another five minutes, and don’t notify NORAD for about another 20 minutes. [“about 8:20,” Newsday, 9/23/01, “about 8:20,” NY Times, 9/15/01] ABC News will later say, “There doesn’t seem to have been alarm bells going off, traffic controllers getting on with law enforcement or the military. There’s a gap there that will have to be investigated.” [ABC News, 9/14/01]

(8:21 A.M.) Inside Flight 11, flight attendant Betty Ong calls Vanessa Minter at American Airlines reservations. Nydia Gonzales also listens in from 8:27. Ong talks for 25 minutes, until the plane crashes. The FBI says that only the first four minutes were recorded, but won’t release the tape. [“25 minute phone call until crash,” ABC News, 7/18/02, Boston Globe, 11/23/01]

8:24 A.M. The pilot of Flight 11, John Ogonowski, activates the talk-back button, enabling Boston air traffic controllers to hear a hijacker on Flight 11 say to the passengers: “We have some planes. Just stay quiet and you will be OK. We are returning to the airport.” A controller responds, ”Who’s trying to call me?” The hijacker continues, “Everything will be OK. If you try to make any moves you’ll endanger yourself and the airplane. Just stay quiet.” [8:24:38, Guardian, 10/17/01, 8:24:38, New York Times, 10/16/01, 8:24, Boston Globe, 11/23/01, 8:28, New York Times, 9/12/01, before 8:28, Channel 4 News, 9/13/01]

8:28 A.M. Boston Air Traffic Control radar sees Flight 11 making an unplanned 100-degree turn to the south (they’re already way off-course). Flight controllers say they never lost sight of the flight, though they could no longer determine altitude once the transponder was turned off. [Christian Science Monitor, 9/13/01] However, in other media reports, “Boston airport officials said they did not spot the plane’s course until it had crashed, and said the control tower had no unusual communication with the pilots or any crew members.” [Washington Post, 9/12/01] Before this turn, the FAA had tagged Flight 11’s radar dot for easy visibility, and at American Airlines headquarters at least, “all eyes watched as the plane headed south. On the screen, the plane showed a squiggly line after its turn near Albany, then it straightened.” [Wall Street Journal, 10/15/01]

(8:40 A.M.) Boston Air Traffic Control supposedly notifies NORAD that Flight 11 has been hijacked. This is about 20 minutes after traffic control noticed the plane had its transponder beacon and radio turned off. [8:38, CNN, 9/17/01, 8:38, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 8:40, NORAD, 9/18/01, 8:40, AP, 8/19/02, 8:40, Newsday, 9/10/02] Such a delay in notification would be in strict violation of regulations.

8:43 A.M. NORAD is notified that Flight 175 has been hijacked. [8:43, NORAD, 9/18/01, 8:43, CNN, 9/17/01, 8:43, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 8:43, AP, 8/19/02, 8:43, Newsday, 9/10/02

(8:46 A.M.) Two F-15 fighters are ordered to scramble from Otis Air National Guard Base in Massachusetts to find Flight 11, approximately 190 miles from the known location of the plane and 188 miles from New York City. Fighters in nearer bases are not scrambled. This is 6-8 minutes after NORAD has been told the plane was hijacked, approximately 26 minutes after losing contact with the plane. [8:39, Channel 4 News, 9/13/01, 8:46, NORAD, 9/18/01, 8:44, CNN, 9/17/01, 8:44, Washington Post, 9/15/01]

8:46 A.M. According to Robert Marr, commander of NORAD’s Northeast Air Defense Sector (NEADS), NORAD is unable to find the location of Flight 11. Finally, someone sees a “green dot that’s not identified. Almost as soon as it’s discovered, it disappears. It’s 8:46 A.M.” At the time, “there are no other missing aircraft.” But then, at 9:02, they see a second unidentified aircraft on a screen, which is Flight 175 crashing into the WTC. [Aviation Week and Space Technology, 6/3/02] In another account, the plane is rediscovered at 8:42. [Newsday, 9/10/02] Recall this from a previous entry: Before a turn at 8:28, the FAA had tagged Flight 11’s radar dot for easy visibility, and at American Airlines headquarters, “All eyes watched as the plane headed south. On the screen, the plane showed a squiggly line after its turn near Albany, then it straightened.” [Wall Street Journal, 10/15/01] So American Airlines says Flight 11 was never lost, and this corresponds with other reports. For instance, “Controllers scrambled to direct other planes out of the way of both United 175 and American Airlines Flight 11”, and several collisions were barely averted. [Washington Post, 9/17/01] The airlines would have no reason to lie about this, NORAD would have a very big reason to lie.

8:46 A.M. Flight 11 slams into the north tower, 1 World Trade Center. Investigators believe it still had about 10,000 gallons of fuel and was traveling 470 mph. [New York Times, 9/11/02] Approximately 2662 people are killed on the ground between this crash and the crash of Flight 175. [AP, 8/19/02, 8:45, CNN, 9/12/01, 8:45, New York Times, 9/12/01, 8:46 (based on seismic data), New York Times, 9/12/01, 8:46, CNN, 9/17/01, 8:46, NORAD, 9/18/01, 8:46, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 8:46, AP, 8/19/02, 8:46, USA Today, 9/3/02, 8:46, Newsday, 9/10/02, 8:47:00, Guardian, 10/17/01, 8:48, MSNBC, 9/22/01, 8:46:26, New York Times, 9/11/02, 8:46:26, seismic records]

8:46 – 9:00 A.M. Bush’s motorcade left for the school at 8:30. As it was arriving at the school, pagers and cell phones alerted White House aides that a plane had hit the North Tower of the World Trade Center. Bush remembers senior adviser Karl Rove bringing him the news, saying it appeared to be an accident involving a small, twin-engine plane. [Washington Post, 1/27/02] Bush: “I can remember noticing the press pool and the press corps beginning to get the calls and seeing the look on their face.” [CBS, 9/11/02]

8:46 A.M. At the time of the first WTC crash, three F-16’s assigned to Andrews Air Force Base 10 miles from Washington are flying an air-to-ground training mission on a range in North Carolina, 207 miles away. Eventually they are recalled to Andrews and land there at some point after Flight 77 crashes into the Pentagon. [Aviation Week and Space Technology, 9/9/02] F-16’s can travel a maximum speed of 1500 mph. Traveling even at 1250 mph, at least one of the F-16’s could have returned to Washington within 10 minutes and started patrolling the skies well before 9:00 A.M. Why were they recalled so late, and then ordered back to base (and then to take off again) instead of being sent straight to Washington?

(8:46 A.M.) Flight 77 from Washington goes severely off course. It heads due north for a while, then flies due south and gets back on course. [see USA Today’s Flight 77 flight path] It was off course by around 15 miles, and stayed off course for about five minutes. According to regulations a fighter should have scrambled to see what was going on.

(After 8:46 A.M.) “During the hour or so that American Airlines Flight 77 was under the control of hijackers, up to the moment it struck the west side of the Pentagon, military officials in a command center on the east side of the [Pentagon] were urgently talking to law enforcement and air traffic control officials about what to do.” [New York Times, 9/15/01] Since the Pentagon was struck around 9:41, this means that shortly after the first signs of trouble, the military knew that Flight 77 was hijacked, even though, supposedly, NORAD is not notified until 9:24.

(Between 8:46 – 8:55 A.M.) A passenger on Flight 77, Barbara Olson, calls her husband, Solicitor General Theodore Olson at the Justice Department. He is watching the WTC news on TV. She tells him, ”they had box cutters and knives. They rounded up the passengers at the back of the plane.” She asks him, “What should I tell the pilot to do?” She gets cuts off, he calls the Justice Department’s command center to alert them of the hijacking. She calls back and says the plane is turning around. [no time marker, Toronto Sun, 9/16/01, Boston Globe, 11/23/01, “by 9:25,” Washington Post, 9/21/01] She appears to have been the only person on this flight to have been able to call someone on the ground.

8:52 A.M. Two F-15’s take off from Otis ANG Base, six minutes after being ordered to go after Flight 11, which has already crashed. [8:52, NORAD, 9/18/01, 8:52, CNN, 9/17/01, 8:53, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 8:52, Washington Post, 9/15/01] This is 38 minutes after flight controllers lost contact with the plane. They go after Flight 175 instead. According to Maj. Gen. Paul Weaver, director of the Air National Guard, “the pilots flew ‘like a scalded ape,’ topping 500 mph but were unable to catch up to the airliner.” [Dallas Morning News, 9/15/01] NORAD Major Gen. Larry Arnold says they were headed straight for New York City and traveling about 1100 to 1200 mph. [Slate, 1/16/02] “An F-15 departing from Otis can reach New York City in 10 to 12 minutes, according to an Otis spokeswoman.” [Cape Cod Times, 9/16/01] According to Lt. Col. Timothy Duffy, one of the pilots, before takeoff, a fellow officer had told him “This looks like the real thing.” He says, “It just seemed wrong. I just wanted to get there. I was in full-blower all the way.” A NORAD commander has said the planes were stocked with extra fuel as well. [Aviation Week and Space Technology, 6/3/02] Full-blower is very rare – it means the fighters are going as fast as they can go. F-15’s can travel over 1875 mph. [Air Force News, 7/30/97] An at average speed of 1600 mph, they would have reached New York City in seven minutes – 8:59. An at average speed of 1125 mph, they would have reached it in 10 minutes – 9:02 – still before Flight 175 crashes. Yet according to the NORAD timeline, these planes take about 19 minutes to reach New York City – less than 600 mph. Why so slow??

(8:56 A.M.) According to the New York Times, by this time (if not earlier), it is clear Flight 77 has gone missing. Yet the same newspaper points out NORAD is not notified about it for another 28 minutes! [New York Times, 10/16/01]

(9:01 A.M.) Bush later makes the following statement. “And I was sitting outside the classroom waiting to go in, and I saw an airplane hit the tower — the TV was obviously on, and I used to fly myself, and I said, ‘There’s one terrible pilot. It must have been a horrible accident.’ But I was whisked off there — I didn’t have much time to think about it.” [CNN, 12/4/01] “When we walked into the classroom, I had seen this plane fly into the first building.” [White House, 1/5/02] Given that there actually was no film footage of the first attack on TV until much later (and no footage of the plane actually hitting the tower), isn’t this a clear lie to make it seem he didn’t know what was happening? By 8:38, NORAD knew that Flight 11 was hijacked, and by 8:43, they knew Flight 175 was hijacked. The New York Times points out that they also probably knew Flight 77 was hijacked a few minutes after 8:48. [New York Times, 9/15/01] He’s had time to think about it – he’s been briefed by his National Security Advisor on the situation. So by this time Bush certainly knew two planes were hijacked and headed towards New York City, and probably knew of a third hijacking. Yet he can only think “There’s one terrible pilot”?

9:03 A.M. Flight 175, hits the south tower, 2 World Trade Center. [AP, 8/19/02] F-15 fighter jets from Otis Air National Guard Base are still 71 miles or eight minutes away. [9:02, CNN, 9/17/01, 9:02, NORAD, 9/18/01, 9:02, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 9:03, New York Times, 9/12/01, 9:03 (based on seismic data), New York Times, 9/12/01, 9:03, Guardian, 10/17/01, 9:03, CNN, 9/12/01, 9:03, AP, 8/19/02, 9:03, Newsday, 9/10/02, 9:03, USA Today, 9/3/02, 9:05, MSNBC, 9/22/01, 9:05, Washington Post, 1/27/02, 9:02:54, New York Times, 9/11/02, 9:02:54, seismic records] This is about 23 minutes after NORAD notified, 43 minutes after air traffic control lost contact with pilots. The Otis Air National Guard Base is 188 miles from New York City. According to NORAD’s timeline, fighters left Otis 11 minutes earlier. If they were still 70 miles away, then that means they must have been traveling about 650 mph, when the top speed for an F-15 is 1875 mph! [BBC Fact Files]

(After 9:03 A.M.) A few minutes after 9:03, the Secret Service calls Andrews Air Force Base, located 10 miles from Washington. They are notified to get F-16’s armed and ready to fly. Missiles are still being loaded onto the F-16’s when the Pentagon is hit over half an hour later. [Aviation Week and Space Technology, 9/9/02] The problem with this account is that prior to 9/11, The District of Columbia Air National Guard (located at Andrews) had a publicly stated mission “to provide combat units in the highest possible state of readiness.” Shortly after 9/11 this mission statement on its website is changed, so it merely has a “vision” to “provide peacetime command and control and administrative mission oversight to support customers and DCANG units in achieving the highest levels of readiness.” [DCANG Home Page (before and after the change)]

(After 9:03 A.M.) Minutes after the second WTC crash at 9:03, military base commanders from all over the US are calling NORAD and volunteering to scramble planes. The commander at Syracuse, New York says he can get a plane in the air armed with cannon in ten minutes. Yet none of these planes are put in the air until after the last hijacked plane crashes over an hour later. [Aviation Week and Space Technology, 6/3/02

9:09 A.M. Supposedly, NORAD orders F-16’s at Langley Air Force Base, Virginia, on battle stations alert. Yet the order to scramble won’t come till 9:27 or so, and they won’t take off until 9:30. Around this time, the FAA command center reports 11 aircraft either not in communication with FAA facilities, or flying unexpected routes. [Aviation Week and Space Technology, 6/3/02] So why aren’t planes scrambled immediately, at 9:09 or even before, to find out what’s going on?

9:10 AM: Major General Paul Weaver states Flight 77 came back on the (radar) scope at 9:10 in West Virginia. [Dallas Morning News, 9/15/01] Another report states the military was notified of Flight 77 several minutes after 9:03. [Washington Post, 9/15/01]

9:16 A.M. The FAA informs NORAD that Flight 93 may have been hijacked. No fighters are scrambled in specific response, now or later (there is the possibility some fighters sent after Flight 77 later headed towards Flight 93). Although this is what CNN learned from NORAD, it’s not clear why NORAD claims it was hijacked at this time (NORAD’s own timeline inexplicably fails to say when the FAA told them about the hijack, the only flight they fail to provide this data for). [CNN, 9/17/01, NORAD, 9/18/01] Note that the crash of Flight 77 is still 25 minutes away. F-16 fighters from Langley Air Force Base could have reached Washington in six minutes if they traveled at 1300 mph (maximum speed for an F-16 is 1500 mph). Even if the fighters were traveling slower, and it took some minutes to get the plane off the ground, they still could easily have made it to Washington in those 25 minutes and prevented the Flight 77 crash.

9:24 A.M. The FAA notifies NORAD that Flight 77 “may” have been hijacked and appears to be headed towards Washington. [9:24, NORAD, 9/18/01, 9:24, AP, 8/19/02, 9:25, CNN, 9/17/01, 9:25, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 9:25, Guardian, 10/17/01] This notification is 34 MINUTES after flight control lost contact with the plane and well after two planes have crashed, and even then the FAA only says “may”? Is such a long delay believable, or has that information been doctored to cover the lack of any scrambling of fighters? Additionally, with the exception of Vice President Cheney and possibly a few others, no one is evacuated in Washington until after the Pentagon crash. A Pentagon spokesman says, “The Pentagon was simply not aware that this aircraft was coming our way.” Even Defense Secretary Rumsfeld and his top aides in the Pentagon remain unaware of any danger up to the moment of impact 17 minutes later. [Newsday, 9/23/01] Yet since at least the Flight 11 crash, “military officials in a command center [the National Military Command Center] on the east side of the [Pentagon] were urgently talking to law enforcement and air traffic control officials about what to do.” [New York Times, 9/15/01] Is it believable that everyone in the Pentagon outside of that command center, even the Secretary of Defense, would remain uninformed?

(9:27 A.M.) Tom Burnett calls his wife Deena and says, “I’m on United Flight 93 from Newark to San Francisco. The plane has been hijacked. We are in the air. They’ve already knifed a guy. There is a bomb on board. Call the FBI.” Deena connects to emergency 911. [9:27, “she scribbled down what Tom told her and noted the time,” The book Among the Heroes, 8/02, p. 107, ABC News, 9/12/01, “within minutes” of 9:28, MSNBC, 7/30/02, “She recalls it was around 6:20 A.M. — 9:20 Eastern time,” Pittsburgh Post-Gazette, 10/28/01, “shortly after” Jeremy Glick’s call, Toronto Sun, 9/16/01] His wife Deena wonders if the call might have been before the cockpit was taken over, because he spoke quickly and quietly as if he was being watched. He also had a headset like phone operators use, so he could have made the call unnoticed. Note that original versions of this conversation appear to have been censored. The most recent account has the phone call ending with, “We are in the air. The plane has been hijacked. They already knifed a guy. One of them has a gun. They’re saying there is a bomb onboard. Please call the authorities.” [The book Among the Heroes, 8/02, p. 107] The major difference from earlier accounts is the mention of a gun. The call wasn’t recorded, but Deena’s call immediately afterwards to 911 was, and she states on that, “They just knifed a passenger and there are guns on the plane.” [The book Among the Heroes, 8/02, p. 108] This is the first of over 30 additional phone calls by passengers inside the plane. [MSNBC, 7/30/02]

(9:27 A.M.) NORAD orders three F-16 fighters scrambled from Langley Air Force Base in Virginia to intercept Flight 77. Langley is 129 miles from Washington. Ready aircraft at Andrews Air Force Base, 15 miles away, are not scrambled. [Newsday, 9/23/01, 9:24, NORAD, 9/18/01, 9:27, CNN, 9/17/01, 9:25, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 9:35, CNN, 9/17/01, 9:35, Washington Post, 9/15/01] Note that according to the official NORAD timeline, they ordered the F-16’s scrambled the same minute they were told about the hijacking. A rare example of competence. But earlier, according to their own timeline, they waited six minutes before scrambling fighters after Flight 11. Why? Flight 77 had supposedly been missing from the radar screen since 8:56. Why wait 31 minutes to send a plane and find out where it is?

(9:29 A.M.) Bush leaves the elementary school classroom, and as he leaves, makes a few brief comments to reporters, calling the crashes “an apparent terrorist attack on our country.” The talk occurs at exactly the time and place his publicly announced advance schedule planned they would – making Bush a possible terrorist target. [9:24, MSNBC, 9/22/01, 9:28, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 9:30, CNN, 9/12/01, 9:30, New York Times, 9/12/01, speech begins at 9:29:55 according to an ABC timing device, advanced schedule 9:30 in Federal News Service, 9/10/01]

9:30 A.M. The F-16’s scrambled towards Flight 77 get airborne. [9:30, NORAD, 9/18/01, 9:35, Washington Post, 9/12/01] If the NORAD departure time is correct, the F-16’s would have to travel slightly over 700 mph to reach Washington before Flight 77 does. The maximum speed of an F-16 is 1500 mph. [AP, 6/16/00] Even at traveling 1300 mph, these planes could have reached Washington in six minutes – well before any claim of when Flight 77 crashed. Yet they obviously don’t.

(9:30 A.M.) The hijackers make an announcement to the passengers in Flight 77, telling them to phone their families as they are “all going to die”. They also told the passengers that they were going to hit the White House. [“When they took over the controls,” Sunday Herald, 9/16/01, “around 9:30,” Cox News, 10/21/01] Given this announcement, why are there almost no phone calls from this flight?

(9:32 A.M.) Secret Service agents burst into Vice President Cheney’s White House office. They carry him under his arms – nearly lifting him off the ground – and propel him down the steps into the White House basement and through a long tunnel towards an underground bunker. [9:32, Washington Post, 1/27/02, shortly after Bush’s speech at 9:30, CBS, 9/11/02] Why didn’t this happen to Bush? Was he meant to remain visibly out of the loop? Another article claims this happened to Cheney at 9:05, exactly when Bush was being told of the second WTC hit. [Telegraph, 12/16/01] If that’s true, the fact that Cheney gets moved to safety and Bush doesn’t is even stranger.

9:33 A.M. According to the New York Times, Flight 77 was lost at 8:56 when it turned off its transponder, and stayed lost until now. Washington air traffic control sees a fast moving blip on their radar at this time and sends a warning to Dulles Airport in Washington. [New York Times, 10/16/01] Is it conceivable that an airplane could be lost inside US air space for 37 minutes? One doesn’t need a transponder signal to get a radar signal!

(9:41 A.M.) Flight 77 crashes into the Pentagon. The section of the Pentagon hit consists mainly of newly renovated, unoccupied offices. Approximately 125 are later determined killed or missing. The surface to air missiles presumably surrounding the Pentagon are not fired in defense. Fighters are supposedly still 105 miles or 12 minutes away. [Newsday, 9/23/01, NORAD, 9/18/01, 9:37, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 9:38, CNN, 9/17/01, 9:38, Guardian, 10/17/01, 9:39, Washington Post, 1/27/02, 9:40, AP, 8/19/02, 9:43, CNN, 9/12/01, 9:43, MSNBC, 9/22/01, 9:43, MSNBC, 9/3/02, 9:43, New York Times, 9/12/01, 9:45, Boston Globe, 11/23/01] NORAD states the fighters took off from Langley at 9:30, 129 miles away, yet when Flight 77 crashes they are still 105 miles away. [NORAD, 9/18/01] So that means they must have been flying at an average of about 130 mph! Even if one uses the NORAD crash time of 9:37 (which we know is untrue), that still averages to only about 205 mph!

9:58 A.M. A man calls 911 from a bathroom on Flight 93, crying, “We’re being hijacked, we’re being hijacked!” [Toronto Sun, 9/16/01], then reports that “he heard some sort of explosion and saw white smoke coming from the plane and we lost contact with him.” [ABC News, 9/11/01, AP, 9/12/01] One minute after the call began, the line goes dead. [Pittsburgh Channel, 12/6/01] The mentions of smoke and explosions of the recording of his call are now denied. [The book Among the Heroes, 8/02, p. 264] The person who took Felt’s call is not allowed to speak to the media. [Mirror, 9/13/02] If that’s true, why is this important fact only denied now, when the FBI got a copy of the recording on 9/11, and let the media report the smoke and explosion story for months?

9:59 A.M. The south tower of the World Trade Center collapses. It was hit by Flight 175 at 9:02. [9:50, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 9:59, MSNBC, 9/22/01, 9:59, AP, 8/19/02, New York Times, 9/12/01, 10:05, CNN, 9/12/01, 10:05, New York Times, 9/12/01, 9:59:04, seismic records]

(Between 10:00-10:06 A.M.) During this time, there apparently are no calls from Flight 93. The only exception is Richard Makely, who was listening to the Jeremy Glick open phone line after Glick went to attack the hijackers. A reporter summarizes Makely explaining that, “The silence lasted two minutes, then there was screaming. More silence, followed by more screams. Finally, there was a mechanical sound, followed by nothing.” [San Francisco Chronicle, 9/17/01] Near the end of the cockpit voice recording, loud wind sounds can be heard. [CNN, 4/19/02, The book Among the Heroes, 8/02, p. 270-271]

(Before 10:06 A.M.) CBS television reports at some point before the crash that two F-16 fighters are tailing Flight 93. [Independent, 8/13/02] Shortly after 9/11, a flight controller in New Hampshire ignores a ban on controllers speaking to the media, and it is reported he claims “that an F-16 fighter closely pursued Flight 93… the F-16 made 360-degree turns to remain close to the commercial jet.” “He must’ve seen the whole thing,” the employee said of the F-16 pilot’s view of Flight 93’s crash. [AP, 9/13/01, Nashua Telegraph, 9/13/01]

10:10 AM: Flight 93 crashes in Pennsylvania. [42 minutes after contact was lost][CNN, 9/12/02]

10:28 A.M. The World Trade Center’s north tower collapses. It was hit by Flight 11 at 8:46. [10:28, MSNBC, 9/22/01, 10:28, CNN, 9/12/01, 10:28, New York Times, 9/12/01, 10:28, AP, 8/19/02, 10:28, New York Times, 9/12/01, 10:29, Washington Post, 9/12/01, 10:28:31, seismic records]

10:32 A.M. Cheney calls Bush and tells him of a threat to Air Force One. He is told it would take between 40 minutes and 90 minutes to get a protective fighter escort up to Air Force One. [Washington Post, 1/27/02] This event, if it happened at all, is highly bizarre. For one, why wouldn’t Air Force One already have a fighter escort, and why would it take so long for new planes to arrive? There already are fighters flying over Washington since well before 10:00.

5:20 PM: Building 7 of the World Trade Center collapses. [CNN, 9/12/01] Though the media claims fires brought the building down, the building’s owner Larry Silverstein later recounts the story of the collapse of this 47-story skyscraper in a PBS documentary America Rebuilds, “I remember getting a call from the fire department commander…I said…maybe the smartest thing to do is to pull it. And they made that decision to pull, and then we watched the building collapse.” Over 2,000 architects and engineers later claim that contrary to the U.S. government’s official story, it must have been controlled demolition. [PBS Documentary, 2nd PBS Documentary, more]

September 11, 2001 (E): At about 9:00 A.M., a strange incident occurs aboard United Airlines Flight 23, scheduled to fly from New York to Los Angeles. After boarding, the crew tells the passengers that the flight has been canceled. Three Middle Eastern men on board refuse to get off the plane. They argue with a member of the flight crew. Security is called, but before security arrives, the men escape. [CBS, 9/14/01] It may not be the only aborted hijacking that day (see September 19, 2001).

September 11, 2001 (F): It is later revealed that only hours after the 9/11 attacks, a US “shadow government” is formed. Initially deployed “on the fly,” executive directives on government continuity in the face of a crisis dating back to the Reagan administration are put into effect. Approximately 100 mid-level officials are moved to underground bunkers and stay there 24 hours a day. Officials rotate in and out on a 90-day cycle. When its existence is revealed, some controversy arises because of the exclusion of any Democrats from it. In fact, top Congressional Democrats had never even heard of it until journalists broke the story. [Washington Post, 3/2/02, CBS, 3/2/02]

September 11, 2001 (G): A few hours after the attacks, German intelligence intercepts a phone conversation between followers of bin Laden that leads the FBI to search frantically for two more teams of suicide hijackers, according to US and German officials. The Germans overhear the terrorists refer to “the 30 people traveling for the operation.” The FBI scours flight manifests and any other clues for more conspirators still at large. [New York Times, 9/29/01] Two days later, authorities claim to have identified teams that total as many as 50 infiltrators who supported or carried out the strikes. About forty are accounted for as dead or in custody; ten are missing. They also believe a total of 27 suspected terrorists received some form of pilot training. This corresponds with many analyses that the attacks would have needed a large support network. [Los Angeles Times, 9/13/01]Yet only one person, Moussaoui, has been identified and charged as an accomplice, and a report in October suggests no one else arrested has been connected to the 9/11 attacks (see October 20, 2001). What happened to the rest of the 40 or 50?

September 11, 2001 (H): A National Public Radio correspondent states: “I spoke with Congressman Ike Skelton – a Democrat from Missouri and a member of the Armed Services Committee – who said that just recently the director of the CIA warned that there could be an attack – an imminent attack – on the United States of this nature. So this is not entirely unexpected.” [NPR, 9/11/01] This dramatically contradicts what CIA Director Tenet told the American public.

September 11, 2001 (I): Senator Orrin Hatch (R) tells the Associated Press that the US government was monitoring bin Laden’s communications electronically, and overheard two bin Laden aides celebrating the successful terrorist attack. [AP, 9/12/01] Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld publicly denounces the report, not as untrue, but as an unauthorized release of classified information. [Department of Defense news briefing, 9/12/01] The head of the NSA says bin Laden (living in a cave in Afghanistan) “has better technology” than the US ($30 billion annual intelligence budget). [Sunday Herald, 9/16/01] Why has the mainstream media not explored the implications that the CIA and FBI could monitor the private communications of al-Qaeda on the days up to and including 9/11?

September 11, 2001 (J): Two of Atta’s bags from an early flight from Portland are not loaded onto Flight 11 and are discovered. They contain a handheld electronic flight computer, a simulator procedures manual for Boeing 757 and 767 aircraft, two videotapes relating to “air tours” of the Boeing 757 and 747 aircraft, a slide-rule flight calculator, a copy of the Koran, Atta’s passport, his international driver’s license, a religious cassette tape, airline uniforms, a letter of recommendation, “education related documentation,” a note to other hijackers on how to mentally prepare for the hijacking, and Atta’s will (written in 1996). [AP, 10/5/01, Sydney Morning Herald, 9/15/01, Boston Globe, 9/18/01, Independent, 9/29/01, (see also an FBI affidavit that omits certain items, like the uniforms and the how-to note)] A New Yorker reporter later writes, “many of the investigators believe that some of the initial clues that were uncovered about the terrorists’ identities and preparations, such as flight manuals, were meant to be found. A former high-level intelligence official told me, ‘Whatever trail was left was left deliberately–for the FBI to chase.'” [New Yorker, 10/1/01] Why would Atta have brought his will onto a plane he knew would be destroyed? Why would the airline uniforms be where they couldn’t be used in the hijacking? In fact, why bring anything at all unless it is to leave it behind and send a message?

September 11, 2001 (K): TV news coverage on 9/11 repeatedly shows images of Palestinians rejoicing over the 9/11 attack. According to Mark Crispin Miller, a Professor of Media Studies at New York University who investigated the issue, the footage was filmed during the funeral of nine people killed the day before by Israeli authorities. He said “to show it without explaining the background, and to show it over and over again is to make propaganda for the war machine and is irresponsible.” [Australian, 9/27/01]

September 11, 2001 (L): Five Israelis are arrested for “puzzling behavior” related to the WTC attacks. They are arrested around 4:30 P.M. after having filmed the burning WTC from the roof of their company’s building near Liberty State Park, then shouting in what was interpreted as cries of joy and mockery. They were spotted by a neighbor who called the police and the FBI. The police tracked them down in a van with the words “Urban Moving Systems” written on the side. [Bergen Record, 9/12/01, Ha’aretz, 9/17/01] One man was found with $4,700 in cash hidden in his sock, another had two passports on him, and a box cutter was found in the van. [ABC News, 6/21/02] Investigators say that “There are maps of the city in the car with certain places highlighted… It looked like they’re hooked in with this. It looked like they knew what was going to happen.” [Bergen Record, 9/12/01] One of these Israelis later says, “Our purpose was to document the event.” [ABC News, 6/21/02] The FBI later concludes at least two are Mossad agents, and that all were on a Mossad surveillance mission. The FBI interrogates them for weeks. [Forward, 3/15/02] They are held on immigration violation charges and released 71 days later. [ABC News, 6/21/02]

September 11, 2001 (M): Six air traffic controllers who dealt with two of the hijacked airliners make a tape recording describing the events, but the tape is later destroyed by a supervisor without anyone making a transcript or even listening to it. [Washington Post, 5/6/04, New York Times, 5/6/04]

September 11, 2001 (N): Did the Air Force send up planes after the hijacked aircraft? The Air Force won’t say. It says they keep about 20 F-15 and F-16 fighters on duty with Air National Guards along the nation’s coastline, ready to inspect unknown aircraft entering U.S. airspace. “We can scramble and be airborne in a matter of minutes,” said an Air Force spokesperson. Some airline pilots are wondering whether the FAA did enough to try to prevent the crashes. [Wall Street Journal, 09/14/01]

September 11-16, 2001: Andrews Air Force Base is 10 miles from Washington, DC, and Langley Air Force Base in 130 miles away. The official story is that there were no fighters at Andrews so none took off from there to intercept the hijacked planes, but it takes a few days for the media to come around to that point of view:
1) A few minutes after the Pentagon was hit, “fighter jets scrambled from Andrews Air Force Base…” [Denver Post, 9/11/01]
2) “It was after the attack on the Pentagon that the Air Force then decided to scramble F-16’s out of the DC National Guard Andrews Air Force Base…” [NBC Nightly News, 9/11/01]
3) “Air defense around Washington is provided mainly by fighter planes from Andrews Air Force Base in Maryland near the District of Columbia border. The D.C. Air National Guard is also based there and equipped with F-16 fighter planes, a National Guard spokesman said. But the fighters took to the skies over Washington only after the devastating attack on the Pentagon…” [San Diego Union Tribune, 9/12/01]
4) “Within minutes of the attack, American forces around the world were put on one of their highest states of alert – Defcon 3, just two notches short of all-out war – and F-16’s from Andrews Air Force Base were in the air over Washington DC.” [Telegraph, 9/16/01]
5) “Andrews Air Force Base, home to Air Force One, is only 15 miles away from the Pentagon, but it had no fighters assigned to it.” [USA Today, 9/16/01]
6) “The District of Columbia National Guard maintained fighter planes at Andrews Air Force Base, only about 15 miles from the Pentagon, but those planes were not on alert and not deployed.” [USA Today, 9/16/01]
7) “… As part of its dual mission, the 113th provides capable and ready response forces for the District of Columbia in the event of a natural disaster or civil emergency.” “In the best tradition of the Marine Corps, a ‘few good men and women’ support two combat-ready reserve units at Andrews AFB.” [DC Military website]
8) The District of Columbia Air National Guard website is changed shortly after 9/11. Previously its mission was “to provide combat units in the highest possible state of readiness.” Afterwards, it was changed to read that the Guard has a “vision” to “provide peacetime command and control and administrative mission oversight to support customers and DCANG units in achieving the highest levels of readiness.” [DCANG Home Page (before and after the change)]

September 12, 2001: The passport of hijacker Satam Al Suqami is found a few blocks from the WTC. [ABC News, 9/12/01, ABC News, 9/16/01] What are the odds that this passport became separated from al Suqami or his luggage, and somehow escaped the fireball that consumed the airplane, then the collapse of the buildings? The Guardian says, “the idea that Atta’s passport had escaped from that inferno unsinged [tests] the credulity of the staunchest supporter of the FBI’s crackdown on terrorism.” [Guardian, 3/19/02]. Note the passport did not belong to Atta, as is sometimes claimed.

September 13, 2001: A Pentagon official, when asked if the US shot down Flight 93 (the flight that crashed in Pennsylvania), says “We have not ruled out that.” This is one of many quotes from officials in the first days that fail to rule out that 93 was shot down. [ABC News, 9/13/01, Pittsburgh Tribune Review, 9/14/01] On the same day, a flight controller in Nashua claims an F-16 fighter closely pursued Flight 93 until it crashed in Pennsylvania. “Although controllers don’t have complete details of the Air Force’s chase of the Boeing 757, they have learned the F-16 made 360-degree turns to remain close to the commercial jet. ‘He must’ve seen the whole thing,’ the employee said of the F-16 pilot’s view of Flight 93’s crash'” (Flight controllers have been ordered not to speak publicly about 9/11, but somehow this slipped out). [AP, 9/13/01, Nashua Telegraph, 9/13/01] Cheney later tells the Washington Post that he had ordered a plane to shoot down Flight 93, and confirmed that order two more times as the distance between the fighter and the airliner grew closer. So, supposedly, when Flight 93 crashed, Bush had to ask, “Did we shoot it down or did it crash?” [Washington Post, 1/27/02] If the plane was shot down after the passengers had taken it over, would that have looked so bad that one might want to cover it up?

September 13-19, 2001: Members of bin Laden’s family and important Saudis are “driven or flown under FBI supervision to a secret assembly point in Texas, and then to Washington from where they left the country on a private charter plane when airports reopened three days after the attacks.” The flights to Texas and Washington occur before the national air ban is lifted. Top White House officials personally approve these evacuations. [New York Times, 9/4/03, Boston Globe, 9/20/01, New York Times, 9/30/01, more] The Tampa Tribune reports that on September 13, a Lear jet takes off from Tampa, Florida, carrying a Saudi Arabian prince, the son of the Saudi defense minister Prince Sultan, as well as the son of a Saudi army commander, and flies to Lexington, Kentucky, where the Saudis own racehorses. They then fly a private 747 out of the country. Multiple 747s with Arabic lettering on their sides are already there, suggesting another secret assembly point. The Tampa flight left from a private Raytheon hangar [Tampa Tribune, 10/5/01] (Raytheon’s name keeps coming up in relation to 9/11 – for instance, see September 25, 2001). There have been conflicting reports as to whether the FBI interviewed these people before they left the country. Osama bin Laden’s half brother, Abdullah bin Laden, stated that even a month after 9/11, his only contact with the FBI was a brief phone call. [Boston Globe, 9/21/01, New Yorker, 11/5/01] An earlier FBI attempt to investigate Abdullah was obstructed by higher-ups (see 1996).

September 14, 2001 (A): The two “black boxes” for Flight 77 are found. [PBS Newshour, 9/14/01] FBI Director Mueller will later say that the boxes provided altitude, speed, headings and other information, but the voice recorder contained “nothing useful.” [CBS, 2/23/02]

September 14, 2001 (B): The Director of the Air National Guard explains why jets failed to scramble towards the hijacked aircraft for so long. He says that before 1997, 100 bases defended the US, but since then the number was reduced to seven, with only two fighter planes at each base defending the entire country from external threats. However, numerous air force bases on the East Coast alone, including bases in Westfield, Massachusetts, Syracuse, New York, Hartford, Connecticut and Andrews, Virginia, claim they have battle ready fighters on alert 24 hours a day. All of these bases were better positioned to respond to the hijacker airplanes than the bases ultimately chosen. Some of these bases have websites that get changed after 9/11, erasing claims that they have battle-ready fighters on alert. In 1999, when golfer Payne Stewart’s plane went off course, fighters were scrambled from four different bases (none of the official seven) and reached his plane in 20 minutes. There are numerous other examples of fighter scramblings since 1997 that seem to contradict the “only seven bases” story. [ABC News, 10/25/99, Dallas Morning News, 9/16/01]

September 14, 2001 (C): Some gruesome remains are discovered in the WTC remains. Investigators find a pair of severed hands bound together with plastic handcuffs on a nearby building. They are believed to have belonged to a stewardess. [Newsday, 9/15/01] There are reports of whole rows of seats with passengers in them being found, as well as much of the cockpit of one of the planes, complete with the body of one of the hijackers, and the body of another stewardess, whose hands were tied with wire. [Ananova, 9/13/01, New York Times, 9/15/01] Yet many months later, AP reports that “no remains have been linked to the 10 hijackers who crashed two airliners into the World Trade Center” contradicting the claim that a hijacker’s body was found. [AP, 8/16/02] While all these bodies and plane parts are supposedly found, not one of the four black boxes for these two airplanes are ever found. A National Transportation Safety Board spokesman says: “It’s extremely rare that we don’t get the recorders back. I can’t recall another domestic case in which we did not recover the recorders.” [CBS, 2/23/02] The black boxes are considered “nearly indestructible,” are placed in the safest parts of the aircraft, and are designed to survive impacts much greater than the WTC impact. They can withstand heat of up to 2,000 degrees Fahrenheit for one hour, and can withstand an impact of an incredible 3,400 G’s. [ABC News, 9/17/01]

September 14, 2001 (D): “Forty-five minutes. That’s how long American Airlines Flight 77 meandered through the air headed for the White House, its flight plan abandoned, its radar beacon silent… Who was watching in those 45 minutes? ‘That’s a question that more and more people are going to ask,’ said one controller in Miami. ‘What the hell went on here? Was anyone doing anything about it? Just as a national defense thing, how are they able to fly around and no one go after them?”’ [Miami Herald, 9/14/01] In the year since this article, there has been only one other US article questioning slow response times, which noted the strange lack of coverage. [Slate, 1/16/02] Why haven’t “more and more people” in the media questioned this?

September 15, 2001: CIA Director Tenet briefs Bush “with a briefcase stuffed with top-secret documents and plans, in many respects the culmination of more than four years of work on Osama bin Laden, the al-Qaeda network and worldwide terrorism.” In his briefing, Tenet advocates “a strategy to create a northern front, closing the safe haven [of Afghanistan].” Tenet also explains that the CIA had begun working with a number of tribal leaders to stir up resistance in the south the previous year. Tenet then turns to a top secret document called the “Worldwide Attack Matrix,” which describes covert operations in 80 countries that are either underway or now recommended. The actions range from routine propaganda to lethal covert action in preparation for military attacks. By comparison, the military, which is the normal planner of military campaigns, is caught relatively unprepared and defers to the CIA plans. [Washington Post, 1/31/02]

September 15-17, 2001: A series of major media articles state that several of the 9/11 hijackers may have had training in US military bases. [Los Angeles Times, 9/15/01, New York Times, 9/15/01, Newsweek, 9/15/01, Washington Post, 9/16/01] Ahmad Alnami, Ahmed Alghamdi, and Saeed Alghamdi even listed the Naval Air Station in Pensacola, Florida as their permanent address on their driver’s licenses. [Newsweek, 9/15/01]. Hamza Alghamdi is also connected to the Pensacola base. [Washington Post, 9/16/01] Saeed Alghamdi also attended the Defense Language Institute in Monterey, California. Abdulaziz Alomari attended Brooks Air Force Base Aerospace Medical School in San Antonio, Texas. [Gannett News Service, 9/17/01] “Air Force spokesman Col. Ken McClellan said a man named Mohamed Atta — which the FBI has identified as one of the five hijackers of American Airlines Flight 11 — had once attended the International Officer’s School at Maxwell/Gunter Air Force Base in Montgomery, Ala.” [Gannett News Service, 9/17/01] Atta graduated from the US International Officers School at Maxwell Air Force Base, Alabama. Abdulaziz Alomari graduated from the Aerospace Medical School at Brooks Air Force Base in San Antonio, Texas. The media drops the story after the Air Force makes a not-very-definitive statement, saying that while the names are similar, “we are probably not talking about the same people.” [Washington Post, 9/16/01] However, the military fails to provide any information about the individuals whose names supposedly match those of the alleged hijackers, making it impossible to confirm or refute the story.

September 16-23, 2001: Reports appear in several news media that some of the people the US says were 9/11 hijackers are actually still alive. Pilot Waleed Al Shehri is one of the men the FBI said crashed a plane into the WTC. His photograph was released, and he acknowledges that he is indeed the Waleed Al Shehri named by the FBI. But, he says, he left the US last year and became a pilot with Saudi Arabian airlines. [BBC, 9/23/01] The Saudi government insists that five of the Saudis mentioned are still alive. [New York Times, 9/21/01] On September 20, FBI Director Mueller says: “We have several others that are still in question. The investigation is ongoing, and I am not certain as to several of the others.” [Newsday, 9/21/01] Police have even determined who sold at least two of the hijackers their fake ID’s. [BBC, 8/1/02] On September 20, The Times of London reported, “Five of the alleged hijackers have emerged, alive, innocent and astonished to see their names and photographs appearing on satellite television…The hijackers were using stolen identities, and investigators are studying the possibility that the entire suicide squad consisted of impostors.” [Times of London, 9/20/01] Briefly, the press took this story to heart. For instance, a story in the Observer on September 23 put the names of hijackers like Saeed Alghamdi in quotation marks. [Observer, 9/23/01] But the story died down after the initial reports, and it was hardly noticed when Mueller stated on November 2, 2001: “We at this point definitely know the 19 hijackers who were responsible,” and claimed that they were sticking with the names and photos released in late September. [AP, 11/02/02] Yet while many of the names are known to be wrong, these are the same names that appear much later in the 2004 9/11 Commission Report. [9/11 Commission Report – see graphic slightly over half way down the page] Perhaps embarrassing facts might come out if we knew their real names, such as more terrorists who studied at military bases or were on watch lists.

September 17, 2001 (A): Congressman Dana Rohrabacher (R), who claims to have made many secret trips into Afghanistan and even fought with the mujaheddin, describes to Congress a missed opportunity to capture bin Laden. He claims that “a few years ago,” he was contacted by someone he knew and trusted from the 1980’s Afghan war, who claimed he could pinpoint bin Laden’s location. Rohrabacher passed this information to the CIA, but found the informant wasn’t contacted. After some weeks, Rohrabacher used his influence to set up a meeting with agents in the CIA, NSA and FBI. Yet even then the informant wasn’t contacted, until weeks later in a “disinterested” way. Rohrabacher concludes “that our intelligence services knew about the location of bin Laden several times but were not permitted to attack him… because of decisions made by people higher up.” [Speech to the House of Representatives, 9/17/01]

September 17, 2001 (B): President Bush signs a document marked “TOP SECRET” that outlines a plan for going to war in Afghanistan. The document also directs the Pentagon to begin planning military options for an invasion of Iraq. Two days after Bush signs the document, the Defense Policy Board – with Rumsfeld in attendance – meets at the Pentagon and animatedly discusses the importance of ousting Saddam Hussein – a policy Richard Perle, chairman of the Defense Policy Board, had advocated in 1996 for the goal of “rebuilding Zionism” (see 1996 (B)). Iraq secretly becomes a “central focus” of the US’s counter-terrorism efforts over the next nine months, without much in the way of internal debate, public pronouncements or paper trail (see also September 2000 and April 2001). [Washington Post, 1/12/02]

September 19, 2001: The FBI claims that there were six hijacking teams on the morning of 9/11. [New York Times, 9/19/01, Guardian, 10/13/01] A different report claims investigators are privately saying eight. [Independent, 9/25/01] Authorities have identified teams that total as many as 50 infiltrators who supported or carried out the strikes. About 40 of the men have been accounted for. [Los Angeles Times, 9/13/01] Yet only one person, Moussaoui, is later charged. Reports like those below suggest there may have been as many as eight aborted flights, leading to a potential total of 12 hijackings:
1) Knives of the same type used in the successful hijackings were found taped to the backs of fold-down trays on a Continental Airlines flight from Newark. [Guardian, 9/19/01]
2 and 3) Knives and box cutters were found on two separate cancelled Delta Airlines planes later that day, one leaving Atlanta for Brussels and the other leaving from Boston. [Time, 9/22/01, Independent, 9/25/01]
4) Two men arrested on 9/11 may have lost their nerve on American Airlines Flight 1729 from Newark to San Antonio via Dallas that was scheduled to depart at 8:50, and was later forced to land in St. Louis. Alternately, they may have been planning an attack for September 15. [New York Times, 9/19/01]
5) There may have been an attempt to hijack United Airlines Flight 23 flying from Boston to Los Angeles around 9:00 A.M. Three Middle Eastern men angrily refused to get off the plane when it was canceled, then escaped security (see September 11, 2001 (E)).
6) A box-cutter knife was found under a seat cushion on American Airlines Flight 160, a 767 that would have flown from San Diego to New York on the morning of 9/11 but for the air ban. [Chicago Tribune, 9/23/01]
The Independent points out suspicions have been fueled “that staff at US airports may have played an active role in the conspiracy and helped the hijackers to circumvent airport security.” [Independent, 9/25/01]

September 21, 2001: The Pentagon has told broadcast news reporters that its security cameras did not capture the crash. The attack occurred close to the Pentagon’s heliport, an area that normally would be under 24-hour security surveillance, including video monitoring.” [Gertz File, 9/21/01] In a later report, an employee at a gas station across the street from the Pentagon that services only military personnel says the gas station’s security cameras should have recorded the moment of impact. However, he says, “I’ve never seen what the pictures looked like. The FBI was here within minutes and took the film.” [Richmond Times-Dispatch, 12/11/01] A later release of five tiny and grainy images of the crash from a Pentagon security camera shows the government’s claim that no security cameras captured the crash was untrue (see March 7, 2002). If there is nothing to hide about the Pentagon crash, why don’t they release the footage of it?

September 21 or 22, 2001: Omar al-Bayoumi, a Saudi citizen studying at Aston University Business School in Birmingham, Britain, is taken into custody by British authorities working with the FBI. [San Diego Union-Tribune, 10/27/01, Washington Post, 12/29/01] It has been claimed al-Bayoumi befriended hijackers Nawaf Alhazmi and Khalid Almihdhar in San Diego, California, and helped them socially and financially until moving to Britain two months before 9/11. [MSNBC, 11/27/02] At the time of the questioning, the FBI strongly suspects al-Bayoumi has financial connections to the Saudi royal family and may have given some of that money to the hijackers. However, the FBI accepts his story that he met Alhazmi and Almihdhar by coincidence and he is “released after a week without charge.” [Los Angeles Times, 11/24/02, Newsweek, 11/24/02] British intelligence officials are frustrated that the FBI failed to give them information that would have enabled them to keep al-Bayoumi in custody longer than the seven days allowed under British anti-terrorism laws. [San Diego Channel 10, 10/25/01] Al-Bayoumi returns to his studies at Aston and is still there two months later, and yet still is not rearrested. [Washington Post, 12/29/01] Another report says al-Bayoumi is living in Britain as of October 2002, [Newsweek, 10/29/02] but he disappears by the time he reenters the news a month later. Al-Bayoumi’s quick release is in sharp contrast to that of hundreds of US Muslims who are held anonymously for many months after 9/11 despite having no connections to terrorism of any kind (see October 20, 2001).

September 24, 2001: Fox News claims that up to 12 other Middle Eastern men dressed in pilot uniforms were on other flights scheduled to take off on the morning of 9/11. Hijackings on all these flights were foiled when an unexpected ban on new flights prevented them from taking off. An FBI source says they had been invited into the cockpits under the impression that they were guest pilots from other airlines. It is standard practice to give guest pilots the spare seat in the cockpit known as the jump seat. [Fox News, 9/24/01] Flight 93’s cockpit voice recording has apparently shown that “one of the four hijackers had been invited into the cockpit area before the flight took off.” Many pilot uniforms had gone missing prior to 9/11. Atta was given a guided tour of Boston’s Logan Airport the week before 9/11 when he turned up in a pilot uniform saying he was with Saudi Airlines. [Herald Sun, 9/25/01]

September 25, 2001: As details of the passengers on the four hijacked flights emerge, some are shown to have curious connections to the defense company Raytheon, and possibly its Global Hawk pilotless aircraft program (see 1998 and August 2001). Stanley Hall (Flight 77) was director of program management for Raytheon Electronics Warfare. One Raytheon colleague calls him “our dean of electronic warfare.” [AP, 9/25/01] Peter Gay (Flight 11) was Raytheon’s Vice President of Operations for Electronic Systems and had been on special assignment to a company office in El Segundo, Calif. [AP, 9/25/01] Raytheon’s El Segundo’s Electronic Systems division is one of two divisions making the Global Hawk. [ISR Journal, 3/02] Kenneth Waldie (Flight 11) was a senior quality control engineer for Raytheon’s electronic systems. David Kovalcin (Flight 11) was a senior mechanical engineer for Raytheon’s electronic systems. [CNN, 9/01] Herbert Homer (Flight 175) was a corporate executive working with the Department of Defense. [CNN, 9/01, Northeastern University Voice, 12/11/01] Raytheon employees with possible links to Global Hawk can be connected to three of the four flights? There may be more, since many of the passengers’ jobs and personal information have remained anonymous. A surprising number of passengers, especially on Flight 77, have military connections. [Chicago Tribune, 9/16/01] Could these Raytheon employees have known too much? Or is it possible they, along with others, were not even on the planes?

Late September 2001: Sibel Edmonds is hired as a Middle Eastern languages translator for the FBI. As she later tells CBS’s 60 Minutes, she immediately encounters a pattern of deliberate failure in her translation department. Her boss says, “Let the documents pile up so we can show it and say that we need more translators and expand the department.” She claims that if she wasn’t slowing down enough, her supervisor would delete her work. Meanwhile, FBI agents working on the 9/11 investigation would call and ask for urgently needed translations. Senator Charles Grassley (R) says of her charges, “She’s credible, and the reason I feel she’s very credible is because people within the FBI have corroborated a lot of her story.” He points out that the speed of such translation might make the difference between a terrorist bombing succeeding or failing. [CBS, 10/25/02, New York Post, 10/26/02] In January 2002, FBI officials tell government auditors that translator shortages have resulted in “the accumulation of thousands of hours of audio tapes and pages” of untranslated material. [Washington Post, 6/19/02] Edmonds has a whistleblower lawsuit against the FBI for these and other charges (see March 22, 2002).

October 2001-September 2002: Nine Army linguists, including six trained to speak Arabic, are dismissed from the military’s Defense Language Institute in Monterey, California, because they are gay. The military claims it is facing a critical shortage of translators and interpreters for the war on terrorism. [AP, 11/15/02]

October 2, 2001 (A): The “anti-terrorism” USA Patriot Act is introduced in Congress, but is not well received by all. One day later, Senate Majority Leader and future anthrax target Tom Daschle (D) says he doubts the Senate will take up this bill in the one-week timetable the administration wants. As head of the Senate, Daschle has great power to block or slow passage of the bill. [Washington Post, 10/3/01] On October 4, Senate Judiciary Committee Chairman and future anthrax target Patrick Leahy (D) accuses the Bush administration of reneging on an agreement on the anti-terrorist bill. Leahy is in a key position to block or slow the bill. [Washington Post, 10/4/01] The anthrax letters to Daschle and Leahy are sent out on October 9.

October 2, 2001 (B): A newspaper reveals that Atta kept an e-mail list so he could send out identical e-mails to everyone on the list. [Sun and Weekly Herald, 10/2/01, NBC 2, 4/24/02] What’s intriguing is that several of the 40 or so names on the list appear to have been, or still are, employees of US defense contractors. [Online Journal, 4/24/02, note this is a very partisan website]

October 4, 2001: The first case of anthrax infection, in Florida, appears in the media. Letters containing anthrax continue to be received until October 19. Anthrax letters are sent to NBC, New York Post, Democratic Senator Daschle and Democratic Senator Leahy. There are a number of hoax letters, however, likely sent by the same person to all the recipients of the real anthrax letters, plus to CBS, Fox News, New York Times, and the St. Petersberg Times. Eleven people are infected, five people die. [South Florida Sun-Sentinel, 12/01]

October 5, 2001: Contrary to popular belief, Afghanistan “has significant oil and gas deposits. During the Soviets’ decade-long occupation of Afghanistan, Moscow estimated Afghanistan’s proven and probable natural gas reserves at around five trillion cubic feet, and production reached 275 million cubic feet per day in the mid-1970’s.” [Asia Times, 10/5/01] A later article suggests the country may also have as much copper as Chile, the world’s largest producer, and significant deposits of coal, emeralds, tungsten, lead, zinc, uranium ore and more. [Houston Chronicle, 12/23/01]

October 10-11, 2001: The FBI allows the original batch of the Ames strain of anthrax to be destroyed, making tracing the anthrax type more difficult. Suspicions that the anthrax used in the letters was the Ames strain are confirmed on October 17. [New York Times, 11/9/01, South Florida Sun-Sentinel, 12/01] What possible excuse can the FBI have for allowing this destruction, especially when the Ames strain was already suspected?

October 15, 2001: According to the Moscow Times, the Russian government sees the upcoming US conquest of Afghanistan as an attempt by the US to replace Russia as the dominant political force in Central Asia, with the control of oil as a prominent motive: “While the bombardment of Afghanistan outwardly appears to hinge on issues of fundamentalism and American retribution, below the surface, lurks the prize of the energy-rich Caspian basin into which oil majors have invested billions of dollars. Ultimately, this war will set the boundaries of US and Russian influence in Central Asia – and determine the future of oil and gas resources of the Caspian Sea.” [Moscow Times, 10/15/01]

October 16, 2001 (A): “The Financial Services Authority – Britain’s main financial regulator – has cleared bin Laden and his henchmen of insider trading. There has been a widespread suspicion that members of the al-Qaeda organization had cashed in on the US attacks, dumping airline, aerospace and insurance company shares before September 11th. The Authority says that after a thorough investigation it has found no hard evidence of any such deals in London.” [Marketplace radio report, 10/17/01

October 16, 2001 (B): The government releases flight control transcripts of three of the four hijacked planes (see the transcripts here: [New York Times, 9/16/01, New York Times, 9/16/01, New York Times, 9/16/01, New York Times, 9/16/01]). Strangely, Flight 93 is left out. Yet even the three released transcripts are incomplete (for instance, Flight 77’s ends at least 20 minutes before it crashes), and certain events that are part of the official story don’t show up on these transcripts. What’s the reason for secrecy?

October 18, 2001: The Economist reports that the Taliban is dumping its stockpile of heroin into the market to pay for the war against the US. As a result, prices in Afghanistan have tumbled from $700 a kilo just before 9/11 to $100. This stockpile is worth about $1 billion in Pakistan, but between $40 billion and $80 billion on the streets of Europe. 70% of all the world’s opium comes from Afghanistan. [Economist, 10/18/01]

October 20, 2001: The New York Times reports that although 830 people have been arrested in the 9/11 terrorism investigation (a number that eventually exceeds 1,200 [New York Times, 7/11/02]), there is no evidence that anyone now in custody was a conspirator in the 9/11 attacks. Furthermore, “none of the nearly 100 people still being sought by the [FBI] is seen as a major suspect.” Of the all the people arrested, only four, Zacarias Moussaoui, Ayub Ali Khan and Mohammed Azmath, and Nabil al-Marabh, a former Boston cabdriver, are likely connected to al-Qaeda. [New York Times, 10/21/01] After being kept in solitary confinement for more than eight months without seeing a judge or being assigned a lawyer, Nabil al-Marabh pled guilty to the minor charge of entering the United States illegally. The penalty was less than time already served, and he was deported. [CBC, 8/27/02, Washington Post, 6/12/02] On September 12, 2002, after a year in solitary confinement and four months before he was able to contact a lawyer, Mohammed Azmath pleads guilty to one count of credit card fraud, and is let go with time served. [Village Voice, 9/25/02, New York Times, 12/31/02] By mid-June 2002, only 74 people are reportedly still in custody, and the number continues to fall. Though many were held for months, “the vast majority were never charged with anything other than overstaying a visa.” [New York Times, 7/11/02]

October 24, 2001: The House of Representatives passes the final version of the USA Patriot Act and other previously unpopular Bush projects: Alaska oil drilling, $25 billion in tax cuts for corporations, taps into Social Security funds and cuts in education. [CNN, 10/25/01] Republican Congressman Ron Paul states: “It’s my understanding the bill wasn’t printed before the vote – at least I couldn’t get it. They played all kinds of games, kept the House in session all night, and it was a very complicated bill. Maybe a handful of staffers actually read it, but the bill definitely was not available to members before the vote.” It is later found that only two copies of the bill were made available in the hours before its passage, and most House members admit they voted for the Act without actually reading it first. [Insight, 11/9/01]

October 27, 2001: Furious government intelligence officials accuse the NSA of destroying data pertinent to the 9/11 investigation. They claim that possible leads aren’t being followed because of the NSA lack of cooperation. [Boston Globe, 10/27/01]

Early November 2001 (A): Many locals in Afghanistan witness a remarkable escape of al-Qaeda forces from Kabul around this time. One local businessman says: “We don’t understand how they weren’t all killed the night before, because they came in a convoy of at least 1,000 cars and trucks. It was a very dark night, but it must have been easy for the American pilots to see the headlights. The main road was jammed from eight in the evening until three in the morning.” This convoy was thought to have contained al-Qaeda’s top officials. [Times of London, 7/22/02] With all of the satellite imagery and intense focus on the Kabul area at the time, how could such a force have escaped the city unobserved by the US?

Early November 2001 (B): Starting in late October, US intelligence reports begin noting that al-Qaeda fighters and leaders are moving into and around the Afghanistan city of Jalalabad. By early November, bin Laden is there. Knight-Ridder newspapers report: “American intelligence analysts concluded that bin Laden and his retreating fighters were preparing to flee across the border. But the US Central Command, which was running the war, made no move to block their escape. ‘It was obvious from at least early November that this area was to be the base for an exodus into Pakistan,’ said one intelligence official, who spoke only on condition of anonymity. ‘All of this was known, and frankly we were amazed that nothing was done to prepare for it.'” The vast majority of leaders and fighters are eventually able to escape into Pakistan. [Knight-Ridder, 10/20/02]

November 10, 2001: Telegraph reporter Christina Lamb is arrested and expelled from Pakistan by the ISI. She had been investigating the connections between the ISI and the Taliban. Wall Street Journal reporter Daniel Pearl’s investigation into the ISI will later result in his death. [Telegraph, 11/11/01]

Nov 12, 2001–Mar 25, 2002: 13 renowned microbiologists mysteriously die over the span of less than five months. All but one or two are killed or murdered under unusual circumstances. Some are world leaders in developing weapons-grade biological plagues. Others are the best in figuring out how to stop millions from dying because of biological weapons. Still others are experts in the theory of bioterrorism. [Globe and Mail, 5/4/02, NY Times 08/11/02] Nov 12: Benito Que, 52, an expert in infectious diseases–killed in carjacking, later deemed possible stroke. [Globe and Mail, 5/4/02] Nov. 16: Don Wiley, 57, one of the world’s leading researchers of deadly viruses–body found in Mississippi River. [CNN, 12/22/01] Nov 21: Dr. Vladimir Pasechnik, 64, an expert in adapting germs and viruses for military use–stroke. [NY Times, 11/23/01] Dec 10: Dr. Robert Schwartz, 57, a leading researcher on DNA sequencing analysis–slain at home. [Washington Post, 12/12/01] Dec 14: Nguyen Van Set, 44, his research organization had just come to fame for discovering a virus which can be modified to affect smallpox–dies in an airlock in his lab. [Sydney Morning Herald, 12/12/01] Jan 2002: Ivan Glebov (bandit attack) and Alexi Brushlinski (killed in Moscow), both world-renowned members of the Russian Academy of Science. [Pravda, 2/9/02] Feb 9: Victor Korshunov, 56, head of the microbiology sub-faculty at the Russian State Medical University–killed by cranial injury. [Pravda, 2/9/02] Feb 11: Ian Langford, 40, one of Europe’s leading experts on environmental risk–murdered in home. [Times of London, 2/13/02] Feb 28 (2): Tanya Holzmayer, 46, helped create drugs that interfere with replication of the virus that causes AIDS, and Guyang Huang, 38, a brilliant scholar highly regarded in genetics–murder/suicide. [San Jose Mercury News, 2/28/02] Mar 24: David Wynn-Williams, 55, an astrobiologist with NASA Ames Research Center–killed while jogging. [Times of London, 3/27/02] Mar 25: Steven Mostow, 63, an expert on the threat of bioterrorism–private plane crash. [KUSA TV/NBC, 3/26/02]

November 14, 2001: The Northern Alliance capture the Afghan city of Jalalabad. [Sydney Morning Herald, 11/14/01] That night, a convoy of 1,000 or more al-Qaeda and Taliban fighters escape from Jalalabad and reach the fortress of Tora Bora after hours of driving and then walking. Bin Laden is believed to be with them, riding in one of “several hundred cars” in the convoy. The US bombs the nearby Jalalabad airport, but apparently not the convoy. [Knight-Ridder, 10/20/02, Christian Science Monitor, 3/4/02]

Mid-November 2001 (A): Ismail Khan, governor of Herat province and one of Afghanistan’s most successful militia leaders, later claims that his troops and other Northern Alliance fighters held back at the request of the US from sweeping into Kandahar at this time. Khan maintains “we could have captured all the Taliban and the al-Qaeda groups. We could have arrested Osama bin Laden with all of his supporters.” [USA Today, 1/2/02] British newspapers at the time report bin Laden is surrounded in a 30-mile area, but the conquest of Kandahar takes weeks without the Northern Alliance and bin Laden slips away. [CNN, 11/18/01]

Mid-November 2001 (B): At the request of the Pakistani government, the US secretly allows rescue flights into the besieged Taliban stronghold of Kunduz in Northern Afghanistan to save Pakistanis fighting for the Taliban and bring them back to Pakistan. [Independent, 11/26/01] Pakistan’s President “Musharraf won American support for the airlift by warning that the humiliation of losing hundreds–and perhaps thousands–of Pakistani Army men and intelligence operatives would jeopardize his political survival.” The flights are denied by the US and generally ignored in the US media. [New Yorker, 1/21/02] Pakistan denies that there were any Pakistani military in Afghanistan at all. But New Yorker magazine reports, “What was supposed to be a limited evacuation apparently slipped out of control and, as an unintended consequence, an unknown number of Taliban and al-Qaeda fighters managed to join in the exodus.” A CIA analyst says, “many of the people they spirited away were in the Taliban leadership” who Pakistan wanted for future political negotiations. Of the 8,000 remaining al-Qaeda, Pakistani and Taliban, about 5,000 are airlifted out and 3,000 surrender. [New Yorker, 1/21/02]

November 16, 2001 (A): Dead microbiologist: Dr. Don Wiley, 57, disappears during a business trip to Memphis, Tennessee. [Fox News, 11/24/01] “Wiley is seen as one of the world’s leading researchers of deadly viruses, including HIV and the Ebola virus.” [CNN, 12/22/01] Wiley worked at the Howard Hughes Medical Institute at Harvard University, and was an expert on the immune system’s response to viral attacks. He was widely regarded as the nation’s foremost expert in using special X-ray cameras and mathematical formulas to make high-resolution images of viruses. [Boston Globe, 12/21/01]

November 16, 2001 (B): According to Newsweek, approximately 600 al-Qaeda and Taliban fighters escape Afghanistan on this day. Many senior leaders are in the group. They had walked a long trek from bombing in the Tora Bora region. There are two main routes out of the Tora Bora cave complex to Pakistan. The US bombed only one route, so the 600 escaped unattacked using the other route. Hundreds continue to use the route to escape for weeks, generally unbothered by US bombing or Pakistani border guards. [Newsweek, 8/11/02]

November 18, 2001: Hijacker Ziad Jarrah wrote a letter to his girlfriend shortly before 9/11, but made a mistake in the address, allowing investigators to find it around this time. He writes, “I did what I had to do, and you should be very proud of that… It is a great honor and you will see the result, and everyone will be celebrating.” [Observer, 11/18/01] Jarrah’s relatives claim the letter is a fake designed to frame him, and that he wouldn’t have mistaken the address of the woman he’d been dating for five years. [BBC, 11/19/01] At some point, part of Jarrah’s passport was found in the wreckage of Flight 93. [CNN, 8/1/02] This image of the burnt passport has been released, which you can see here. However, it bears only a vague resemblance to other pictures of Jarrah. Could someone who looked vaguely like him have stolen his identity (for other stolen identities, see September 16-23, 2001)?

November 20, 2001: The five Israelis arrested on 9/11 for videotaping the WTC attack and then cheering about it (see September 11, 2001) are released and return to Israel. Some of the men’s names appeared in a US national intelligence database, and the FBI concluded that at least two of the men were working for the Mossad, according to ABC News. But the FBI says that none of them had any advanced knowledge of the 9/11 attacks, and they were released as part of a deal between the US and the Israeli governments. [Forward, 3/15/02, ABC News, 6/21/02]

November 21, 2001 (A): The Independent runs a story with the title: “Opium Farmers Rejoice at the Defeat of the Taliban.” Massive opium planting is underway all across Afghanistan. [Independent, 11/21/01] Four days later, the Observer runs a story headlined, “Victorious Warlords Set To Open the Opium Floodgates.” It states that farmers are being encouraged by warlords allied with the US to plant “as much opium as possible.” [Observer, 11/25/01]

November 21, 2001 (B): Dead microbiologist: World-class microbiologist and high-profile Russian defector Dr. Vladimir Pasechnik, 64, dies of a stroke. Pasechnik, who defected to Britain in 1989, had played a huge role in the development of Russian biowarfare, heading a lab of 400 “with an unlimited budget” and “the best staff available.” He was connected to Britain’s spy agency. “In the last few weeks of his life, he had put his research on anthrax at the disposal of the [British] Government, in the light of the threat from bioterrorism.” [Times of London, 11/30/01, New York Times, 11/23/01, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

November 21, 2001 (C): The remains of all but one of the people on board Flight 77, including the hijackers, are identified. [Washington Post, 11/21/01, Mercury, 1/11/02] The strange thing about this is that the official story states there was a giant fireball on impact that not only destroyed the airplane, but actually vaporized the metal. A rescue worker states: “The only way you could tell that an aircraft was inside was that we saw pieces of the nose gear. The devastation was horrific.” [NFPA Journal, 11/1/01] Yet remains of every passenger but one was found?

December 2001: James Hauswirth, a retired Phoenix, Arizona FBI agent, writes a letter to FBI Director Mueller, criticizing the priorities at the Phoenix FBI office. “[Counter-terrorism] has always been the lowest priority in the division; it still is the lowest priority in the division,” even though Arizona had been one of the first hubs for radical Muslim groups in the US. Hauswirth particularly criticizes that “[Ken] Williams, regarded as the best terrorism agent in the office, had to interrupt his pre-Sept. 11 investigation of Middle Eastern flight students in order to spend six months on a high-profile arson case. … ‘He fought it. … Why take your best terrorism investigator and put him on an arson case? He didn’t have a choice.'” Williams briefly began investigating Middle Eastern students at an Arizona flight school in early 2000, but a series of difficulties including the arson case, prevented him from continuing on that case until June 2001. A month later he wrote a now-famous memo suggesting that terrorists might be training at US flight schools (see July 10, 2001). [New York Times, 6/19/02, Los Angeles Times, 5/26/02]

December 4, 2001: Convicted drug lord and opium kingpin Ayub Afridi is released from prison and recruited by the US government to help establish control in Afghanistan by unifying various Pashtun warlords. The former opium smuggler was one of the CIA’s leading assets in the Afghan war against the Russians. [Asia Times, 12/4/01]

December 10, 2001: Dead microbiologist: “Dr. Robert Schwartz, 57, was stabbed and slashed with what police believe was a sword in his farmhouse in Leesberg, Va. [Globe and Mail, 5/4/02] Schwartz worked at Virginia’s Center for Innovative Technology on DNA sequencing and pathogenic microorganisms. He was “a brilliant scientist who had a gift for explaining complex scientific subjects in simple language.” [Washington Post, 12/12/01]

December 12-15, 2001: Fox News broadcasts a remarkable series about the Israeli “art student” spy ring. The report mentions that at least 60 more Israelis have been detained or arrested since 9/11. “There is no indication that the Israelis were involved in the 9/11 attacks, but investigators suspect that the Israelis may have gathered intelligence about the attacks in advance, and not shared it.” When a government source is asked if the Israeli spies knew about the 9/11 attacks before they happened, he responds, “The principal question is ‘how could they have not known?'” “Investigators within the DEA, INS and FBI have all told Fox News that to pursue or even suggest Israeli spying … is considered career suicide.” A highly placed investigator says there are ‘tie-ins’ between the spy ring and 9/11. But when asked for details, he flatly refuses to describe them, saying, “evidence linking these Israelis to 9-11 is classified.” The report also reveals that Amdocs, an Israeli company, is recording virtually every phone call in the US and could be passing information on to the Israeli government (similar claims were first raised in 2000 [Insight, 5/29/00]). Fox News suggests they might be using this position to impede the 9/11 investigation. [Fox News, 12/12/01]

December 14, 2001: Dead microbiologist: Nguyen Van Set, 44, dies in an airlock filled with nitrogen in his lab in Geelong, Australia. The lab had just been written up in the journal Nature for its work in genetic manipulation and DNA sequencing. [Sydney Morning Herald, 12/12/01, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

December 22, 2001: Afghani Prime Minister Hamid Karzai and his transitional government takes power in Afghanistan. It was revealed a few weeks before that he had been a paid consultant for Unocal, as well as Deputy Foreign Minister for the Taliban. [Le Monde, 12/13/01, CNN, 12/22/01]

December 25, 2001: The New York Times reports that “some of the nation’s leading structural engineers and fire-safety experts” believe the investigation into the collapse of the WTC is “inadequate”, and “are calling for a new, independent and better-financed inquiry that could produce the kinds of conclusions vital for skyscrapers and future buildings nationwide.” Experts critical of the investigation include “some of those people who are actually conducting it.” They point out that the current team of 20 or so investigators has no subpoena power, inadequate financial support, little staff support, has been prevented from interviewing witnesses, has frequently been prevented from examining the disaster site, and has even been unable to obtain basic information like detailed blueprints of the buildings that collapsed. The decision to rapidly recycle the steel columns, beams and trusses from the WTC in the days immediately after 9/11 means definitive answers may never be known. [New York Times, 12/25/01]

December 30, 2001: The new Afghan Interior Minister Younis Qanooni claims that the ISI helped bin Laden escape from Afghanistan: “Undoubtedly they (ISI) knew what was going on.” [BBC, 12/30/01]

January 2002: Two dead microbiologists: Ivan Glebov and Alexi Brushlinski. Pravda reports that Glebov died as the result of a bandit attack and reports without explanation that Brushlinski was killed in Moscow. Both were “well known around the world” and members of the Russian Academy of Science. [Pravda, 2/9/02, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

January 1, 2002: Zalamy Khalilzad, already a Special Assistant to the President, is appointed by Bush as a special envoy to Afghanistan. [BBC, 1/1/02] Khalilzad, a former employee of Unocal, took part in negotiations with the Taliban to build a pipeline through Afghanistan. He also wrote op-eds in the Washington Post in 1997 supporting the Taliban regime, back when Unocal was hoping to work with the Taliban. [Independent, 1/10/02] Now the US envoy is a former Unocal employee consulting with a prime minister who is a former Unocal employee (see December 22, 2001) in a country where Unocal might build gas and oil pipelines (see May 13, 2002).

January 4, 2002: A firefighter trade magazine with ties to the New York Fire Department calls the investigation into the collapse of the WTC a “half-baked farce.” The article points out that the probe has not looked at all aspects of the disaster and has had limited access to documents and other evidence. “The destruction and removal of evidence must stop immediately.” It concludes that a growing number of fire protection engineers have theorized that “the structural damage from the planes and the explosive ignition of jet fuel in themselves were not enough to bring down the towers.” [Fire Engineering, 1/02, New York Daily News, 1/4/02]

January 23, 2002: Wall Street Journal reporter Daniel Pearl is kidnapped in Pakistan. [Guardian, 1/25/02, BBC, 7/5/02] He is later murdered. “At the time of his abduction, Pearl was investigating links between Pakistani extremists and Richard C. Reid, the British man accused of trying to blow up an American airliner with explosives hidden in his sneakers. As part of that probe, Pearl may have strayed into areas involving Pakistan’s secret intelligence organizations.” [Washington Post, 2/23/02]

January 24, 2002: Senate Majority Leader Tom Daschle (D) later claims that on this day, Vice President Cheney calls him and urges that no 9/11 inquiry be made. Bush repeats the request on January 28, and Daschle is repeatedly pressured thereafter. Newsweek summarizes one of these conversations: “Bush administration officials might say they’re too busy running the war on terrorism to show up. Press the issue… and you risk being accused of interfering with the mission.” [CNN, 1/29/02, Newsweek, 2/4/02]

February 6, 2002: CIA Director Tenet tells a Senate hearing that there was no 9/11 intelligence failure. When asked about the CIA record on 9/11, he says, “We are proud of that record.” He also states that the 9/11 plot was “in the heads of three or four people” and thus nearly impossible to prevent. [USA Today, 2/7/02]

February 9, 2002: Dead microbiologist: Victor Korshunov, 56, is bashed over the head and killed at the entrance of his home in Moscow, Russia. He was the head of the microbiology sub-faculty at the Russian State Medical University. [Pravda, 2/9/02, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

February 10, 2002: Katherine Smith is killed one day before her scheduled appearance in court on charges she helped five Muslim terrorists get illegal drivers licenses. Her car supposedly hit a tree and then caught on fire. The FBI later determined that gasoline was poured on her clothing before she died in the fire. A suicide note was found, but prosecutors say they are looking for murder suspects. [AP, 2/13/02, Reuters, 2/15/02, Go Memphis, 2/12/02, Memphis Commercial Appeal, 2/21/02]

February 11, 2002: Dead microbiologist: Dr. Ian Langford, 40, is found dead, partially naked and wedged under a chair in his home in Norwich, England. One of his colleagues states: “Ian was without doubt one of Europe’s leading experts on environmental risk. He was one of the most brilliant colleagues I have ever had.” [Times of London, 2/13/02, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

February 14, 2002: The Israeli newspaper Ma’ariv astutely notes: “If one looks at the map of the big American bases created [in the Afghan war], one is struck by the fact that they are identical to the route of the projected oil pipeline to the Indian Ocean.” Ma’ariv also states, “Osama bin Laden did not comprehend that his actions serve American interests… If I were a believer in conspiracy theory, I would think that bin Laden is an American agent.”[Chicago Tribune, 3/18/02]

February 18, 2002: The Financial Times reports that the estimated opium harvest in Afghanistan in June 2002 will reach a record 4500 metric tons. Afghanistan is supplying 95% of the heroin in Europe, but the US shows “little interest” in stopping the production. [Financial Times, 2/18/02]

February 20, 2002: The Pentagon announces the existence of the new Office of Strategic Influence which “was quietly set up after September 11.” The role of this office is to plant false stories in the foreign press, phony e-mails from disguised addresses and other covert activities to manipulate public opinion. The new office proves so controversial that it is declared closed six days later. [CNN, 2/20/02, CNN, 2/26/02] It is later reported that the “temporary” Office of Global Communications will be made permanent (it is unknown when this office began its work). This office seems to serve the same function as the earlier Office of Strategic Influence, minus the covert manipulation. [Washington Post, 7/20/02]

February 21, 2002: Police and intelligence agencies in Britain predict “a potentially huge increase in heroin trafficking because of massive and unchecked replanting of the opium crop in Afghanistan.” This dovetails with a UN Office for Drug Control and Crime Prevention report, which has detected massive opium planting that had mostly stopped under the Taliban. Afghanistan is the source of 75% of the world’s heroin. [Guardian, 2/21/02] How is it that the Taliban managed to cut opium production to almost nothing, yet under US occupation forces opium planting is virtually unchecked?

February 25, 2002: Time reports that the second highest Taliban official in US custody, Mullah Haji Abdul Samat Khaksar, has been waiting for months for the CIA to talk to him. Even two weeks after Time informed US officials that Khaksar wanted to talk, no one has properly interviewed him. He says he has useful information, and may be able to help locate former Taliban leader Mullah Omar. Time notes that “he claims to have information about al-Qaeda links to the ISI.” [Time, 2/25/02] “The little that Khaksar has divulged – to an American general and his intelligence aide – is tantalizing.” “He says that the ISI agents are still mixed up with the Taliban and al-Qaeda,” and that all three have formed a new group to get the US out of Afghanistan. [Time, 2/19/02]

February 28, 2002 (A): The notion that the 9/11 attacks were not done by bin Laden is only a conspiracy theory in the First World. A Gallup poll conducted in Muslim nations shows 18% believe that Arabs were responsible and 61% do not. [Guardian, 2/28/02]

February 28, 2002 (B): Two dead microbiologists in San Francisco: While taking delivery of a pizza, Tanya Holzmayer, 46, is shot and killed by a colleague, Guyang Huang, 38, who then apparently shoots himself. Holzmayer moved to the US from Russia in 1989. Her research focused on the part of the human molecular structure that could be affected best by medicine. Holzmayer was focusing on helping create new drugs that interfere with replication of the virus that causes AIDS. [San Jose Mercury News, 2/28/02, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

Early March 2002: The book l’Effroyable Imposture (The Horrifying Fraud) is published in France. The book denies that a passenger airliner crashed in the Pentagon on 9/11. It is written by Thierry Meyssan, “president of the Voltaire Network, a respected independent think tank whose left-leaning research projects have until now been considered models of reasonableness and objectivity.” [Guardian, 4/1/02] The book is widely denounced by the media, but nonetheless sets a French publishing record for first-month sales. [Time, Europe version, 5/20/02] One of Meyssan’s theories is that people within the US government wanted to hit the Pentagon for its propaganda effect, but didn’t want to create a lot of damage or kill important people like Defense Secretary Rumsfeld. They note that the crash hit the one section under construction, thus greatly reducing the loss of life. Furthermore, the wall at point of impact was the first and only one to be reinforced and have blast-resistant windows installed as part of an upgrade plan. [NFPA Journal, 11/1/01]

March 1, 2002: The ISI pressures an important Pakistani newspaper, The News, to fire four journalists. The editor also flees the country in response. These journalists had reported on connections between Saeed Sheikh, arrested for the murder of Daniel Pearl, and recent attacks on the Indian parliament in Delhi and Kashmir. This information comes from an article titled, “There’s Much More To Daniel Pearl’s Murder Than Meets the Eye,” and that certainly seems to be the case. [Washington Post, 3/10/02]

March 2, 2002: A New York Times article theorizes that a diesel fuel tank was responsible for the collapse of WTC Building 7. It collapsed on 9/11, even though it was farther away than many other buildings that remained standing. It was the first time a steel-reinforced high-rise in the US had ever collapsed in a fire. The fuel tank had been installed in 1999 as part of a new “command center” for Mayor Rudolph Giuliani. [New York Times, 3/2/02, Dow Jones News, 9/10/02] What’s curious, especially given all the Wall Street scandals later in the year, is that Building 7 was where the SEC stored files for numerous Wall Street investigations. All the files for approximately 3,000 to 4,000 SEC cases were destroyed. Some were backed up in other places, but many were not, especially those classified as confidential. [New York Law Journal, 9/17/01] Lost files include documents that could show the relationship between Citigroup and the WorldCom bankruptcy. [The Street, 8/9/02] The Secret Service also lost investigative files. Says one agent: “All the evidence stored at 7 World Trade, in all our cases, went down with the building.” [Tech TV, 7/23/02] A few days later, the head of the WTC collapse investigation says he “would possibly consider examining” the collapse of Building 7, however, all the rubble has been removed and destroyed. [Committee on Science, House of Representatives testimony, 3/6/02]

March 5, 2002: It is reported that many spies in the uncovered Israeli spy ring seemed to have been trailing the 9/11 hijackers. For instance, five Israeli spies are intercepted in the tiny town of Hollywood, Florida, and four 9/11 hijackers are known to have spent time in Hollywood, Florida. [Le Monde, 3/5/02, Reuters, 3/5/02, Jane’s Intelligence Digest, 3/15/02] In one case, some Israeli spies lived at 4220 Sheridan Street, only a few hundred feet from where Atta was living at 3389 Sheridan Street. Israeli spies appear to have been close to at least 10 of the 19 9/11 hijackers. [Salon, 5/7/02]

March 6, 2002: A Washington Post article completely denies the existence of any Israeli spy ring. A “wide array of US officials” supposedly deny it, and Justice Department spokeswoman Susan Dryden says: “This seems to be an urban myth that has been circulating for months.” [Washington Post, 3/6/02] The New York Times fails to cover the story at all, even months later. [Salon, 5/7/02] By mid-March, Jane’s, the respected British intelligence and military analysis service, notes: “It is rather strange that the US media seems to be ignoring what may well be the most explosive story since the 9/11 attacks – the alleged breakup of a major Israeli espionage operation in the USA.” [Jane’s Intelligence Digest, 3/13/02]

March 7, 2002: A series of photos surface purporting to show a plane crashing into the Pentagon on 9/11. It’s not clear who released the photos, but the Pentagon says they’re authentic and taken from a Pentagon security camera. The release of these pictures comes within days of the publication of the book “l’Effroyable Imposture” (see Early March 2002). “Officials could not immediately explain why the date typed near the bottom of each photograph is Sept. 12 and the time is written as 5:37 p.m.” [Fox News, 3/8/02] Do the pictures show an American Airlines 757, or a much smaller, darker plane that has the shape of a fighter? Because the plane in the first frame is hard to see, here is an enlarged version with the plane and its exhaust circled.

March 13, 2002: Bush says of bin Laden: “He’s a person who’s now been marginalized… I just don’t spend that much time on him… I truly am not that concerned about him.” What concerns Bush now? “I am deeply concerned about Iraq.” [White House, 3/13/02] On April 6, Joint Chief of Staff Chairman Myers states: “the goal has never been to get bin Laden.” [Department of Defense, 4/6/02]

May 15, 2002: For the first time, the White House admits that Bush was warned about bin Laden hijacking aircraft and wanting to attack the US in Aug 2001. It is unclear why they waited eight months to reveal this. The Press Secretary states that while Bush had been warned of possible hijackings, “the president did not receive information about the use of airplanes as missiles by suicide bombers.” Yet the August memo left little doubt that the hijacked airliners were intended for use as missiles and that US targets were intended. [New York Times, 5/16/02, Washington Post, 5/16/02, Guardian, 5/19/02]

March 22, 2002: Translator Sibel Edmonds later claims that she is fired by the FBI on this day after repeatedly raising suspicions about a coworker and her alleged connections to an unnamed foreign official and an unnamed foreign organization. Both Edmonds and the coworker, Can Dickerson, were hired as translators in late September 2001 in the wake of the 9/11 attacks (see Late September 2001). Edmonds claims that Dickerson failed to translate sensitive information concerning the foreign official and organization, did not inform the FBI that she once worked for the organization (which is under investigation), and had “unreported contacts” with the foreign official, who has now left the country. When Edmonds failed to agree to work as a spy for this organization, Dickerson told her that her lack of cooperation could put her family in danger. After her boss and others in the FBI failed to respond to her complaints, she wrote to the Justice Department’s inspector general’s office in March: “Investigations are being compromised. Incorrect or misleading translations are being sent to agents in the field. Translations are being blocked and circumvented.” She claims she was fired for her whistleblowing, and is suing. Both the FBI and some US Senators later agree that there is merit to Edmonds’ claims, and are investigating the matter. A second FBI whistleblower, John Cole, also claims to know of security lapses in the screening and hiring of FBI translators. [Washington Post, 6/19/02, Cox News, 8/14/02] In October 2002, at the request of FBI Director Mueller, Attorney General Ashcroft asks a judge to throw out Edmonds’ lawsuit against the Justice Department. He says he is applying the state secrets privilege in order “to protect the foreign policy and national security interests of the United States.” [AP, 10/18/02]

March 24, 2002 (A): The Sunday Times reports that records of bin Laden’s satellite phone calls indicate that before 9/11 he and his most senior lieutenants made over 260 calls from their base in Afghanistan to 27 numbers in Britain. They included calls to suspected terrorist agents, sympathizers and companies. [Sunday Times, 3/24/02, Sunday Herald, 5/19/02]

March 24, 2002 (B): Dead microbiologist: David Wynn-Williams, 55, is hit by a car while jogging near his home in Cambridge, England. He was an astrobiologist with NASA Ames Research Center. He was studying the capability of microbes to adapt to environmental extremes, including the bombardment of ultraviolet rays and global warming. [Times of London, 3/27/02, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

March 25, 2002: Dead microbiologist: Steven Mostow, 63, dies when the airplane he was piloting crashes near Denver, Colorado. He worked at the Colorado Health Sciences Centre and was known for his expertise in bioterrorism. Mostow was “one of the country’s leading infectious disease experts.” Mostow’s death bring the total number of leading microbiologists killed in a six-month period to at least 13. [KUSA TV, 3/26/02, Globe and Mail, 5/4/02]

April 4, 2002: Dr. David Franz, a former commander of USAMRIID, says of the anthrax attacks: “I think a lot of good has come from it. From a biological or a medical standpoint, we’ve now five people who have died, but we’ve put about $6 billion in our budget into defending against bioterrorism.” Plentiful evidence suggests that the anthrax came from USAMRIID, but investigators say they have no suspects at all. They also say they have come up “against some closely held military secrets” which are slowing down the investigation. “Federal investigators tell ABC News that military and intelligence agencies have withheld a full listing of all facilities and all employees dealing with top-secret anthrax programs where important leads could be found.” [ABC News, 4/4/02]

April 18, 2002: The FBI allows relatives of passengers on Flight 93 to listen to and see a written transcript of the cockpit recordings. 70 do so. But the FBI says the relatives are not allowed to make recordings, because the tape might be used in the trial of Zacarias Moussaoui. [Guardian, 4/19/02] The San Francisco Chronicle responds: “Is there even a dollop of logic in that explanation? It’s like saying we can’t watch video of the planes crashing into the World Trade Center because that video might be used in a trial.” [San Francisco Chronicle, 6/3/02] New York Times reporter Jere Longman writes the book Among the Heroes based on his access to the recordings and interviews with officials and relatives. New details of their struggle on board emerge, but the government still has not officially stated if the passengers took over the plane or not. [Telegraph, 8/6/02, MSNBC, 7/30/02]

April 19, 2002: FBI Director Mueller states: “In our investigation, we have not uncovered a single piece of paper–either here in the United States or in the treasure trove of information that has turned up in Afghanistan and elsewhere–that mentioned any aspect of the September 11 plot.” He also claims that the attackers used “extraordinary secrecy” and that “investigators have found no computers, laptops, hard drives or other storage media that may have been used by the hijackers, who hid their communications by using hundreds of pay phones and cell phones, coupled with hard-to-trace prepaid calling cards.” [FBI speech transcript, 4/19/02, Los Angeles Times, 4/22/02, he repeats the quote the next month, Senate Judiciary Statement, 5/8/02] These statements are clearly lies. Before 9/11, CIA Director Tenet told the Senate that al-Qaeda is “embracing the opportunities offered by recent leaps in information technology.” [CIA, 03/21/00] The FBI broke the al-Qaeda computer encryption before February 2001. [UPI, 2/13/01] Witnesses report seeing the hijackers use computers for e-mail at public libraries in Florida and Maine. [Sun-Sentinel, 9/16/01, Boston Herald, 10/5/01] The Wall Street Journal reported, “A senior FBI official says investigators have obtained hundreds of e-mails in English and Arabic, reflecting discussions of the planned Sept. 11 hijackings.” [Wall Street Journal, 10/16/01] The FBI claims numerous decrypts of al-Qaeda messages just prior to 9/11. Moussaoui’s laptop was found to contain important information, etc… In October 2001, USA Today reported many e-mails coordinating their plans written by the hijackers in internet cafes have been recovered by investigators, and the hijackers weren’t using encryption. [USA Today, 10/1/01]

May 7, 2002: Salon reports on the Israeli “art student” ring. All the “students” claim to have come from either Bezalel Academy, or the University of Jerusalem. A look in the Bezalel database shows that not a single one of them appear to have attended school there. There is no such thing as the University of Jerusalem. In fact, the article points out that the sheer sloppiness and brazenness of the spy operation appears to be a great mystery, especially since the Mossad is renowned as one of the best spy agencies in the world. One government source suggests a theory to Salon that the “art students” were actually a smoke screen. They were meant to be caught and connected to DEA surveillance so that a smaller number of spies also posing as art students could complete other missions. One such mission could have been the monitoring of al-Qaeda terrorists. [Salon, 5/7/02] Shortly afterwards, a major Israeli newspaper publishes a story about the spy ring, but doesn’t come to any conclusions. [Ha’aretz, 5/14/02]

May 8, 2002: FBI Director Mueller: “there was nothing the agency could have done to anticipate and prevent the [9/11] attacks.” [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02]

May 13, 2002: The BBC reports that Afghanistan is about to close a deal for construction of the $2 billion gas pipeline to run from Turkmenistan to Pakistan and India. “Work on the project will start after an agreement is expected to be struck” at a summit scheduled for the end of the month. Afghan leader Hamid Karzai (who formerly worked for Unocal) calls Unocal the “lead company” in building the pipeline. [BBC, 5/13/02] The Los Angeles Times comments, “To some here, it looked like the fix was in for Unocal when President Bush named a former Unocal consultant, Zalmay Khalilzad, as his special envoy to Afghanistan late last year.” [Los Angeles Times, 5/30/02]

May 15, 2002: The Bush Administration is embarrassed when the CBS Evening News reveals that Bush had been warned about al-Qaeda domestic attacks in August 2001 (see August 6, 2001). Bush had repeatedly said that he had “no warning” of any kind. White House Press Secretary Ari Fleischer states unequivocally that while Bush had been warned of possible hijackings, “The president did not – not – receive information about the use of airplanes as missiles by suicide bombers.” [New York Times, 5/16/02, Washington Post, 5/16/02] “Until the attack took place, I think it’s fair to say that no one envisioned that as a possibility.” [MSNBC, 9/18/02] Fleischer claims the August memo was titled “Bin Laden Determined to Strike the US” but the real title is soon found to end with “… Strike in US.” [Washington Post, 5/18/02] The Guardian will state a few days later, “the memo left little doubt that the hijacked airliners were intended for use as missiles and that intended targets were to be inside the US.” [Guardian, 5/19/02]

May 17, 2002 (A): “Members of congressional committees investigating pre-September 11 warnings said yesterday that there is far more damaging information that has not yet been disclosed about the government’s knowledge of events leading up to September 11. ‘We’ve just scratched the surface,’ said Senator Richard C. Shelby, ranking Republican member of the Senate intelligence committee.” [Washington Post, 5/17/02]

May 17, 2002 (B): CBS anchorman Dan Rather tells the BBC that he and other journalists haven’t been properly investigating since 9/11. He says: “There was a time in South Africa that people would put flaming tires around people’s necks if they dissented. And in some ways the fear is that you will be necklaced here, you will have a flaming tire of lack of patriotism put around your neck. Now it is that fear that keeps journalists from asking the toughest of the tough questions.” [Guardian, 5/17/02]

May 21, 2002 (A): Minnesota FBI agent Coleen Rowley, upset with what she considers lying from FBI Director Mueller and others in the FBI about the handling of the Moussaoui case, makes public a long memo she’s written about the topic. [Time, 5/21/02] She also applies for whistleblower protection. Time magazine calls the memo a “colossal indictment of our chief law-enforcement agency’s neglect.” [Time, 5/27/02] After 9/11, Mueller made statements such as, “There were no warning signs that I’m aware of that would indicate this type of operation in the country.” Coleen Rowley and other Minnesota FBI agents “immediately sought to reach [Mueller’s] office through an assortment of higher-level FBI [headquarters] contacts, in order to quickly make [him] aware of the background of the Moussaoui investigation and forewarn [him] so that [his] public statements could be accordingly modified,” yet Mueller continued to make similar comments, including in a Senate hearing on May 8, 2002. [Time, 5/21/02, New York Times, 5/30/02] Finally, after Rowley’s memo becomes public, Mueller states, “I cannot say for sure that there wasn’t a possibility we could have come across some lead that would have led us to the hijackers.” He also admits: “I have made mistakes occasionally in my public comments based on information or a lack of information that I subsequently got.” [New York Times, 5/30/02] Time magazine later names Rowley one of three “Persons of the Year” for 2002, along with fellow whistleblowers Cynthia Cooper of Worldcom and Sherron Watkins of Enron. [Time, 12/22/02, Time, 12/22/02]

May 21, 2002 (B): Abdulla Noman, a former employee of the US consulate in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia, where 15 of the 19 9/11 hijackers got their visas, says that he took money and gifts to provide fraudulent visas to foreigners. He pleads guilty and is convicted. About 50 to 100 visas were improperly issued by Noman from September 1996 until November 2001, when he was arrested. However, a former visa officer in Jeddah, Michael Springman, has claimed in the past that the Jeddah office was notorious for purposefully giving visas to terrorists to train in the US. [AP, 5/21/02] If this is true, then was Noman “the fall guy” to provide a cover story?

May 21-24, 2002: A New York Times editorial says it’s time to “light a fire under the FBI in its investigation of the anthrax case. Experts in the bioterror field are already buzzing about a handful of individuals who had the ability, access and motive to send the anthrax.” [New York Times, 5/24/02] Similarly, the Guardian suggests that the FBI investigation is moving deliberately slow because the federal authorities have something to hide, stating “there is surely a point after which incompetence becomes an insufficient explanation for failure.” [Guardian, 5/21/02]

May 23, 2002: President Bush says he is opposed to establishing a special, independent commission to probe how the government dealt with terror warnings before 9/11. [CBS, 5/23/02] He later changes his stance in the face of overwhelming support for the idea (see September 20, 2002), and then sabotages an agreement that Congress had reached to establish the commission.

May 30, 2002: FBI Agent Robert Wright announces he is suing the FBI over a publishing ban. He has written a book, but the FBI won’t allow him to show it to anyone. He delivers a tearful press conference at the National Press Club describing his lawsuit against the FBI for deliberately curtailing investigations that might have prevented the 9/11 attacks. Unfortunately he has been ordered to not reveal specifics publicly. [Fox News/Reuters, 5/30/02] Wright claims the FBI shut down his 1998 criminal probe into alleged terrorist-training camps in Chicago and Kansas City (see October 1998). He uses words like “prevented,” “thwarted,” “obstructed,” “threatened,” “intimidated,” and “retaliation” to describe the actions of his superiors. He also alleges that for years the US was training Hamas terrorists to make car bombs to use against Israel, one of the US’s closest allies (see also June 9, 2001). [LA Weekly, 8/2/02]

May 31, 2002: At some point prior to this date, when asked why the August 6, 2001 memo read by Bush on al-Qaeda has not been released (see August 6, 2001),Vice President Cheney calls the CIA memo just a “rehash” containing nothing new or interesting. But why Congress should not see it, Cheney says, “because it contains the most sensitive sources and methods. It’s the family jewels.” [Christian Science Monitor, 5/31/02

June 1, 2002: Memphis, Tennessee, medical examiner O.C. Smith is attacked with chemical spray, bound with barbed wire, and left lying in a nearby parking lot with a bomb tied to his body. He is rescued several hours later. In recent months, Smith has been working on two interesting cases. One is the death of Harvard University microbiologist Don Wiley, who supposedly fell from a Memphis bridge in December (see November 16, 2001). He also helped identify the body of Katherine Smith, a state driver’s license examiner who was found burned beyond recognition in February 2002, a day before a hearing on federal charges of helping five Middle Eastern men obtain fake driver’s licenses (see February 10, 2002). Adding to the mystery, Smith had received a series of death threat letters early in 2001. [AP, 6/4/02]

June 3, 2002: Former FBI Deputy Director Weldon Kennedy states: “Even in the Moussaoui case, there’s lots of uproar over the fact that the – there was a failure to obtain a warrant to search his computer. Well, the facts now are that warrant was ultimately obtained. The computer was searched and guess what? There was nothing significant on there pertaining to 9/11.” [CNN, 6/3/02] Three days later, The Washington Post reports: “Amid the latest revelations about FBI and CIA lapses prior to the Sept. 11 attacks, congressional investigators say it is now clear that the evidence that lay unexamined in Zacarias Moussaoui’s possession was even more valuable than previously believed. A notebook and correspondence of Moussaoui’s not only appears to link him to the main hijacking cell in Hamburg, Germany, but also to an al-Qaeda associate in Malaysia whose activities were monitored by the CIA more than a year before the terror attacks on New York and Washington.” [Washington Post, 6/6/02]

June 4, 2002: For the first time, Bush concedes that his intelligence agencies didn’t do the best job: “In terms of whether or not the FBI and the CIA were communicating properly, I think it is clear that they weren’t.” [Times of London, 6/5/02] However, in an address to the nation three days later, President Bush states, “Based on everything I’ve seen, I do not believe anyone could have prevented the horror of September the 11th.” [Sydney Morning Herald, 6/8/02] Days earlier, Newsweek reports that the FBI have prepared a detailed chart showing how agents could have uncovered the terrorist plot if the CIA had told them what it knew about hijackers Almihdhar and Alhazmi sooner. One FBI official says, “There’s no question we could have tied all 19 hijackers together.” [Newsweek, 6/2/02] FBI Director Mueller denies the existence of such a chart. Attorney General Ashcroft also says it is unlikely better intelligence could have stopped the attacks. [Washington Post, 6/3/02]

June 18, 2002: FBI Director Mueller testifies before the Congressional 9/11 inquiry. [Associated Press, 9/26/02] He claims that with the possible exception of Zacarias Moussaoui, “[t]o this day we have found no one in the United States except the actual hijackers who knew of the plot and we have found nothing they did while in the United States that triggered a specific response about them.” [Congressional Intelligence Committee, 9/26/02] The 9/11 Congressional Inquiry will later conclude near the end of 2002 that some hijackers had contact inside the US with individuals known to the FBI, and the hijackers “were not as isolated during their time in the United States as has been previously suggested.” [Los Angeles Times, 12/12/02]

June 20, 2002: The long-awaited loya jirga, or grand council, is concluded in Afghanistan. This council was supposed to be a traditional method for the Afghan people to select their leaders, but the council is clearly rigged (as an important think tank later concludes). [BBC, 8/1/02] Half of the delegates walk out in protest. [CNN, 6/18/02] One delegate states, “This is worse than our worst expectations. The warlords have been promoted and the professionals kicked out. Who calls this democracy?” Delegates complain, “This is interference by foreign countries”, obviously meaning the US. The New York Times publishes an article (“The Warlords Win in Kabul”) pointing out that the “very forces responsible for countless brutalities” in past governments are back in power. [New York Times, 6/21/02] These are the same warlords that have controlled the drug trade for years.

July 10, 2002: A briefing given to a top Pentagon advisory group states, “The Saudis are active at every level of the terror chain, from planners to financiers, from cadre to foot-soldier, from ideologist to cheerleader … Saudi Arabia supports our enemies and attacks our allies.” They are called “the kernel of evil, the prime mover, the most dangerous opponent.” This position still runs counter to official US policy, but the Washington Post says it “represents a point of view that has growing currency within the Bush administration.” The briefing suggests that the Saudis be given an ultimatum to stop backing terrorism or face seizure of its oil fields and its financial assets invested in the United States. [Washington Post, 8/6/02]

July 19, 2002: Faced with growing criticism of its Visa Express program (see May 2001), the State Department early in the month decides merely to change the name of the program. When that fails to satisfy critics, the program is abandoned altogether on July 19th. The Visa Express program allowed anyone in Saudi Arabia to apply for US visas through their travel agents instead of having to show up at a consulate in person. [Washington Post, 7/11/02]

July 21, 2002: In an article titled, “Anthrax: the Noose Widens,” Time magazine reports, “Despite recent claims by some in the bioterrorism community that the investigation should be homing in on one particular American bioweapons expert, the FBI appears to be moving in the opposite direction. US government officials say the investigation is still ranging far and wide and that the FBI has not ruled out a foreign connection.” [Time, 7/21/02]

July 23, 2002: The New York City government decides that the audio and written records of the Fire Department’s actions on 9/11 should never be released to the general public. The New York Times has been trying to get copies of the materials, which include firsthand accounts given to Fire Department officials by scores of firefighters and chiefs. The city claims the firefighters were told their accounts would be kept confidential, but senior fire officials say they were never told that their remarks would be kept confidential. [New York Times, 7/23/02]

Late July 2002: Many soldiers in Kandahar state that US Special Forces apprehend Mullah Akhter Mohammed Osmani, a top general and one of the six most-wanted Taliban, in Kandahar. He is flown to a detention center north of Kabul for interrogation, but is released a few weeks later and escapes to Pakistan. Contradicting the soldiers’ statements, the Defense Intelligence Agency says it “has no knowledge that Mullah Akhter Mohammed Osmani was ever in US custody in Afghanistan. Given Osmani’s high profile and our interest in detaining him, misidentification by experienced personnel is unlikely.” [Washington Times, 12/18/02]

August 2, 2002: The Washington Post reveals that FBI agents have questioned nearly all 37 members of the Senate and House intelligence committees about 9/11-related information leaks. They have asked them to submit to lie detector tests but most have refused. Congress members express “grave concern” for this historically unprecedented move. A law professor states, “Now the FBI can open dossiers on every member and staffer and develop full information on them. It creates a great chilling effect on those who would be critical of the FBI.” [Washington Post, 8/2/02] Senator John McCain suggests that the constitutional separation of powers is being violated in spirit if not in the letter. “What you have here is an organization compiling dossiers on people who are investigating the same organization. The administration bitterly complains about some leaks out of a committee, but meanwhile leaks abound about secret war plans for fighting a war against Saddam Hussein. What’s that about? There’s a bit of a contradiction here, if not a double standard.” [Washington Post, 8/3/02] Later the search for the source of the leak intensifies to unprecedented levels as the FBI asks 17 senators to turn over phone records, appointment calendars and schedules that would reveal their possible contact with reporters. [Washington Post, 8/24/02] Most, if not all, turn over the records, even as some complain that the request breaches the separation of powers between the executive and legislative branches. One senator says the FBI is “trying to put a damper on our activities and I think they will be successful.” [AP, 8/29/02]

August 11, 2002 (A): A shocking Newsweek article suggests that some of Bush’s advisors advocate not only attacking Iraq, but also Saudi Arabia, Iran, North Korea, Syria, Egypt, and Burma! One senior British official says: “Everyone wants to go to Baghdad. Real men want to go to Tehran.” [Newsweek, 8/11/02]

August 11, 2002 (B): In the past, Afghanistan had mostly exported raw opium, but now many new refineries are converting the opium into heroin. The British government has spent �20 million to eradicate opium, but the program is marred by corruption and largely seen as a failure. The new heroin factories are said to be “working in broad daylight.” There has been a rash of bombings and assassinations in Afghanistan as various factions fight over drug profits. The Observer was able to determine the precise location of some of these factories, but the US led forces in Afghanistan are doing nothing to stop them. [Observer, 8/11/02]

August 11, 2002 (C): The New York Times has an article on the mysterious deaths of numerous microbiologists, and strongly argues the entire thing is a coincidence. [New York Times, 8/11/02]

August 13, 2002: On the Donahue TV show, Kristen Breitweiser, whose husband died in the WTC, says the following about Bush’s behavior on 9/11: “It was clear that we were under attack. Why didn’t the Secret Service whisk [Bush] out of that school? He was on live local television in Florida. The terrorists, you know, had been in Florida. I mean, we find that out now. He was less than 10 miles from an airport. And I am concerned. I want to know why he sat there for 25 minutes.” She further states, “I don’t understand how a plane could hit our Defense Department, which is the Pentagon, an hour after the first plane hit the first tower. I don’t understand how that is possible. I’m a reasonable person. But when you look at the fact that we spend a half trillion dollars on national defense and you’re telling me that a plane is able to hit our Pentagon, our Defense Department, an hour after the first tower is hit? There are procedures and protocols in place in this nation that are to be followed when transponders are disconnected, and they were not followed on September 11th.” [Donahue, 8/13/02] Why have mainstream journalists largely continued to ignore these issues?

August 15, 2002: Rena Golden, the executive vice-president and general manager of CNN International, claims that the press has censored itself over 9/11 and the Afghanistan war. “Anyone who claims the US media didn’t censor itself is kidding you. And this isn’t just a CNN issue – every journalist who was in any way involved in 9/11 is partly responsible.” [Press Gazette, 8/15/02] These comments echo criticisms by Dan Rather (see May 17, 2002).

August 23, 2002: The government starts giving out large cash compensations to the relatives of the 9/11 attack victims. However, in order to qualify, the families have to promise not to sue anyone. There are many lawsuits in motion. [AP, 8/23/02]

August 27, 2002: The Central Asian nation of Uzbekistan has recently signed a treaty committing the US to respond to “any external threat” to the country. Uzbekistan’s foreign minister: “The logic of the situation suggests that the United States has come here with a serious purpose, and for a long time.” The other Central Asian nations – Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, and Turkmenistan – have similar agreements with the US. The US claims it is supporting democracy in these nations, but experts say authoritarianism has been on the rise since 9/11. A new US military base in Uzbekistan currently holds about 1,000 US soldiers, but is being greatly enlarged. The Washington Post article makes the general point that the US is replacing Russia as the dominant power in Central Asia. [Washington Post, 8/27/02]

August 29, 2002: German authorities charge a Moroccan man named Mounir El Motassadeq with complicity in the 9/11 attacks. He is a Moroccan who was arrested in Germany two months after 9/11. He is only the second person in the world to be charged with any crime related to the 9/11 attacks, after Moussaoui. [AFP, 8/29/02, New York Times, 8/29/02, Telegraph, 8/30/02]El Motassadeq is the only person in the world ever convicted of involvement in 2001, yet his conviction is overturned by an appellate court in March 2004 because the U.S. refuses to allow Ramzi bin al-Shibh to testify. [PBS, 1/25/2005] Why haven’t we heard more about this?

September 5, 2002: Richard Shelby of Alabama, the ranking Republican on the Senate Intelligence Committee, expresses doubts that the committee’s investigation into 9/11 will be able to accomplish anything, and he supports an independent investigation. “Time is not on our side,” he says, since the investigation has a built-in deadline at the end of 2002. “You know, we were told that there would be cooperation in this investigation, and I question that. I think that most of the information that our staff has been able to get that is real meaningful has had to be extracted piece by piece.” He adds that there is explosive information that has not been publicly released. “I think there are some more bombs out there … I know that.” [New York Times, 9/10/02]

September 11, 2002: On the first anniversary of the 9/11 attacks, The New York Times writes, “One year later, the public knows less about the circumstances of 2,801 deaths at the foot of Manhattan in broad daylight than people in 1912 knew within weeks about the Titanic, which sank in the middle of an ocean in the dead of night.” John F. Timoney, the former police commissioner of Philadelphia, says: “You can hardly point to a cataclysmic event in our history, whether it was the sinking of the Titanic, the Pearl Harbor attack, the Kennedy assassination, when a blue-ribbon panel did not set out to establish the facts and, where appropriate, suggest reforms. That has not happened here.” The Times specifically points to a failure by New York City Mayor Bloomberg to conduct a real investigation into the WTC attack response. Bloomberg stated in August 2002, “Every single major event is different from all others. The training of how you would respond to the last incident is not really important.” [New York Times, 9/11/02] The Chicago Tribune made similar comments a week earlier, pointing out that despite the largest investigation in history, “Americans know little more today about the Sept. 11 conspiracy, or the conspirators, than they did within a few weeks of the attacks.” [Chicago Tribune, 9/5/02]

September 18, 2002: Relatives of 9/11 victims testify before the Congressional 9/11 inquiry. Kristen Breitweiser, whose husband Ronald died at the WTC, asks how the FBI was so quickly able to assemble information on the hijackers (see August 13, 2002). She cites a New York Times article stating that agents descended on flight schools within hours of the attacks. “How did the FBI know where to go a few hours after the attacks?” she asks. “Were any of the hijackers already under surveillance?” [MSNBC, 9/18/02] She adds, “Our intelligence agencies suffered an utter collapse in their duties and responsibilities leading up to and on September 11th. But their negligence does not stand alone. Agencies like the Port Authority, the City of NY, the FAA, the INS, the Secret Service, NORAD, the Air Force, and the airlines also failed our nation that morning.” [Senate Intelligence Committee, 9/18/02]

September 20, 2002: In the wake of damaging Congressional 9/11 inquiry revelations, President Bush reverses course (see May 23, 2002) and backs efforts by many lawmakers to form an independent commission to conduct a broader investigation than the current Congressional inquiry. Newsweek reports that Bush had virtually no choice. “There was a freight train coming down the tracks,” says one White House official. [Newsweek, 9/22/02] But as one of the 9/11 victim’s relatives says, “It’s carefully crafted to make it look like a general endorsement, but it actually says that the commission would look at everything except the intelligence failures.” [CBS, 9/20/02] Rather than look into such failures, Bush wants the commission to focus on areas like border security, visa issues and the “role of Congress” in overseeing intelligence agencies. The White House also refuses to turn over documents showing what Bush knew before 9/11. [Newsweek, 9/22/02] Perhaps Bush’s true stance on the inquiry can be seen by calls the Vice President made to try and stop it earlier in the year (see January 24, 2002).

Oct 5, 2002: Congressional investigators say the FBI’s efforts to block their inquiry makes them skeptical of FBI assertions. They also say the Justice Department has joined the FBI in fighting congressional requests for information, while the CIA has been antagonistic. [NY Times, 10/5/02]

October 9, 2002: San Diego FBI agent Steven Butler reportedly gives “explosive” testimony to the 9/11 inquiry. Butler, recently retired, has been unable to speak to the media. [New York Times, 11/23/02] Butler discloses that he had been monitoring a flow of Saudi Arabian money that wound up in the hands of two of the 9/11 hijackers, but his supervisors failed to take any action on the warnings. It is not known when Butler started investigating the money flow, or warned his supervisors. Some details of this Saudi money trail will cause headlines in November 2002. The FBI unsuccessfully tried to prevent Butler from testifying.

October 17, 2002: The directors of the US’s three most famous intelligence agencies, the CIA, FBI and NSA, testify before a Congressional inquiry on 9/11. All three say no individual at their agencies has been punished or fired for any of missteps connected to 9/11. This does not satisfy several on the inquiry, including Senator Carl Levin (D), who says, “People have to be held accountable.” [Washington Post, 10/18/02]

October 21, 2002: The General Accounting Office, the nonpartisan investigative arm of Congress, releases a report asserting that at least 13 of the 19 9/11 hijackers were never interviewed by US consular officials before being granted visas to enter the US. This contradicts previous assurances from the State Department that 12 of the hijackers had been interviewed. It also found that, for 15 hijackers whose applications could be found, none had filled in the documents properly. Records for four other hijackers, including Atta, could not be checked because they were accidentally destroyed. [Washington Post, 10/22/02] The former head of the American visa bureau in Jeddah states he was repeatedly ordered by high level State Dept officials to issue visas to unqualified applicants. He says he later complained to the State Department, the General Accounting Office, and to the Inspector General’s office, yet was met with silence. [BBC, 11/6/01] The State Department maintains that visa procedures were properly followed. In December 2002, Senators Jon Kyl (R) and Pat Roberts (R) state in a report that “if State Department personnel had merely followed the law and not granted nonimmigrant visas to 15 of the 19 hijackers in Saudi Arabia … 9/11 would not have happened.” [AP, 12/18/02]

October 23, 2002: Visa applications for the 15 Saudi Arabian hijackers are made public, and six separate experts agree: “All of them should have been denied entry [into the US].” Joel Mowbray, who first breaks the story for the conservative National Review, says he is shocked by what he saw: “I really was expecting al-Qaeda to have trained their operatives well, to beat the system. They didn’t have to beat the system. The system was rigged in their favor from the get-go.” A former US consular officer says the visas show a pattern of criminal negligence. Some examples: “Abdulaziz Alomari claimed to be a student but didn’t name a school; claimed to be married but didn’t name a spouse; under nationality and gender, he didn’t list anything.” “Khalid Almihdhar … simply listed ‘Hotel’ as his US destination – no name, no city, no state – but no problem getting a visa.” Only one actually gave a US destination, and one stated his destination as “no.” Only Hani Hanjour had a slight delay in acquiring his visa. His first application was flagged, because he wrote he wanted to visit for three years when the legal limit is two. When he returned two weeks later, he simply changed the form to read “one year” and was accepted. The experts agree that even allowing for chance, incompetence and human error, the odds were that only a few should have been approved. [ABC News, 10/23/02, National Review, 10/9/02]

October 27, 2002: The Los Angeles Times exposes a leaked August 16, 2002 report from Defense Secretary Rumsfeld’s influential Defense Science Board 2002. The board “recommends creation of a super-Intelligence Support Activity, an organization to bring together CIA and military covert action, information warfare, intelligence, and cover and deception. Among other things, this body would launch secret operations aimed at ‘stimulating reactions’ among terrorists and states possessing weapons of mass destruction — that is, for instance, prodding terrorist cells into action and exposing themselves to ‘quick-response’ attacks by US forces.” [Los Angeles Times, 10/27/02, Asia Times, 11/5/02]

October 29, 2002: MSNBC reports that of the “more than 800 people” rounded up since 9/11, “only 10 have been linked in any way to the hijackings” and “probably will turn out to be innocent.” [Newsweek, 10/29/02] Though many were held for months, the vast majority were never charged with anything other than overstaying a visa. [NY Times, 7/11/02]

November 12, 2002: A new audio tape purportedly made by bin Laden, in which he praises recent terrorist attacks in Bali, Kuwait, Yemen and Moscow, is broadcast by Al Jazeera. [BBC, 11/13/02, BBC, 11/18/02] US officials believe the voice is “almost certainly” bin Laden, but the Dalle Molle Institute for Perceptual Artificial Intelligence in Switzerland, one of the world’s leading voice-recognition institutes, is 95% certain the tape is a forgery. [BBC, 11/18/02, BBC, 11/29/02, Toronto Star, 12/16/02]

November 27, 2002: President Bush names Henry Kissinger as Chairman of the National Commission on Terrorist Attacks Upon the United States. Kissinger served as Secretary of State and National Security Advisor for Presidents Nixon and Ford. [New York Times, 11/28/02] Kissinger’s ability to remain independent is met with skepticism [Pittsburgh Post-Gazette, 12/3/02, Washington Post, 12/1/02, Chicago Sun-Times, 12/13/02, CNN, 11/30/02, Sydney Morning Herald, 11/29/02]. He has a very controversial past – for instance, “Documents recently released by the CIA, strengthen previously-held suspicions that Kissinger was actively involved in the establishment of Operation Condor, a covert plan involving six Latin American countries to assassinate thousands of political opponents.” He is also famous for an “obsession with secrecy.” [BBC, 4/26/02] It is even difficult for Kissinger to travel outside the US. Investigative judges in Spain, France, Chile and Argentina seek to question him in several legal actions related to his involvement in war crimes particularly in Latin America, Vietnam, Cambodia, Bangladesh, Chile and East Timor. [BBC, 4/18/02, Village Voice, 8/15-21/01, Chicago Tribune, 12/1/02] “Indeed, it is tempting to wonder if the choice of Mr. Kissinger is not a clever maneuver by the White House to contain an investigation it long opposed.” [New York Times, 11/29/02]

December 4, 2002: Marion Bowman, the person who refused to seek a special warrant for a search of Zacarias Moussaoui’s belongings before the 9/11 attacks, (see August 23-27, 2001 and August 28, 2001 (D)) is among nine recipients of bureau awards for “exceptional performance.” The award came shortly after a 9/11 Congressional inquiry report that said Bowman’s unit gave Minneapolis FBI agents “inexcusably confused and inaccurate information” that was ”patently false.” [Star Tribune, 12/22/02] Bowman’s unit also blocked an urgent request by FBI agents to begin searching for Khalid Almihdhar after his name was put on a watch list (see August 29, 2001). In early 2000, the FBI acknowledged serious blunders in surveillance Bowman’s unit conducted during sensitive terrorism and espionage investigations, including agents who illegally videotaped suspects, intercepted e-mails without court permission, and recorded the wrong phone conversations. [AP, 1/10/03] Mueller also promotes Pasquale D’Amuro, the FBI’s counter-terrorism chief in New York City before 9/11, to the bureau’s top counter-terrorism post. A former Justice Department official says Mueller has “promoted the exact same people who have presided over the … failure.” [Time, 12/30/02]

December 9, 2002: US commanders have rejected as too risky many special operations missions to attack Taliban and al-Qaeda fighters in Afghanistan. After Army Green Beret A-Teams received good intelligence on the whereabouts of former Taliban leader Mullah Mohammed Omar, commanders turned down the missions as too dangerous. [Washington Times, 12/9/02]

December 11, 2002: A Senate Select Committee on Intelligence investigating the performance of government agencies before the 9/11 attacks releases its final report. The committee accuses the Bush administration of refusing to declassify information, criticizes the FBI, and says the CIA lacked an effective system for holding its officials accountable for their actions. Asked if 9/11 could have been prevented, Senator Bob Graham (D), the committee chairman, gives “a conditional yes.” Graham says the Bush administration has given Americans an “incomplete and distorted picture” of the foreign assistance the hijackers may have received.” [ABC, 12/10/02] Graham further says “There are many more findings to be disclosed,” that Americans would find “more than interesting.” He and others express frustration that information that should be released is being kept classified by the Bush administration. [St. Petersburg Times, 12/12/02] Senator Richard Shelby (R), the vice chairman, singles out six people as having “failed in significant ways to ensure that this country was as prepared as it could have been:” CIA Director Tenet; Tenet’s predecessor, John Deutch; former FBI Director Louis Freeh; NSA Director Michael Hayden; Hayden’s predecessor, Lt. Gen. Kenneth Minihan; and former Deputy Director Barbara McNamara. [Washington Post, 12/11/02; Committee Findings, Committee Recommendations] Shelby says that Tenet should resign. “There have been more failures on his watch as far as massive intelligence failures than any CIA director in history. Yet he’s still there. It’s inexplicable to me.” [Reuters, 12/10/02, PBS Newshour, 12/11/02]

December 13, 2002: Henry Kissinger resigns as head of the new 9/11 investigation (see November 27, 2002). [AP, 12/13/02, ABC, 12/13/02, copy of resignation letter] Two days earlier, the Bush Administration argued that Kissinger was not required to disclose his private business clients. [New York Times, 12/12/02] However, the Congressional Research Service insists that he does, and Kissinger resigns rather than reveal his clients. [MSNBC, 12/13/02, Seattle Times, 12/14/02] It is reported that Kissinger is (or has been) a consultant for Unocal, the oil corporation, and was involved in plans to build pipelines through Afghanistan. [Washington Post, 10/5/98, Salon, 12/3/02] Kissinger claimed he did no current work for any oil companies or Mideast clients, but several corporations with heavy investments in Saudi Arabia pay him consulting fees of at least $250,000 a year. [Newsweek, 12/15/02] In a surprising break from usual procedures regarding high-profile presidential appointments, White House lawyers never vetted Kissinger for conflicts of interest. [Newsweek, 12/15/02]

December 16, 2002: President Bush names former New Jersey governor Thomas Kean as the Chairman of the National Commission on Terrorist Attacks Upon the United States, after his original choice, Henry Kissinger, resigned. [Washington Post, 12/17/02] In an appearance on NBC, Kean promises an aggressive investigation. “It’s really a remarkably broad mandate, so I don’t think we’ll have any problem looking under every rock. I’ve got no problems in going as far as we have to in finding out the facts.” [AP, 12/17/02] However, Kean plans to remain President of Drew University and devote only one day a week to the commission. He also claims he would have no conflicts of interest, stating: “I have no clients except the university.” [Washington Post, 12/17/02] However, he has a history of such conflict. Multinational Monitor has previously stated: “Perhaps no individual more clearly illustrates the dangers of university presidents maintaining corporate ties than Thomas Kean,” citing the fact that he is on the Board of Directors of Aramark (which received a large contract with his university after he became president), Bell Atlantic, United Health Care, Beneficial Corporation, Fiduciary Trust Company International, and others. [Multinational Monitor, 11/97] Most disturbing is his Board of Director and Executive Committee positions at Amerada Hess, an oil company with extensive investments in Central Asia. [Amerada Hess, 2002] The mainstream media has barely mentioned Kean’s conflict of interest with Amerada Hess. [AP, 1/20/03]

Jan 13, 2003: The worldwide turmoil caused by US government policies goes not exactly unreported, but entirely de-emphasized. Guardian writers are inundated by e-mails from Americans asking why their own papers never print what is in UK papers. If there is a Watergate scandal lurking in this administration, it is unlikely to be [Washington Post’s Bob] Woodward or his colleagues who will tell us about it. If it emerges, it will probably come out on the web. “That is a devastating indictment of the state of American newspapers.” [Guardian, 1/13/03]

March 26, 2003: Though the investigation into the space shuttle Columbia tragedy cost $50 million and the Ken Starr investigation of Whitewater and Monica Lewinsky ran $64 million, the White House balks at increasing funding beyond $3 million for the 9/11 Commission’s investigation into the worst terror attack ever. The latest effort to curtail funding has angered victims of the attacks. “The White House decision was another in a long line of efforts to water down or shrink the panel’s role.” [Time, 3/26/03, MSNBC, 9/20/06]

July 22, 2004: The 9/11 Commission Report is published. It fails to mention that a year before the attacks a secret Pentagon project named Able Danger had identified four 9/11 hijackers, including leader Mohamed Atta. The Commission spokesperson initially states members were not informed of this, but later acknowledges they were. [New York Times, 8/11/05]

Nov 19, 2004: The fear that Afghanistan might degenerate into a narco-state is becoming a reality. Afghanistan has surpassed Colombia as the world’s biggest gross producer of illicit narcotics, heroin being the “main engine of economic growth” and the “strongest bond” among tribes that previously fought constantly. What we have here now is a narco-economy where 40 to 50 percent of the GDP is from illicit drugs. [San Francisco Chronicle, 11/19/04] How does a country controlled by the US become the largest producer of illegal drugs? For a possible answer, click here.

Nov 17, 2005: Former FBI Director Louis Freeh: “The Able Danger intelligence, if confirmed, is undoubtedly the most relevant fact of the entire post-9/11 inquiry. Yet the 9/11 Commission inexplicably concluded that it ‘was not historically significant.’ This astounding conclusion—in combination with the failure to investigate Able Danger and incorporate it into its findings—raises serious challenges to the commission’s credibility and, if the facts prove out, might just render the commission historically insignificant itself.” [Wall Street Journal, 11/17/05]

2004 – 2005: A growing number of top government officials and public leaders express disbelief in the official story of 9/11. Some even believe 9/11 may have been an inside job. 100 prominent leaders and forty 9/11 family members sign a statement calling for an unbiased inquiry into evidence that suggests high-level government officials may have deliberately allowed the attacks to occur. [Various Publications]

August 9, 2006: A shocking new book by the 9/11 Commission co-chairmen Thomas Kean and Lee Hamilton says we still don’t know the whole truth about 9/11. The book outlines repeated misstatements by the Pentagon and the FAA. Untrue–the military’s original timeline of United Flight 93. Equally untrue, the government’s timeline for American Flight 77 and details about fighter jets scrambled to intercept it. CNN News anchor Lou Dobbs: “The fact that the government would permit deception…and perpetuate the lie suggests that we need a full investigation of what is going on.” [CNN, 8/9/06 , MSNBC/AP, 8/4/06, more]

2006-2014: Over 50 senior government officials from the military, intelligence, Cabinet and Congress, and over 100 highly respected professors, including engineers, physicists, architects, philosophers and theologians publicly criticize The 9/11 Commission Report as flawed, and call for a new, independent investigation. Over 2,000 architects and engineers have created a website calling for a new investigation. Some even claim rogue elements of government were involved in the attacks. [Officials, Professors, Architects and Engineers]

TRUTH TALK NEWS where news and HowardNema.com

TRUTH TALK NEWS with Howard Nema

Saturdays 1-3pm EST on http://www.UnitedFMRadio.com

Call in # 860-626-5193

Listen on any device @

http://streema.com/radios/United_FM_Radio

Subscribe, follow and share the truth!

TRUTH TALK NEWS

“Where truth the mainstream media ignores is the top story!”

http://www.HowardNema.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNews

http://www.TruthTalkNews.blogspot.com

http://www.youtube.com/TruthTalkNewsLIVE

‘One basic truth can be used as a foundation for a mountain of lies, and if we dig down deep enough in the mountain of lies, and bring out that truth, to set it on top of the mountain of lies; the entire mountain of lies will crumble under the weight of that one truth, and there is nothing more devastating to a structure of lies than the revelation of the truth upon which the structure of lies was built, because the shock waves of the revelation of the truth reverberate, and continue to reverberate throughout the Earth for generations to follow, awakening even those people who had no desire to be awakened to the truth.’

Delamer Duverus

If you seek truth and want to help restore Our Constitutional Republic please subscribe and share the valuable information contained on this site. Thank you for your continued support.

All content on TRUTH TALK NEWS, United FM Radio and HowardNema.com are for the purposes of FAIR USE.

All content herein can be used by anyone in accordance with U.S. Copyright law.

TRUTH TALK NEWS and HowardNema.com are free and independent of any network, group or association.

FAIR USE NOTICE: Some content displayed on this video/site may contain copyrighted material the use of which has not been specifically authorized by the copyright owner. This material has been made available in our efforts to advance understanding political, human rights, economic, democracy, scientific, and social justice issues, etc. constituting a ‘fair use’ of any such copyrighted material as provided for in section 107 of the US Copyright Law. In accordance with Title 17 U.S.C. Section 107, all the material on this site is distributed without profit to those who have expressed a prior interest in receiving the included information for research and educational purposes